Tips Category RSS Feed | Tips RSS Feed on en Launch Media Network Hearthstone Guide: How to Beat Lord Marrowgar,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/l/o/r/lord-marrowgar-5b2a8.jpg q86vf/hearthstone-guide-how-to-beat-lord-marrowgar Sat, 19 Aug 2017 12:57:37 -0400 Kellan Pine

With the Knights of the Frozen Throne expansion to Hearthstone, Blizzard has introduced more challenging single player content than ever before. The new missions are based on the World of Warcraft raid Icecrown Citadel, with the Lower Citadel containing the first set of bosses players can face. Lord Marrowgar sets a high bar for player skill, which is why we decided to give you all the information you will need to beat him.

Lord Marrowgar, like all Hearthstone bosses, has a unique hero power as well as a selection of unique cards. This creates a specific set of mechanics for players to deal with during the match. Of all the abilities available to Lord Marrowgar, two stick out as being particularly shocking when players first encounter them -- Skeletal Reconstruction and Bone Spike.

Skeletal Reconstruction Bone Spike

Skeletal Reconstruction is Lord Marrowgar's unique hero power and primary defensive mechanic. The ability allows him to restore his health to a full 30 points for free every turn. As a result, players need to be able to deal 30 damage in a single turn to win. There are multiple ways to do this, with one of the easiest being Lord Marrowgar's own Bone Spike card.

Players with access to Priest cards like Mind Control can take a Bone Spike as their own, effectively cutting Lord Marrowgar's health in half. This makes the match more manageable. Of course, Bone Spike can also be dealt with through standard removal like Shadow Word: Pain. Minion damage is also an option for removing Bone Spike, as it has 0 attack and will not destroy your minions.

Mind Control  Shadow Word: Pain

Lord Marrowgar has two other unique offensive cards, as well -- Bone Storm and Bry'roll, the Bone Arbiter. Bone Storm is a relatively minor threat as it only deals 1 damage to all enemies. However, it allows Lord Marrowgar to draw an additional card. This means his more dangerous cards are never far away.

Bryn'troll is a strong weapon card that Lord Marrowgar can equip. It allows him to deal 3 damage twice per turn for 3 turns. When the boss uses both Bone Storm and Bryn'troll on the same turn, he can clear out key minions from your side of the board. Weapon removal is highly recommended because of this possibility.

Bone Storm  Bryn'troll

The final two boss-only cards found in this match are minions that benefit the player. Deathcharger and Skeletal Knight reward the player for defeating them by either dealing damage to Lord Marrowgar or giving the player a random card from Knights of the Frozen Throne. While Deathcharger can help get you to the 30 damage total in a single turn, it is likely to die before you want it to.

Skeletal Knight might give you a great card, or it might give you a card that you can't take advantage of. Planning around either of these minions is not advisable, but neither should be considered a significant threat.

Deathcharger  Skeletal Knight

So how do you beat Lord Marrowgar with the knowledge of these cards? You have to deal 30 damage in a single turn, while also having a way to deal with Bone Spikes before they can damage you. The best classes for this are the Priest, Mage, and Druid.

Lord Marrowgar vs. Priest

As mentioned earlier in the guide, cards like Shadow Word: Pain and Mind Control will be vital for this class. Turning a single Bone Spike effectively cuts Lord Marrowgar's health from 30 to 15 if you can keep it alive. The ability to heal minions after Bone Storm or attacks also serves to make things easier.

Lord Marrowgar vs. Mage

If you do not have access to a good selection of Priest cards, Mage is another good choice for this fight. The objective here is to get enough cards in hand to deal 30 damage with spells and minions. Spells like Fireball and Frostbolt are key. The player can cast two Fireball spells and one Frostbolt to deal 15 spell damage in a single turn. The remaining damage will have to come from minions that are able to attack that turn.

Cards like Shatter or Polymorph can be used to deal with Bone Spikes by destroying a frozen Bone Spike or turning one into a sheep that is easily removed in more conventional ways. 

Lord Marrowgar vs. Druid

A deck from the Druid class will probably use a different technique for handling Lord Marrowgar. Rather than use his own minions against him, or whittle him down with spells, a Druid will use strategies like the popular Jade Druid deck. Essentially, the Druid is good at summoning a large number of powerful minions. This allows them to beat the boss through minion damage.

While these three classes have the easiest chance of beating Lord Marrowgar, any class can do it as long as you follow this list when building your deck:

  • Bring removal to deal with Bone Spikes before they can trigger -- Shadow Word: Pain, Mind Control, Corruption, even Stubborn Gastropod if you need to.
  • Bring a way to deal with weapon damage. Something like Acidic Swamp Ooze will remove Lord Marrowgar's dangerous weapon before he can use it.
  • Have a way to summon minions quickly, time is not on your side against Lord Marrowgar.

Good luck in Icecrown Citadel, and feel free to post in the comments if you have additional tips!

And make sure to check out our other Knights of the Frozen Throne guides for more tips and strategies. 

What's What in the New Cities Skylines Concerts DLC,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/r/s/z/rsz-cities-skylines-concerts-bc934.png eke8t/whats-what-in-the-new-cities-skylines-concerts-dlc Fri, 18 Aug 2017 17:47:40 -0400 ESpalding

It seems like only yesterday that we were discussing the Cities: Skylines - Mass Transit DLC. But now Paradox Interactive is giving us yet another DLC for their smash-hit city building sim. The new Concerts DLC gives players the opportunity to host and manage their own outdoor concerts. With a new festival ground, festival management, and an in-game radio station, there is a lot of new content to keep you entertained.

We've drawn up this guide to show you whats what in the new DLC and how it all fits together with existing content.

How to Unlock the Festival Ground in Cities: Skylines - Concerts

It's actually relatively easy to unlock the Festival Ground -- you just need to do a bit of groundwork beforehand. The festival ground will become useable once you have reached a population of 1,000 people. So spend time at the beginning of your game building residential areas and work on drawing people into the city to live.

As with all unique buildings, the festival ground needs to be built next to a road and preferably away from too much residential construction, as residents may be affected by noise pollution.

You will find the festival ground build option in the first tab of the unique building menu.

How to Hold a Festival in Cities: Skylines - Concerts

Luckily, the festivals/concerts run automatically. There are three bands on the concert list, and all the game does is cycle through them. Even though it would be nice to constantly hold heavy metal concerts, for example, you have to think about the rest of the citizens of your city!

If you click on your festival ground, it will bring up a new menu. In this menu, you will be able to see the dates of future concerts, past concerts, how well they were received by your citizens, ticket prices, different kinds of budgeting sliders, and upgrade options for your festival ground.

Getting Your Concert to be a Success in Cities: Skylines - Concerts

There are a lot of different factors that you need to get take into consideration for your concerts to be a success. First of all, you need to make sure that your citizens can get to the venue. To do this, you need to make sure you have sufficient public transport in place. You could have a bus route that stops outside, a train station nearby, the venue could even be served by a metro line.

You need to make sure you keep an eye on an artists popularity. All the artists start at 50 popularity but, depending on the success of a concert, this can increase or decrease. Obviously, if an artist's popularity increases, you don't have to worry about people attending. But if it goes down, you need to figure out a way of getting people in. One way of doing this is to lower the ticket prices. Lower ticket prices will draw more to a concert and hopefully work on increasing how popular the artist is.

How to Upgrade Your Festival Area in Cities: Skylines - Concerts

While there aren't is any other new buildings in the DLC apart from the festival area, you can still change its appearance, how many buildings are in the area, and its maximum capacity by upgrading the plot. These aren't unlocked by getting to a certain level, but they do have certain criteria you need to fulfill.

2-Star Upgrade

The criteria you need to fulfill to upgrade your festival to a 2-star venue are:

  • Held 6 concerts at the venue
  • At least one band with a popularity of 70
  • $90,000 to cover upgrade costs
3-Star Upgrade

The criteria you need to fulfill to upgrade your festival area to its maximum are:

  • Held 18 concerts at the venue
  • At least one band with a popularity of 85
  • Had at least one sold out concert
  • $120,000 to cover upgrade costs

The Cities: Skylines -  Concerts DLC is available now through Steam and requires no other expansion aside from the original game.

If you like this guide then you need to check out the rest of our Cities: Skylines guides for more tips and tricks that will make your city the best it can be!

Hearthstone Icecrown Citadel Guide: The Upper Reaches,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-2c9ee.jpg kh0o6/hearthstone-icecrown-citadel-guide-the-upper-reaches Fri, 18 Aug 2017 11:03:27 -0400 Sergey_3847

The second level of the Icecrown Citadel adventure is now live worldwide in Hearthstone. If you managed to beat the first four bosses of the Lower Citadel, then the Upper Reaches will unlock for you to play through.

The upper level includes three bosses: Blood Queen Lana'thel, Professor Putricide, and Sindragosa. This guide will provide you with three cheap decks that will surely help you beat all the bosses and get your free Frozen Throne pack as a reward.

How to Beat Blood Queen Lana'thel in Hearthstone's Icecrown Citadel

Lana'thel is your first boss, and the first thing she does is change your hero power to Vampiric Bite that costs 0 mana and gives any minion +2/+2. The trick is that you must use this power every turn, even if you have no minions of your own on the board.

This means that you should always have at least one of your minions on board every turn, or you will have to buff one of Lana'thel's minions. Also, it must always be a fresh one, since the Vampiric Bite works only once on each minion.

In order to beat Blood Queen Lana'thel you need to make a deck that consists of many cheap minions that have Charge and can go face immediately. The best class for this job is Hunter.

Here is the Hunter decklist you can use to beat Lana'thel:

  • 2x Alleycat
  • 2x Animal Companion
  • 2x Bluegill Warrior
  • 2x Crackling Razormaw
  • 2x Dire Wolf Alpha
  • 2x Eaglehorn Bow
  • 2x Kill Command
  • 2x Kindly Grandmother
  • 2x Raptor Hatchling
  • 2x Scavenging Hyena
  • 2x Stonetusk Boar
  • 2x Stubborn Gastropod
  • 2x Tundra Rhino
  • 2x Vicious Fledgling
  • 2x Wolfrider

How to Beat Professor Putricide in Hearthstone's Icecrown Citadel

The battle against the second boss consists of three phases. Each phase will mark the change of Professor's hero power to something even more sinister. He begins with 30 points of life and 15 armor. Every time you break his armor, he will regenerate it and enter the next phase.

In the first phase his hero power will make all secrets cost 0 mana -- including yours. This is a great opportunity for you to play one of the three classes that utilizes secrets: Hunter, Mage, or Paladin.

As soon as you break his armor, he will activate his second hero power that makes all weapons cost 1 mana. In the third and final phase all cards will cost 5 mana, which will limit you to two plays each turn.

All this means that you need to have tools that destroy secrets and weapons. Among the three mentioned heroes, the best one turned out to be Mage.

Here is the Mage decklist you can use to beat Professor Putricide:

  • 2x Acidic Swamp Ooze
  • 2x Arcane Missiles
  • 2x Arcanologist
  • 2x Counterspell
  • 2x Eater of Secrets
  • 2x Fireball
  • 2x Firelands Portal
  • 1x Flamestrike
  • 2x Frostbolt
  • 2x Gluttonous Ooze
  • 2x Ice Barrier
  • 2x Mana Wyrm
  • 2x Medivh's Valet
  • 2x Polymorph
  • 1x Pyroblast
  • 2x Secretkeeper

How to Beat Sindragosa in Hearthstone's Icecrown Citadel

Sindragosa is a powerful dragon that will prevent you from playing your minions by blocking your board with four immovable blocks of ice. Thus you will be able to play three minions max.

Additionally, her hero power will turn all of your minions into blocks of ice when her life total goes down to 20. If you're not careful, your board will be fully blocked, and you will have no chance of playing any more of your minions.

All this indicates that you need to have an OTK combo on your hands, and at the same time be able to remove all of her threats. The plan is to play your minions and buff them up with Divine Spirit + Inner Fire combo as a Priest until you have a total minion power of 30 damage or more on board. Then, you can kill her with one shot.

Here is the Priest decklist you can use to beat Sindragosa:

  • 2x Ancient Watcher
  • 2x Binding Heal
  • 2x Divine Spirit
  • 2x Forbidden Shaping
  • 2x Humongous Razorleaf
  • 2x Inner Fire
  • 2x Kabal Talonpriest
  • 2x Lightspawn
  • 2x Lightwell
  • 2x Power Word: Shield
  • 2x Purify
  • 2x Radiant Elemental
  • 2x Shadow Word: Death
  • 2x Shadow Word: Pain
  • 2x Silence


That is it for Upper Reaches bosses in the Icecrown Citadel adventure, and in the meantime check out other Hearthstone guides at GameSkinny:

Gigantic Tier List: All Heroes and Their Stats,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/g/i/g/gigantic-moba-1dbf4.jpg aj5sr/gigantic-tier-list-all-heroes-and-their-stats Fri, 18 Aug 2017 10:43:45 -0400 tofuslayer

Gigantic is the upcoming free-to-play MOBA from Motiga, that released on July 19 for PC and Xbox One. Each of the heroes in this team-based combat game has their own set of unique abilities and stats -- and knowing them is important to building the most effective party.

So far, there are 22 different heroes across 6 playable tiers. This list will lay out all the heroes we currently have, which tier they are in, and all their stats.

S+ Tier Characters in Gigantic

  • Type: Ranged
  • Role: Shooter
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 2100
    • Front armor: 30
    • Back armor: 20

Lord Knossos
  • Type: Melee
  • Role: Bruiser
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 2500
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10

S Tier Characters in Gigantic

  • Type: Melee
  • Role: Assassin
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 1500
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10

  • Type: Melee
  • Role: Fighter
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 1700
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10

  • Type: Ranged
  • Role: Shooter
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 1600
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10

Uncle Sven
  • Type: Ranged
  • Role: Healer/Utility
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 2100
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10

A+ Tier Characters in Gigantic

The Margrave
  • Type: Melee
  • Role: Tank
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 2950
    • Front armor: 30
    • Back armor: 20

  • Type: Melee
  • Role: Assassin

  • Type: Melee
  • Role: Tank/Utility

  • Type: Ranged
  • Role: Caster
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 2000
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10

  • Type: Melee
  • Role: Tank
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 2150
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10

A Tier Characters in Gigantic

  • Type: Melee
  • Role: Bruiser/Control
  • HP Regeneration Delay: 4s
  • Health &  Armor Values:
    • Health: 2450 
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10
    • Armor back special: 10

Tyto the Swift
  • Type: Melee
  • Role: Assassin
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1/s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 1700
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10
    • Right side armor: 10

  • Type: Ranged
  • Role: Shooter/Utility
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 1600
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10

B+ Tier Characters in Gigantic

  • Type: Ranged
  • Role: Shooter
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 1500
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10

  • Type: Ranged
  • Role: Caster
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 1500
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10

  • Type: Ranged
  • Role: Control
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 1700
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10

B Tier Characters in Gigantic

  • Type: Melee
  • Role: Summoner/Utility
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 1500
    • Front armor: 25
    • Back armor: 15
    • Left side armor: 15
    • Right side armor: 25
    • Front armor special: 35
    • Back armor special: 25

  • Type: Ranged
  • Role: Summoner
  • HP Regeneration: Delay: 5s/ Rate: 133s
  • Stamina Regeneration Delay: 1s
  • Health & Armor Values: 
    • Health: 1600
    • Front armor: 15
    • Back armor: 10


Those are all the heroes we currently have info on! Check out our other Gigantic guides, and be sure to stay tuned for more content as the game gets updated!

How to Get Aluminum In Last Day On Earth: Survival,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/8/7/18765931-487045561633271-2190056926525296850-322a1.jpg 98d10/how-to-get-aluminum-in-last-day-on-earth-survival Fri, 18 Aug 2017 09:47:09 -0400 ActionJ4ck

With Aluminum Bars and Aluminum Wire finally added to the game, Last Day on Earth: Survival players are scrambling to get their hands on this valuable resource. Unfortunately, like many items in the game, it's not entirely clear where to find aluminum.

Luckily GameSkinny is here to make sure you spend less time searching and more time surviving. In this short guide, we'll go over how you can get both these aluminum materials in Last Day on Earth and what resources you need to do so.

How to Get Aluminum Wire in Last Day on Earth: Survival

Now that you know what you need to get Aluminum Bars, you need to know where to find Aluminum Wire. Unfortunately, it's not going to be easy.

Aluminum Wire can be found from looting inside Alfa Bunker floor 1 and Alfa Bunker floor 2. While player reports seem to indicate that the 2nd floor of Alfa Bunker has a higher drop rate of Aluminum Wire than the 1st floor, you'll find a pretty dramatic spike in difficulty there.

Ultimately it's up to you to determine whether the potentially higher drop rate is worth the risk or not. If you still can't access this bunker, check out our guide to the Alfa Bunker vault code to find out how to get inside.

How to Get Aluminum Bars in Last Day on Earth: Survival

In order to get aluminum bars in Last Day on Earth: Survival, you'll first need to acquire the Melting Furnace, the blueprint of which can be obtained starting at level 6.

After shelling out the 10 Limestone Ore and 5 Iron Ore for the furnace you'll be able to make Aluminum Bars. To do this, melt down 2x Aluminum Wire into 1x Aluminum Bar. Just be aware that the melting process will take a whopping 26 minutes to complete. 

How to Use Aluminum In Last Day on Earth: Survival

Now that you've got a good stock of Aluminum Bars in your inventory, you can get to crafting. For 15 Pine Planks, 25 Iron Bars, 20 Rubber Parts, 10 Aluminum Bars, and 20 Nails, you can build the Gunsmith Bench -- a valuable furniture that will give you access to crafting all kinds of guns.

Alternatively, you can spend 4 Aluminum Bars, 4 Weapon Parts, 5 Duct Tapes, 3 Bolts to craft the surprisingly powerful Zip Gun

With Aluminum Bars and Aluminum Wire at your disposal, you'll have a much easier time staying alive. But since you can never be too safe, be sure to check out some of our other Last Day on Earth: Survival guides here on Gameskinny:

The Elder Scrolls Online: Falkreath Hold Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/f/a/l/falkreathholdheader1-a5d2d.png 05g6x/the-elder-scrolls-online-falkreath-hold-guide Thu, 17 Aug 2017 15:42:43 -0400 Seth Zulinski

Just a few short days ago, Elder Scrolls Online dropped its first major DLC since the release of the Morrowind expansion. With two new dungeons (and a new Trial) in the mix, plus a colossal difficulty spike, the "Horns of the Reach" DLC is already leaving plenty of unprepared players gored. 

Luckily, we did the dungeon delving for you and walked away with a few tips and tricks to help you through defending the besieged Falkreath hold. So paint those white flags red, and charge into this guide -- then show those Reachmen what happens when you mess with the bull. 

ESO: Falkreath Hold Dungeon Overview

The first and most important thing to realize is that the "Horns of the Reach" dungeons (Bloodroot Forge and Falkreath Hold) are definitely in the DLC-difficulty category, and more in line with the overall power of the White-Gold Tower than, say, Fungal Grotto. 

Many "trash mobs" are familiar enemies to long-time players by now -- the humanoid enemies that mimic a player class and pose a medium threat are still around, and have added a Warden substitute equipped with a bow, Cliff Screecher, and Insect Swarm to their ranks.

The truly dangerous members of the Dreadhorn clan are apparent soon enough, however, as three new Minotaur enemies have joined the fray. 

The first, Dreadhorn Wallbreakers, wield massive axes and can easily one-shot squishier party members on Normal -- and tanks on Veteran. Block or dodge roll the heavy attacks, but otherwise just treat them like the gigantic damage sponges that they are. 

Dreadhorn Tramplers also boast the capability to destroy a player -- though mostly only in Veteran mode. Sidestep or block their bull rushes and avoid the flames. 

Earthbinders are an upgrade on their human allies most of the time, and do many of the same things, but also boast the ability to damage shield themselves. These minotaur mages also create massive delayed AoEs in the form of magma rocks that burst from the ground -- and then burst into the air for massive bleed damage.

Lastly, the dungeon design in this DLC makes "grouping" clusters of enemies together to lay down the Area of Effect damage a bit harder than usual. Whether you're in the woodlands out front or the urban environment of Falkreath Hold itself, be prepared to defend against enemies coming from multiple sides and elevations throughout, or your party will be burning Soul Shards faster than you can say, "Ole!"

Boss 1: Morrigh Bullblood

At least Falkreath Hold eases you into the difficulty curve, giving you "only" a handful of human enemies and a single Wallbreaker alongside the first boss of the dungeon. Luckily for us, Morrigh isn't exactly turning up a ton of new tricks, being a fairly straightforward fight until around half health or lower. Her spinning blade attack does have a stun and silence component, though. So watch out for that.

Once Morrigh dips below half health, she will occasionally protect herself with a wide-area golden shield as fire rains from the sky. Unfortunately for her, we've had plenty of practice with her trump card, thanks to the Vaults of Madness, and know to hide inside her shield until the attack is over.

Boss 2: Siege Mammoth

This woolly wonder is found milling about just past Morrigh, stomping about the gate to Falkreath Hold. Have the tank close distance and keep it facing along the outer wall, while any ranged characters keep their distance and melee users stick to the back of the creature.

Its primary attack -- a horizontal swing of its gigantic tusks -- is a heavy damage cone that can chunk tanks and leave your damage and heals either dead or dying. Block or simply walk backwards to avoid this. 

Usually it will follow up a tusk swing or two with a wild charge, knocking anyone in front of it back and down. Tanks that attempt to keep their back to the wall will soon be forced to face the mammoth towards their back line, but letting it charge back and forth along the gate wall keeps your crew mostly safe. 

Siege Mammoth's last attack, triggered in the second phase subtly cued by its entire back being set ablaze, is a rear-and-stomp that sends some of the flames from its body out in waves. These hurt badly in normal mode, and will regularly one-shot any non-tanks in Veteran. Dodge roll or avoid them, or die. 

With the mammoth extinguished, it's time to head inside the Hold. Help Eeryka evacuate and secure as much of the Hold as she can - usually by fighting off waves of Dreadhorn Tramplers, Earthbinders, and Reachmen - and eventually you'll come upon...

Boss 3: Cernunnon and his amazing friends

See the gigantic glowing blue Bone Colossus up ahead? See how he splits into little spheres that travel inside Tuecille, Mokveda, and Erbogar? Most importantly, see those little altars? 

Engage the three (though be careful of Tuecille, as its Veteran counterpart's heavy attack deals 65k+ damage when unblocked), and be sure to keep the fight inside the swirling circle of smoke. When you see "the Vortex tugs at your soul", it's the games way of telling you that if you leave this circle, you will die. 

Take out Erbogar (the archer) first, and have a DPS pick up the orb he drops upon "death" and walk it to a nearby glowing altar -- but move fast, as the orb increasingly slows and damages its carrier over time. Once the orb is deposited, Erbogar will finally fall (rather than rise at 30% health, as he does if you fail).

Repeat this process with Tuecille, and finally Mokveda before Cernunnon rises from its glowing pit and engages you itself. Stay spread out to avoid killing each other with the splash damage from his meteors (cued by a charged glowing ball of energy in his hands), and make sure to keep your guard up if tanking -- as his bone blade also deals roughly 65k+ damage unblocked. 

Break his bones down to roughly 70%, and Cernunnon will retreat back to his circle to resummon his three minions for another round. Kill them the same way as before to end the phase and drag the Colossus back to this plane, where you can finish him. 

Follow the retreating Nords into the halls of the dead, keep your eyes on the way the draugr bodies glow after they fall, and keep moving until you find...

Boss 4: Deathlord Bjarfud Skjoralmor

Aside from having what is easily the game's hardest name to correctly pronounce with a straight face, the Deathlord doesn't have very much going for him.

Melee attacks and a few draugr servants comprise most of Bjarfud's repertoire, and nothing is particularly that threatening...

...except a red Damage over time that builds up under each player, and will eventually start dealing lethal amounts of damage. To cleanse this, have at least one character head to a sacred glowing urn found in the corners of the room, and begin cleansing the nearby glowing draugr corpses with X. Once enough are cleansed, the damage ceases for a time. 

Luckily, this time is usually enough to chew through the Deathlord's astonishingly low health pool. So claim your prize, and head outside the Halls into The Thane's Hall. Inside you'll meet the current head of Falkreath, and face...

Final Boss: Domihaus the Bloody-Horned

Domihaus, more than anything, is a DPS check. In his first phase he smashes the ground repeatedly, bringing up rocks that chase each individual player and are incredibly lethal. Avoid these and channel damage into him until his next attack.

For the second move in his rotation, Domihaus turns himself to perfectly invulnerable stone and summons four Atronachs -- one of each element -- to do some of his bloody work for him. Down them quickly, because this attack is not triggered by the death of the elementals, but by time. So any leftovers when he wakes up will stick around and continue fighting.

After taking a significant amount of damage (at around 65%), Domihaus will begin to Shout (cued by the message at the bottom of your screen telling you this). Quickly run behind the nearest pillar, putting it between you and Domihaus, or his Fus-Ro-Dah imitation will quickly leave you Fus-Ro-Dead. 

At 20% or so health, he summons a horde of elementals without freezing himself at all. And another horde. And another after that.  

At around 10%, try to keep all the atronachs corralled near the boss so that they die as a result of AoE damage, and burn him down as soon as possible.

The Bloody-Horned may also bring to bear a series of sharp spikes in circular patterns around him, slowing and steadily dealing damage to all players not in the outer circle near the pillars. Typically, this is the best time to avoid the center and attempt any rezzes -- so if you die, try to die as close to the edge as possible. 

A series of fireballs is also in his arsenal, most of them irritating at best. However one fireball -- denoted by a "charge" where he gathers the fire into his hands -- is perfectly capable of taking out any target that missed the cue or isn't blocking, dealing roughly 65k damage in Veteran Mode. 

Usually, after forcing players to the edge of the arena with the hovering shards, Domihaus will then glow and raise his arms to the sky. That's everyone's cue to jump back into the center of the circle, as the outer ring is about to be filled with flame.

Veteran mode is more of the same with significantly increased stats, though a quick look at the pillars after a Shout reveals the real danger of the encounter -- much like Valkyn Skoria before him, Domihaus is "timed". It would behoove your party to bring the best damage they can find -- if the fight takes too long, eventually the players will simply run out of pillars to hide behind, and be subjected to the full might of the master Minotaur's Voice.

With enough courage and determination (and damage, armor repair kits, and soul shards), you can triumph over the Bloody-Horned and save Falkreath Hold. 


That wraps up this guide to the Falkreath Hold dungeon in ESO. But we still have some questions. What emboldended the Dreadhorn clan so? What led to the alliance of Minotaur and man? Where did these weapons of blood and fire come from? For that, my friends, we'll have to mount an offense against the other Horn of the Reach, and the source of the problem...

The Bloodroot Forge. Stay tuned for another guide on this second dungeon for Horns of the Reach! In the meantime, check out the rest of our ESO guides for more help with the game:

Space Frontier: How to Push Your High Score to New Heights,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/p/a/spacefrontier-c3ff2.jpg x9g07/space-frontier-how-to-push-your-high-score-to-new-heights Thu, 17 Aug 2017 13:19:41 -0400 Zantallion

Space Frontier is the latest game from hit developer Ketchapp -- and though you may not have known it, you've probably heard of their work before. Some of their past works include Ballz, Stack, and (by far their biggest title) 2048. Now, Space Frontier is taking Ketchapp's "apps-pertise" to space in a fun, timing-based game. 

The idea of Space Frontier is simple: launch your rocket into space and get as high as you can by tapping, which jettisons the lowest part of your ship.  In Space Frontier, each segment of your ship holds a set amount of fuel, and your rocket uses that fuel to fly further. When that segment's fuel is used up, tapping it will jettison it and start using the next segment's fuel. If you don't tap in time, however, your ship will explode, and your game will be over.

Time Your Taps Appropriately

The trick to this game is to tap at the right time, just as your fuel runs out, to get the most bang for your buck. You can track your fuel consumption with a helpful fuel meter towards the bottom of the screen. Keep an eye on that meter -- because once you hit empty, you can kiss your shuttle goodbye. But even beyond the basic functions of the game, there's a few other ways to get the most mileage out of your mini-missile.

Tap too soon, and this could be you.

When tapping to release your different rocket pieces, keep an eye on the notification that pops up when you do. If it says something like "Ok" or "Great", you hit it too early. If you're right on the money, you'll see a notification pop that says "Perfect!" with some starry decals. Trying to time these can be difficult, but getting the most perfects you can is essential for maxing out your score. 

Invest in Better Rockets

In addition to well-timed taps, another way to get some more distance is to max out your rocket's capabilities. Using in-game currency, you can unlock not only different rockets, but also upgrades for the rockets.

Different rockets can fly different distances, have different fuel consumption times, and also have different amounts of thrust. Experiment with different rockets to see which works best for you.

Upgrades can also be bought for the rocket in use before you blast off, so make sure to get as many upgrades as you can as well if you're aiming to really make the leap into outer space. So long as you keep in mind all of these tricks, you'll be breaking the stratosphere in no time.

What are you waiting for? Get out there and explore that final frontier! And if you've found any other strategies that have helped you get out-of-this-world scores, leave a note in the comments below!

Stardew Valley: Mushrooms or Bats? Mushrooms...Here's Why,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/t/a/stardewvallery-header-6a0ff.jpg vtyx4/stardew-valley-mushrooms-or-bats-mushroomsheres-why Thu, 17 Aug 2017 13:12:58 -0400 ThatGamersAsylum

In Stardew Valley you grow your own farm, become part of a community, and seek to restore the community center to its former glory -- among other things.

Once you have started to get your legs underneath you a little bit (by making 25,000 G), a man named Demetrius will offer you the opportunity to participate in an experiment. If you accept, you must decide whether to use your cave as a home for some fruit-providing bats or as a garden for some mushrooms.

But which one should you choose? The answer is clear: mushrooms

In this short guide, we'll go over why you should choose to host mushrooms in your Stardew Valley cave, and what benefits you'll reap from doing so. 

Why Mushrooms are Better than Bats in Stardew Valley

Mushrooms Are A Time Saver

Perhaps the biggest reason to use mushrooms is the fact that it saves a lot of time. Most mushrooms are only available in one or two seasons, which can make them a pain to get in a pinch. Moreover, the only reliable way to get purple mushrooms is by mining -- and it can take mining as deep as the 90th floor before you start reliably seeing large amounts of mushrooms. Not only does that much mining take a long time, but it can also be risky, assuming you value your life.

But if you've got plenty of mushrooms growing right in your own cave, you're all set!

Mushrooms are More Consistent

The bats are, well, bats. They don’t always bring fruit, and the fruit that they bring is random. The mushrooms, on the other hand, are much more reliable. There will be 6 planters, and every two days those will net you 6 mushrooms.

While the mushrooms you get are on a more reliable time table, they are still random -- so you will get some duds.

You Can Grow Fruit, But Not Mushrooms

Naturally, you can eventually grow all types of fruit trees. And it doesn't take a very long time. But you can only grow mushrooms 1 of 2 ways. The first is by choosing the cave option that we're discussing here. The second is completely luck-based and can’t be controlled. During the Fall, there is a chance that a fully grown common tree might be changed into a Big Mushroom Tree overnight. While this tree will spread like other trees, you can not actively plant it, which makes it unreliable.

Moreover, unlike the mushroom cave option -- which provides you with all types of mushrooms -- the Big Mushroom Tree only provides common, red, and purple mushrooms. Because of this, the mushroom option is the only way to reliably have mushrooms without having to actively gather them on your own time.

Mushrooms Let You Make Life Elixirs

There are two types of people in this world -- those that swear by life elixirs, and those that would rather eat spicy eel. I just so happen to be one of the former. Life Elixirs restore all of your HP, which is valuable from the beginning of the game until the end of the game. Simply put, Life Elixirs are one of the best healing items.

Additionally, since Life Elixirs don't give a buff, they will not overwrite a previous buff. Life Elixirs can be made once you have combat Skills at Level 2 and use one (1) of each of the following:

  1. Red mushroom
  2. Purple Mushroom
  3. Morel
  4. Chanterelle

These ingredients are hard to gather without the mushroom option, but become laughably easy to get once you have it. This, in turn, means you don't have to worry about how you are going to heal for much of the game.

The Only Case for Choosing Bats

Honestly, one of my biggest knocks on bats is that they are not as regular as the mushrooms. Not knowing for certain that you will have X number of berries every Y number of days is not only annoying, but can also literally result in you having significantly fewer berries than what you would have earned in an equivalent amount of time getting mushrooms.

That said, some fruit trees can be expensive to buy, and their seeds can take time or luck to obtain. Moreover, some fruit -- blackberries and salmonberries in particular -- are only found on certain days during their respective season, making them a pain to forage.

Fruits also arguably help you complete more essential bundles than mushrooms, such as the Artisan Bundle. Most villagers like most of the fruit variations, and some villagers even love certain fruit. So these factors are all worth considering.

It Doesn’t Matter...Nothing Matters

Ultimately, however, neither decision matters forever. So don’t stress too much. I find mushrooms more helpful, but if your current circumstances mean that you'll find fruit more helpful, then you'll want to go for the bats. Choosing mushrooms or fruits is really just choosing which you’d prefer to have accelerated use of early on.

Need more help with your farming adventure? Check out the rest of our Stardew Valley guides for more tips and tricks:

How to Fix Batman: The Enemy Within's Black Screen Error on Steam,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/b/a/t/batman-enemy-within-episode-7451a.jpg z8my6/how-to-fix-batman-the-enemy-withins-black-screen-error-on-steam Thu, 17 Aug 2017 12:53:40 -0400 Zantallion

Batman and Telltale are back together again on Steam, in a new story packed with bat rogues, plot twists, and more people "remembering that" than you can shake a question-mark-shaped stick at.

But the biggest impediment to Batman dispensing justice in Batman: The Enemy Within isn't Joker or Killer Croc -- it's an all-too-common black screen error. This is a returning Bat-fiend too, as the game's predecessor was also plagued by a similar issue. Thankfully, the vigilantes here at GameSkinny have already cleared up this caper for you, meaning you can get back to kicking Riddler into a pile of trash cans that much quicker.

Keep reading this guide to see how you can fix this common black screen error for The Enemy Within. There's a few potential ways to troubleshoot it, , as may be related to one of many issues in the game.  

Troubleshooting the Black Screen Error in Telltale's Batman

Fix 1: Turn Off Steam Overlay

The first thing you should try is turning off the Steam Overlay. For this, all you'll need to do is pop into Steam, and follow these instructions:

  1. Click the "Steam" option from the menu in the top left
  2. Go to "Settings"
  3. In the window that pops up, select "In-Game"
  4. You'll see a checkbox that says "Enable Steam Community In-Game"
  5. Uncheck this box and save your settings

Once you've done that, try running your game. If you don't get the black screen, congratulations! You solved the issue. But if it still persists, don't worry -- we have other methods you can try.

After all, Batman doesn't give up when the first thing doesn't work.

Fix 2: Tweak Nvidia Settings

For some users, Batman: The Enemy Within has an odd predilection for defaulting to Intel graphics, which causes Nvidia users to have the black screen issue as well.

To fix this problem, you'll need to tweak your settings in Nvidia:

  1. Open your Nvidia Control Panel
  2. Click Manage 3D Settings. From here
  3. Click Add Game
  4. Add Batman: The Enemy Within

You should also make sure that you change your preferred graphic processor to "High-performance NVIDIA processor". 

Once you've done all that, save your game and test it. Hopefully that clears everything up. But if you're still having no luck, there's one final option to try.

Hit this bug harder than Batman is about to hit Riddler.

Fix 3: Turn Off Steam Cloud Sync

Another possible cause for this issue is Steam Cloud not syncing the game properly. So with a little tweaking in your Cloud settings, you might be able to get rid of the black screen for good. Here are the steps you need to take:

  • Right click on Batman: The Enemy Within in your games list
  • Click "Properties"
  • In the updates tab of this new window, find the section on Steam Cloud
  • Uncheck the synchronization box

Now test the game again. If you've followed all the steps here, your game should be working again. Now get in there and show Riddler who Gotham's Greatest really is!

Have you found any other fixes for this pesky black screen bug in Telltale's Batman: The Enemy Within? If so, let us know down in the comments! 

Sonic Mania Guide: All Cheats, Unlockables, and Secrets,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/o/n/sonicmania00-98e67.png 4wt32/sonic-mania-guide-all-cheats-unlockables-and-secrets Thu, 17 Aug 2017 12:18:08 -0400 David Fisher

Sonic Mania may already be twice the length of the classic Genesis titles with its extra zones alone, but there's even more content stored away in this title. While most can be unlocked with simple dedication and practice, the team responsible for this callback to the past greatness of Sonic the Hedgehog made sure to pack in as much extra goodies as possible.

In this guide, we'll go over all the unlockables in Sonic Mania and how you can access every single one of them.

How to Unlock Stage Select and Debug Mode (Cheat)

Before we get to the legitimate ways to unlock bonuses in Sonic Mania, let's cover something a little more nostalgic. If you hold the B and Y button on the Nintendo Switch before the "Press Any Button" prompt appears at the bottom of the title screen, you will unlock the Stage Select mode. Once in Stage Select, you will be able to access any map in the game.

Pressing X while in a stage chosen through Stage Select  will let you access Debug Mode. In this mode you can take the form of any item, object, or enemy and freely place them around the map. Changing the item you are is as simple as pressing the Y or A buttons to cycle through the list. You can also use it as a form of noclip mode, allowing you to explore the stage for the sake of exploration. 

For PS4 and Xbox One Players

Debug Mode and Stage Select can still be unlocked on the Xbox One and PlayStation 4 via collecting Silver or Gold medals from the Blue Spheres Bonus Stages. Afterward, go into the Secrets Menu to activate Debug Mode. Once activated, you can press Square and Options for PS4 or X and Menu on the Xbox One. This was likely done to avoid conflicts with the achievements systems on either console.

How to Unlock "& Knuckles" Mode

Your reward for completing each Blue Spheres stage is bonus lives. However, if you are dedicated enough to complete all of the Blue Spheres bonus stages with Gold Medals, you will unlock the elusive "& Knuckles" mode. 

This mode functions much like the Sonic and Tails mode -- but instead of Tails, you get Knuckles following you around. Even while playing as Knuckles.

The memes are real, kids...

Mean Bean Machine Mode and Blue Spheres Extras

Can't get enough Mean Bean Machine or Blue Spheres? By collecting Gold and Silver medals from the regular Blue Spheres Bonus Stages, you can unlock extra stages for Blue Spheres in a dedicated mode or a full version of Doctor Robotnik's Mean Bean Machine -- which is effectively just a mini-arcade version of Puyo Puyo.

The Mean Bean Machine substitute can even be played with a friend. So if you're really dying to get your hands on some knockoff Puyo Puyo, start finding those medals!

Wind Attack and Super Peel Out Abilities

Sonic's Wind Attack from Sonic 3 -- otherwise known as the Insta-Shield and Twin-Spin Attack -- as well as the Super Peel Out ability from Sonic CD are available in Sonic Mania as unlockable skill sets. Each is unlocked by gathering either the Silver or Gold medals from the Blue Spheres Bonus Stages. And unfortunately, these abilities can only be used in No Save mode.

To access them after unlocking them, simply press Y or Triangle to open up the bonuses menu, change Sonic's abilities to the mode you want, and then start a No Save game.

What is the Wind Attack?

For those who don't know what the Wind Attack is, in Sonic 3 and Sonic Advance you could press the jump button to create a split-second barrier that will destroy enemies just out of range of your spin jump. It's just a few pixels wider than your regular jump attack, but it is particularly useful for beating basic enemies that are a little more defensive.

Super Peel Out?

On the other hand, Super Peel Out from Sonic CD lets you hold up on the D-Pad or Control Stick while pressing the jump button to wind up your running speed. This lets Sonic run at full speed without having to use the Spin Dash ability. While this seems like a straight downgrade to the Spin Dash, the Super Peel Out ability is much better at keeping its momentum than being in ball form.

That's all for now!

These extra features in Sonic Mania really show how dedicated the developers were to making a true Sonic the Hedgehog title for the fans. Remember, these are just the unlockables, so be sure to turn on that debug mode and see if you can find any Easter Eggs hidden throughout the stages! As always, stay tuned to for more on Sonic Mania guides.

Black Desert Online: Fixing the Internal Error,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/h/e/a/header-404a3.jpg gxir9/black-desert-online-fixing-the-internal-error Thu, 17 Aug 2017 11:06:52 -0400 StraightEdge434

It looks like quite a number of players are running into an annoying error whenever they try to play Black Desert Online. An "internal error" happens whenever players try to purchase an item or recharge an item with "real life currency" from the Black Desert Online store.

Not only does this cause failed transactions and frustration among players, but there is also the possibility of triggering a Fraud Prevention system -- which basically freezes your ability to make any future purchases for the next 24 hours.

Of course, this internal error is not a pleasant thing to deal with -- because not only are you not receiving the item that you need or desire, but you are also at risk of getting "banned" for 24 hours (not from playing the game, but from purchasing anything else).

But what exactly causes this issue, and what can be done about it, if anything? In this guide, we'll dig a bit deeper into the Black Desert Online internal error and try to offer some of solutions to the problem. 

What Items Cause the Internal Error in BDO?

As some of the community posts out there on the web suggest, the most common trigger for the internal error is when a player tries to purchase game currency using actual money. As some posts show, the most common item is Daum Cash -- in-game money which can be used in order to buy Pearls. 

A similar situation happens when users try to purchase Kakao cash, which is also a form of virtual currency in the game.

Why Does the Internal Error Occur in BDO?

The most common reason for the internal error is the player's browser. It's related to the cookies that are stored on their computers when interacting with the Black Desert Online store.

According to the forums, the problem seems to be most persistent in Google Chrome browsers. 

How to Fix the Internal  Error in BDO

Fortunately, there are a few solutions that will fix this internal error problem. Here are some of the quick workarounds you should try:

  • Completely logging out and then back in.
  • Deleting cookies and restarting the browser.
  • Changing browsers, and using any other browser besides Google Chrome.
  • Making the purchase from the game's website, not from the game itself.
  • Disabling any add-ons.

These are just some of the most common ways of dealing with the error, and they seem to work for the majority of the players so that they can finally make whatever purchases they want without encountering any issues.


Did any of these methods work for you? Or do you yourself have methods of fixing the internal error that weren't mentioned here? Make sure to let us know in the comment section! And check out the rest of our Black Desert Online guides for even more tips, tricks, and error fixes:

Total War Warhammer Norsca DLC Guide: Best Technologies and Chaos Gods,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/a/x/maxresdefault-b7374.jpg m5w6e/total-war-warhammer-norsca-dlc-guide-best-technologies-and-chaos-gods Thu, 17 Aug 2017 10:48:33 -0400 Sergey_3847

The Norsca DLC for Total War: Warhammer introduced 33 new technologies and 4 Chaos Gods that can help you move forward with your campaign. However, the Chaos Gods mechanic is a bit more complicated and requires a closer look at your situation before making a pledge.

If you want to know which technologies are the most helpful in the Norsca DLC, and which god to choose depending on your stance in the campaign, keep on reading this Warhammer guide for all the information you'll need. 

The Best Technologies in Total War: Warhammer Norsca DLC

There are three major wings of technologies in the Norsca DLC: War Tools, Monster Hunter, and Sea Marauder’s Tools.

Sea Marauder’s Tools

The majority of Norsca armies consist of tribal robbers, so the most beneficial technology you can research in the Norsca DLC is Razing of the Empire. It will make all tribal robbers extremely cheap to hire, and thus help you significantly increase the number of units in your army early in the game.

However, you can’t research Razing of the Empire immediately. First you must start with Sea Marauder’s Tools, which will open the next two technologies: Corpulent Sails and Champions of War. All of them are especially impactful in the first half of the campaign.

You can begin the research of Sea Marauder’s Tools during the first step of your campaign. The next is Corpulent Sails, which will let you be more mobile on the map, and Champions of War, which will let you unite and recruit enemy armies. You can research both of these and Razing of the Empire technologies on steps 4 or 5.

Monster Hunter

The other three most important technologies in the Norsca DLC are: Monster Hunter, One With Beasts, and Master of Beasts.

You can start researching them after you’ve researched the Razing of the Empire tech -- usually in the second half of the campaign. They will open access to special battles, the Monster Hunts, that will reward you with unique artifacts.

The War Tools

This wing is not as important as the previous ones, but the technologies represented here can make your life in the campaign easier. It is not essential to research them, but only if you have enough time and resources. Basically, they make crafting of weapons and maintenance of your army cheaper.

Chaos Gods in Total War: Warhammer Norsca DLC

The Norsca DLC offers four gods for worshipping that may enhance your gameplay, if you choose to pledge your allegiance to one of them. But you also need to consider that by fully devoting yourself to one god, you will summon the wrath of the other three gods -- meaning that you will not be able to change your direction once you've chosen.

Before deciding which god to worship, or even if you want to do it in the first place, let’s take a look at what each of them offers.


Slaanesh, the Lord of Pleasure (The Serpent)

Choose this god if you want to maintain and hire new units in your army cheaper by 10%. If you manage to upgrade your allegiance to level 3, then you will also have a powerful chaos sorcerer fighting on your side.

Nurgle, the Lord of Decay (The Crow)

Choose Nurgle if you want your army to be healed instantly, and your lords may even return to life immediately after death. If you max out your worship to Nurgle, then he will cast a massive plague all over the world, but your own army will be unaffected.

Khorne, the Blood God (The Hound)

Khorne will make your army stronger in melee combat, and will increase the experience received from the battles. At level 3 you will be able to recruit an Ice-Forge Legion -- the only available artillery legion in the Norsca DLC.

Tzeentch, the Changer of Ways (The Eagle)

This eagle-god will increase your research rate by 20%, and will give +20 to your starting amount of Winds of Magic. At the highest level you will gain access to a unique lord -- Azrik the Maze Keeper.

So, which god to choose?

Obviously, the strongest god among them all is Nurgle, the Lord of Decay. Fearlessly pledge your allegiance to him and watch your enemies all over the map die in terrible conditions. Even if they survive, their numbers will be greatly reduced, and those left will have absolutely no power to withstand your own army.

The rest of the gods are not particularly interesting unless you want to try something different for your next replay.


That wraps up this guide! Hopefully it's helped you decide which technologies to focus on and which chaos gods to follow. Need more help with the game? Check out other Total War: Warhammer guides for everything you need to know:


FFXIV: How to Make the Battered Fish Recipe,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/o/o/moonfirefaire-42dc7.jpg 0yby4/ffxiv-how-to-make-the-battered-fish-recipe Thu, 17 Aug 2017 10:40:42 -0400 Wizard of Warsaw

As another Moonfire Faire has passed -- and so too has passed an opportunity to make the Battered Fish meal in FFXIV.

The Battered Fish recipe has been a point of contention for a while, with players proclaiming the lunacy of requiring a specific holiday event to obtain the ingredients. This recipe consists of:

  • Water Shard
  • Fire Shard
  • Popoto
  • Olive Oil
  • Table Salt
  • Haddock

How to Get All Ingredients for the Battered Fish Recipe in FFXIV

The Fire and Water Shards are pretty easy to find. Mining, quarrying, logging, and harvesting are good ways to get massive amounts of both shards. They also come as quest rewards for a ton of quests. Certain enemies will drop these Shards as well. Fire Sprites and Firemane in Halatia drop Fire Shards, while Water Sprites in Middle La Noscea and Stagnant Water Sprites from Central Shroud will drop Water Shards.  

Popotos are another easy ingredient to find. You'll need to have the Botanist gathering class and find level 18 harvesting nodes.

Aside from that, Olive Oil and Table Salt can be found in Novv's Nursery -- sold by Sahagin Vendor for 8 gil and 2 gil, respectively. 

How to Get Haddock

The final ingredient, Haddock, is the biggest pain. It's important to point out that the Haddock required for the Battered Fish recipe is NOT the same as the Haraldr Haddock. This infuriating little fish is only available from one vendor, the Festive Fisher, during the Moonfire Faire event.

The Moonfire Faire happened once in 2015, and again earlier this year, but that hasn't stopped players from trying their hardest to figure out how to complete the recipe. The fish is Market Prohibited, but there is a way around it. 

Some players have found success by going through the party finder system, stating that they are looking for Haddock and have been lucky enough to find someone willing to trade them some. So if you really want to make that Battered Fish recipe, this will probably be your best bet.


The prospect of waiting for another Moonfire Faire is appalling to most players. When you're aiming for completion, having to wait for an event to come back around is one of the most frustrating things. But it's not impossible to complete the Battered Fish recipe if you're willing to hunt through the Party Finder for Haddock to trade. It's way less annoying than waiting around for two more years.

Need more help with FFXIV? Check out the rest of our FFXIV guides for more tips, tricks, and recipes:

How to Make 5400 Coins an Hour in Flippy Knife,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/o/n/money-header-65eae.png z84cm/how-to-make-5400-coins-an-hour-in-flippy-knife Wed, 16 Aug 2017 16:22:07 -0400 Tobbpitt

There are a few ways to rake in the coins on Flippy Knife, but one method stands above the rest -- particularly if you're new to the game.

Your first goal should be to save for a knife that costs 2000 coins. This is because all of them have a 2-point multiplier and a few have a weight above 1. If you're really enjoying the game, you need to invest in a quality knife, and quickly.

Now, it's important to note that this method may not necessarily be the best once you get a knife that has a 2 or 3-point multiplier. There's a reason for that, and we're going to get to it. But first let's go into how you can make your first 2000 coins in less than 30 minutes.

Making Money in Target Mode

Out of all four modes in Flippy Knife, Target is by far the easiest because the knife angle is always the same. That's part of what makes it perfect to grind coins when you first start out -- the other part is how often it grants bonus coins.

For each 8 consecutive target hits, you get a 45 coin bonus. And it takes barely any time to get an 8 hit combo, particularly if you're using a heavier knife.

I highly recommend using the Butcher to grind money in Target mode.

The Butcher is the heaviest knife in its price range and has a good size blade, making it perfect for tossing at the target. All you have to do is drag the reticule from the knife directly to the target and BAM -- you've got yourself a hit.

It takes less than 30 seconds to get a full combo, but after that the target starts to move. What do you do? Switch to another mode, then right back to Target mode to start all over. This will reset your score, but you won't have to ever deal with that pesky moving target. Since the bonus never gets higher, this is an efficient way to grind coins up with no problem.

Using this method, you can amass thousands of coins in less than an hour. Even if you're taking it kind of easy and getting a combo each 30 seconds (I've timed mine and get about 24 seconds per combo and restart), you should still be able to amass about 5400 coins in an hour.

After You've Purchased a 2-Point Knife

The above method is certainly safe as can be, even after you get a 2-point knife. You can certainly continue to grind Target mode, but Combo mode can net you far more coins faster if you get the hang of flipping like mad with your preferred knife.

Your knife's multiplier actually affects you coin gains in Combo mode, but the only coins you get from Target mode are the bonuses (and sharing new high scores).

Should you switch to Combo mode for money after you get a 2-point knife?

The coin rewards are more worth it if you can pull off an 8-combo or higher, but Combo mode is much harder than Target and there's no guarantee you'll be bringing in consistent coins.

Think of it like this: You have the option to switch to Combo mode for efficient coin farming after you get a 2-point knife, but it's best to stick to Target mode if you can't reliably get high combos in Combo mode.

Your First 2000 Coin Purchase

The two big aspects to pay attention to in a knife are its weight (the higher the better) and the blade surface. The blade shape and size means a lot and, frankly, I don't buy ones with smaller blade areas. A knife's shape is also important, as those like the Velociraptor can be unwieldy.

My personal recommended 2k knives are:

  • Kiritsuke: Balanced in size, shape, and weight -- this is a well-rounded weapon.
  • Cutaway: Similar to the Kiritsuke, this one's outward-curved blade simply hits things at a slightly different angle than the above

  • Kora: Much larger and heavier than anything in its price range and below, the Kora's blade can land at some weird angles -- including both the end of its blade and the bend in the middle.

Of course, you can skip the 2000 tier completely and go straight for something more expensive. If you're not confident in your ability to get high combos in Combo mode, it may be best to stick with the Butcher and grind your way to riches well beyond 2000 coins in Target mode.

Black Desert Online: How to Fix the "Now Processing" Error,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/n/o/w/now-processing-error-6699e.png vkupo/black-desert-online-how-to-fix-the-now-processing-error Wed, 16 Aug 2017 16:13:04 -0400 Kengaskhan

As is the nature of software development, bugs and kinks will arise any time there's a patch or an update. These issues are a necessary evil for games like Black Desert Online -- and for the MMO genre as a whole, as MMOs live or die by the quality and frequency of their patches, content expansions, and balance changes.

Some of these bugs can prevent players from entering the game. And in the case of Black Desert Online, a "Now Processing" message that appears on game launch has a lot of players stuck trying to load into the game. The issue has arisen intermittently since the game's Western release, but still hasn't been patched out. So while the Black Desert Online devs do their best to fix the problem (if they ever do), here are some solutions and workarounds you can try on your own to get back into your game.

Troubleshooting the "Now Processing" Error for Black Desert Online

1. Make Sure the Servers Are Up

If Reddit is to be believed, then Black Desert Online's servers are actually just potatoes.

While this is obviously an exaggeration, the meme had to start somewhere. And while Kakao has taken measures to address their server issues, the recent change to their maintenance schedule is probably going to cause more problems in the near future.

If the servers do happen to be down, as they have been on several occasions this past month, you'll be stuck at the "Now Processing" message. This error message isn't particularly helpful, though, since it doesn't actually tell you whether or not the servers are down.

Two good places to check the game's server status is @BDO_News or the BDO subreddit (specifically the new and rising tabs), though the latter isn't exactly an official channel.

2. Restart Your Router, and Then Your System

This solution is a pretty universal one -- and given how fast and simple it is, there's not much reason to skip it.

First you should restart your router, and then try hitting that "Start" button in the game's main menu. If that doesn't work, restart your machine and try again.

3. Verify the Game Cache (Steam Only)

For Steam users, this is a quick way to check for and replace any missing game files, as opposed to simply re-installing the whole game. Here's how to verify your game files:

  1. Find and right-click on the Black Desert Online game in your Steam library.
  2. Click "Properties".
  3. Click on the "Local Files" tab.
  4. Click on "Verify Integrity of Steam Files..."
4. Repair Your Game by Deleting Some Files

This solution was suggested by one of the game's admins, GM_Huego.

Simply navigate to your game's install folder (you can find it by right-clicking the game executable and selecting the "Open file location" option) and delete the version.dat and/or the config.filecheck file.

Then, when you open the Black Desert Online launcher, it should re-patch.

5. Disable MSI Afterburner and RivaTuner

This solution comes from a Black Desert Online forum user named Abiss, and many other users in the thread confirmed that disabling MSI Afterburner and Riva worked for them. 

One of the other users also stated that lowering Riva's detection level to "Low" should be sufficient if these utilities were the cause of the issue.

6. Try Using a VPN to Force the Game to Patch

Another user-suggested solution is to use a VPN (like as a workaround for your game failing to patch. Once your VPN is running, open the game launcher.

Note that if Black Desert Online successfully patches and launches through the VPN, you should be able to play the game without needing a VPN afterwards.

7. Reinstall Black Desert Online

If all else fails, try reinstalling the game. This "fix" will probably take a while, given how large the game is -- so it should be one of the last things you attempt. However, if the game still fails to launch, it might be worth doing a second run through of all the fixes listed above on a fresh install of the game.


Hopefully, one or any combination of these fixes got you past the "Now Processing" error. If not, this list isn't all-encompassing -- keep searching, you may still find a solution that works for you. And if you do find something that works, be sure to spread awareness, so that we can update this list!

If you've managed to get into the game and need some other tips, check out the rest of our Black Desert Online guides to make sure you're getting the most out of your play time.

Total War Warhammer: Norsca DLC Monsters Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-132f1.jpg 5hc9w/total-war-warhammer-norsca-dlc-monsters-guide Wed, 16 Aug 2017 12:21:40 -0400 Sergey_3847

The Dark Gods of the Warhammer universe would be very pleased if you could hunt down some of the most dangerous creatures of the Old World. In the latest Norsca DLC for Total War: Warhammer, you will get the chance to slay down eight of the new monsters.

Each monster has its own strengths and weaknesses of which you should be well aware, if you want to have an advantage during the battles against them. Keep on reading this guide for the best tactics on how to kill all the new monsters in the Norsca DLC for Warhammer.

Abyssal Shrieker


  • Terrorgheist Skull
  • Treasury: +10000

A giant macabre bat that shrieks over the province of Stirland must be killed by any means. Just beware -- the Shrieker doesn’t come alone, but with an army of bats, hounds, and skeleton spearmen.

The Shrieker is greatly dependent on its units. So deal with other bats first, as this will make the Shrieker itself much weaker. The Anti-Large units are the best choice for this battle, as most creatures you will face here will be greatly oversized.

Blorgar the Mad Titan


  • Stinky Giant Club
  • Treasury: +10000

At the south of the borderline Grey Mountains, a filthy giant resides alongside trolls and other beings of his caliber that wreak havoc upon innocent settlements. The developer definitely has a sense of humor, as it gave Blorgar an ultimate AOE -- the Exploding Fart.

Use Anti-Large tactics in this combat, plus the ranged artillery -- and soon the foul stinking giant will fall. But make sure to create pressure at all times until he produces the final fart, otherwise he will be able to regenerate himself.

Brood Queens of Karak Azul


  • Arachnarok Eggs
  • Treasury: +10000

The mountains of Karak Azul host some of the vilest creatures the Old World has ever known -- the venomous spider queens. They are protected by hordes of skin wolves that will attack you as soon as they smell your scent.

Use psychological attacks, such as Fear and Terror, to reduce the pressure coming from them. But at the same time, look around for unexpected attacks, as there are more spiders than you might think at first.

Frigustrex, Scion of the Cold Void


  • Ancient Frost-Wyrm Scale
  • The Cold-Voider
  • Treasury: +10000

You will find Frigustrex in the Northern part of the Troll country that is known for its harsh and cold environments -- which is a perfect hideout for such a dangerous frost-wyrm. But this beast is not the only danger awaiting you there.

You must be ready to confront a horde of ice trolls, as well as the Frugistrex himself. Look out for his Frost Breath hex that can significantly slow you down and make your units weaker.

If you come really close to him, he will produce a terrible vortex that will not only slow you down even more, but will also deal a lot of damage to each unit affected by the vortex.

The most effective way to deal with Frugistrex is to cast fire magic on him, to which he is the most vulnerable.

Great Mawherd of Bloodfjord


  • Last of the Great Mawherd
  • Feral Mammoth
  • Treasury: +10000

This time you will need to protect the herd of mammoths from the attack of the greedy Dwarves at the Southern Oblast. If you manage to do so, you will be able to tame the Great Mawherd yourself.

In this battle the Dwarves will use their Bolt Throwers and Grudge Throwers, and will attack your units from the distance. You must have an armor piercing protection to be able to survive the attack, and eventually come closer to the Dwarven units with your own artillery.

Radixashen, Serpent of the Worldroots


  • Forest Dragon Fang
  • Treasury: +10000

The great serpent roams the wilds of the Elvish land -- Athel Loren. This dragon is much larger than any other forest dragon you’ve ever seen. On top of that, it is protected by all sorts of forest beings, including the Ancient Protectors -- giant walking trees that are hard to kill.

This means that before taking on the dragon, you must first deal with the Protectors. The Fire Missiles and weapons with fire damage will do the trick.

If you do not take care of them, then they will create a lot of trouble for you during the actual fight with Radixashen. But without the support of the Protectors, the serpent will be an easy target.

Salzenmund Soul-Eaters


  • Giant Cygor Eyeball
  • Treasury: +10000

In the southern part of Nordland you can fight a pair of giant Cygors, also known as The Salzenmund Soul-Eaters -- cyclopean creatures that are very, very angry. They are extremely protective of their own territory, so as soon as you approach them, the Cygors will start throwing giant boulders at your units.

You must be very quick in this fight and move as close to the Cygors as you can, no matter the casualties. When your units get close enough, the giant will be easy to knock down in a simple melee fight.

Traygard Mountain-Cleaver


  • Dragon Ogre’s Great Horn
  • Treasury: +10000

To the north of the Chaos Wastes, an ancient dragon-shaggoth resides on mountains that are constantly showered with powerful lightnings. The area is infested with ogre manticores and other creatures that will make your job of hunting Traygard that much more difficult.

The best strategy here is to send the heavier units to confront Traygard in a close combat, thus not letting him move around too much. Then, locate the ranged units around and shoot him down from the distance.


That is it for the Norsca DLC monsters guide, but if you're looking for some more help, then check our other Total War: Warhammer guides here at GameSkinny:

Sonic Mania Guide: How to Beat Special Stages and What They Unlock,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/o/n/sonic-mania-9a22d.gif qamno/sonic-mania-guide-how-to-beat-special-stages-and-what-they-unlock Wed, 16 Aug 2017 12:04:24 -0400 David Fisher

Just like the original Genesis games, Sonic Mania has its own special stages that will send you to bonus areas where players can find the Chaos Emeralds. While these stages might be familiar to long time fans, those who have not played the older titles might not be sure how to access the special stages or how to beat them.

In this guide we'll take a quick look at finding the special stages, how they work, and how to unlock the true ending to this wonderful callback game! (And we'll even give you the secret on how to unlock & Knuckles mode.)

Special Stages in Sonic Mania

In Sonic Mania the main form of Special Stages is similar to the one found in Sonic CD -- but only insofar as the fact that you are running in a mode 7 style stage. These stages are accessed via Giant Rings that are found in hidden areas throughout each stage and act. Unlike in previous titles, there is no requirement to find the Giant Ring to access the special stage other than finding it in the stage.

There is often more than one Giant Ring in each stage, so keep an eye out for them if you want to collect all of the Chaos Emeralds early on in the game.

How to Win Special Stages

Each Special Stage you access will be in an order based on completion. The special stage also corresponds with the Chaos Emerald -- not the zone you accessed the Special Stage from. As such, the first special stage you encounter will be the same no matter what zone you are playing until you get the Chaos Emerald for that Special Stage. Sso don't worry if you missed the Chaos Emerald in the previous act. As long as you make a point of finding the Giant Rings in later stages, you'll be fine.

To complete the Special Stage, your character will have to reach the fleeing UFO, and attack it to free the Chaos Emerald. This is done by collecting blue and yellow spheres to increase your speed until you are fast enough to catch up with the UFO. You can also "race" it at lower speeds by cutting corners or using shortcuts. But in most cases -- especially with inexperienced players -- it is recommended to gather as many blue spheres as possible to boost your mach speed to make catching the UFO easier.

Players should also keep an eye on their rings. Once you run out of rings, your Special Stage run is over. Gather rings, avoid pitfalls and spike traps, as well as other obstacles to prolong your Special Stage attempt. Each special stage gets progressively more difficult as well -- so be on your toes each time you step through a Giant Ring.

Sonic Mania Bonus Stage: Blue Spheres

Blue Spheres is a Bonus Stage found in Sonic Mania that originally was found in Sonic 3 & Knuckles. Blue Spheres is another simple concept minigame: touch all of the blue spheres to turn them red. While this sounds easy enough, the challenge can be a bit of a daunting task since the character will move faster each time you convert a sphere.

To make matters worse, Star Spheres will try to bump you back into Red Spheres, ending your run. To counteract this, press up on the D-Pad or Control Stick as soon as possible to avoid going back more than 2 spaces. This only works if there are no Red Spheres behind you though, so be careful. 

Also be on the lookout for Gold Spheres that will launch your character 5 spaces forward. While they usually just launch you into the next area, if you're jumping blind you might just launch yourself into a field of Red Spheres.

Completing the stage by converting all of the Blue Spheres will earn you a silver medal for that Bonus Stage. If you manage to get all the rings as well, you will earn a gold medal.

Gotta Go (Fast)!

That's all you need to know to beat the Special and Bonus Stages in Sonic Mania. Most of your success will be purely based in practice and memory, so do your best to get the true ending of Sonic Mania that has a special surprise for fans. 

Stay tuned for more Sonic Mania guides to help you get through this brand new Sonic adventure!

Observer Achievements Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-d2547.jpg 44prr/observer-achievements-guide Wed, 16 Aug 2017 09:54:49 -0400 Ty Arthur

Taking the base gameplay from Bloober Team's previous entry Layers Of Fear and adding in investigative elements in a bleak sci-fi future, Observer has you in the role of a police detective desperately trying to determine what's actually real and what's in his head.

Along the game's seven to eight hour psychological horror experience, there are 19 achievements / trophies to unlock, ranging from finding collectibles to completing arcade mini-games and even tackling some tough philosophical choices about when life isn't worth living. 

Below we cover all 19 Observer achievements with specific info on how to unlock them if you find yourself stuck. Need help with the rest of the game still? Check out our other Observer guides here:

Observer Game Achievements / Trophies


Finish the game without ever dying.

There aren't a lot of parts in the game where you can die -- but in those few parts, dying tends to happen a lot. Your main issue will be towards the end of the segment inside the mind of Helena Novak (in the tattoo parlor) when you have to sneak past a monster in the office cubicle farm.

Keep in mind here that you can't really outrun the monster, and instead you have to stay hidden and never draw its attention in the first place. Stay crouched down the whole time, don't run, and always check left and right before breaking out of cover. Once you are near the exit point, you can stand up and walk normally.

Pearls Before Swine

Decide the fate of the organ farm.

Its easy to complete miss this achievement. After completing the tattoo parlor and having to go through the basement, you will find Apartment 28 with the words "Chiron Eats My Dreams" spray painted outside on the wall. 

If you figure out the door code (its 7441), inside you'll find some Layers Of Fear easter eggs, as well as giant pig that's being used as an incubator for growing black-market human organs.

After the apartment lockdown went into place, the machine keeping the pig docile was shut off, so now its in terrible pain (being stuffed full of hundreds of extra organs will do that). Either restart the machine to put the creature back into a blissful, drug induced euphoria, or unplug it all to kill the pig and shut down the organ farm.


Find 10 nanophage patient cards.

As long as you are doing any amount of searching around the apartment complex, its virtually guaranteed you'll get this achievement organically. Just make sure to pick up the patient cards lying around the apartment complex as you see them.


Find all nanophage patient cards in a single playthrough.

While getting 10 cards is easy, getting them all is quite difficult if you don't already know where to look. Its possible to screw this one up and have to restart the game, as some of the cards are actually in the mind hacking segments.

Once you pass those digital cards, you can't ever go back and find them again. Stay tuned for a full guide on each card's location coming soon (along with the rest of the game's collectibles).


Analyze 100 objects.

This includes both organic objects like blood and tech objects like computers, so either mode of your augmented eyes will help here. Don't forget to look up and down, checking ceilings and floors, and take a peek inside objects like cabinets as well.

If you are routinely searching each room and hallway, you should hit this around the time the hallways become covered in bloody tentacles while you are chasing after the killer's blood trail.

Noble Sword

Complete all With Fire and Sword: Spiders arcade games.

New levels of this mini-game become available when you find new terminals, so always check every apartment room for a computer you can interact with (including the terminal in the tattoo parlor that looks much different than the rest of the computers).

Stumped on any particular level of this arcade puzzle? Check out our full guide to completing all 10 Fire and Sword levels in this mini game.

KDP! Open Up!

Interrogate 20 apartment tenants.

This one takes persistence and a little exploration, since many of the rooms don't have people who respond.

As long as you fully explore each hallway and floor whenever you have free reign to move around the apartment complex, it's not hard to find all 20. Steam will actually keep track of how many you've knocked on already when you pull up the overlay.

Voxel Runner

Earn 3,000 points during a single trapware run.

We haven't managed to nab this one yet, but will update the guide once we do!

Drug Trail

Interrogate Amir's clients.

During the first mind hacking segment when you see Amir's past, you will have to talk to several people while dropping off drugs throughout the building. After the segment is over, go back to those same apartments and talk to the clients to get this achievement to pop.

Body Snatcher

Decide the fate of the merging minds.

We haven't managed to nab this one yet, but will update the guide once we do!


Observer Game Secret Achievements

I'm An Observer

Complete your first Dream Eater sequence.

Although this is a "secret" achievement, it pops automatically after you complete Amir's mind hacking segment near the beginning of the game, and it can't be missed.

Altered States

Overdose on synchronization pills.

This is a fun little easter egg you can get once you find several synchronization pills lying around. Just take a whole bunch at once (rather than saving them for when you need them) and have fun.

A Work In Progress

Find all RC cars and recall a memory of Adam.

Stay tuned for a full guide on the RC car locations (and the rest of the game's collectibles) coming soon!

It's A Trap

Survive Adam's trapware.

This is another secret achievement that pops automatically as you near the end of the game.

By Any Other Name

Find all the roses and discover the final resting place.

Throughout the apartment complex you will occasionally find real roses, rather than digital representations. One is found in the stairs down to the basement, and another is on the covered hallway between the two halves of the complex. Stay tuned for a full collectibles location guide coming soon showing you their locations.

The Root Of All Evil

Find and listen to all patient interview recordings.

Scattered around the complex are a series of old cassette players containing the ramblings of a mental patient. You'll find most of these around crime scenes that are investigated. Stay tuned for a full collectibles guide coming soon with exact locations.


Decrypt Adam's figurine.

This hacker speak for Codebreaker is another story-based achievement that you won't miss if you finish the game.

A Death In The Family

Reject Adam.

Like with Layers Of Fear, this game has multiple endings requiring you make slightly different choices, and this is one of them. We'll have an ending guide for you shortly.

The Prodigal Son

Embrace Adam.

This is the game's second primary ending achievement. Stay tuned for a full ending guide coming soon.


Those are all the Observer achievements currently available -- totaling up to 1,000 gamer score if you nab 'em all. Do you have any tips for the achievements we haven't unlocked yet? Let us know in the comments section!

Agents Of Mayhem Complete Character Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-9b780.jpg n44v6/agents-of-mayhem-complete-character-guide Tue, 15 Aug 2017 16:55:36 -0400 Ty Arthur

Shifting away from the main Saints Row series, the re-imagined alternate universe in Agents Of Mayhem lets you unleash destruction with a whole new cast of characters (and one returning fan favorite).

As of launch, there are 14 possible characters to swap out in your squad, with two currently only available for those who pre-ordered. Below we cover each and every character, how they are unlocked, and what devastating upgrades you can use!

Just getting started with the game and need to know how to use the three base characters? Check out our Agents Of Mayhem starter guide instead.

Starting Agents Of Mayhem Characters


Squad: Franchise Force

How To Unlock: Automatically available 


  • B.A.M.F. (Faster Reload Speed)
  • Intimidator (Increased Melee Damage Defense)
  • Fast Healer (Increased Health from Pickups)
  • Prime Specimen (Increased Health Regen)

Core Upgrades:

  • Earthmover (Gain Fortify during Dash)
  • Megamine (Deploy mines more frequently while using Mayhem Ability) 
  • Rank-Cranker (Deal increased damage to Legion Commanders)



Squad: Franchise Force

To Unlock: Automatically available 


  • Action Hero (Increased Mayhem Ability Duration)
  • Coverboy (Increased Magazine Size)
  • New Age Guru (Increased Special Ability Refresh)
  • Team Player (Bonus Mayhem)

Core Upgrades:

  • Delayed Reaction (Dash drops a grenade)
  • Macaroni Western (Bonus critical damage when firing from the hip)
  • 'Merica (When using Mayhem Ability gain infinite ammo, faster fire rate, and additional explosions)



Squad: Franchise Force

To Unlock: Automatically available 


  • Boatswain (Increased Shield Reboot)
  • Master Gunner (Increased Overheat Recovery)
  • Scallywag (Increased Special Ability Refresh)
  • Treasure Hunter (Increased Bonus Cash Rewards)

Core Upgrades:

  • Fire At Will (Stuns targets more often during combat)
  • Full Sail (Weapons are Overcharged while using Mayhem Ability)
  • Grape Shot (50% chance to stun 3 enemies with each attack)

Pre-Order Agents Of Mayhem Characters


Squad: Police

To Unlock:  Play Operation Good Cop, Bot Cop after completing Operation Raging Arrow 

Upgrades: Unknown... for now

Core Upgrades: Unknown... for now




Squad: Unique character

To Unlock: Play Operation Lazarus after completing Operation Raging Arrow

Upgrades: Unknown... for now

Core Upgrades: Unknown... for now




Unlockable Agents Of Mayhem Characters 


Squad: Carnage a Trois

To Unlock: Play Operation Let's Go after you complete Operation Raging Arrow


  • Born To Kill (Increased Fine Aim Damage)
  • Bullet Sponge (Increased Max Health Regen)
  • Hellraiser (Increased Mayhem Ability Power)
  • Natural Leader (Earn Bonus Experience) 

Core Upgrades:

  • Apocalypse Now (Mayhem Ability calls down Mega Lasers)
  • Rough And Ready (Arriving Agent gets 1 stack  of Fortify and Empower for the next 7 seconds after swapping Braddock)
  • Strong Hearted (Gain Fortify if Braddock is within 10 meters of multiple enemies)



Squad: Carnage a Trois

To Unlock: After completing Operation Heavy Sent, play Operation The Morning After 


  • Derby Doll (Increased Mayhem Ability Duration)
  • Firebrand (Weapon Spin Up Reduction)
  • Lead Jammer (Increased Max Health)
  • Snowplow (Increased Special Ability Damage)

Core Upgrades:

  • Body Cleanse (Lose all debuffs when using Daisy's Special Ability)
  • Rough Rider (Gain Health for every enemy killed while using Mayhem Ability)
  • Standing Tall (Gain Fortify during Fine Aim)



Squad: Bombshells

To Unlock: Play Operation Technologia after you you kill the first Lieutenant

Upgrades: Unknown... for now!

Core Upgrades:

  • Megaturret (Mayhem Turret inflicts Vulnerable and Slow on enemies as well as dealing damage over time)
  • Proper Protection (Turrent gains a shield against damage)
  • Remote Deployment (Deploy the Turret at a greater range)



Squad: Firing Squad

To Unlock: Play Operation Royal Pain after you unlock Rama


  • Specializer (Increased Special Ability Power)
  • Opportunities (Increased Damage To Debuffed Enemies)
  • Bulletproof (Increased Shield Reboot)
  • Showboat (Increased Special Ability Refresh)

Core Upgrades

  • Pain Reflex (When his health drops below 75%, 50%, and 25%, Special Ability becomes available immediately)
  • Rough 'Em Up (When Kingpin gets a melee kill, he automatically gains the buff from his equipped Special Ability)
  • Banger (Mayhem Ability ends in an explosion that inflicts damage on all enemies that were already dancing)

Squad: Firing Squad

To Unlock: Play Operation Demon & Fox after you you kill the first Lieutenant

Upgrades: Unknown... for now!

Core Upgrades

  • Unstoppable Force (Intimidating Stare also grants Precision when slowing a target)
  • Smoke Screen (Dropping a Smoke Bomb automatically reloads Oni's current weapon) 
  • Fearmonger (When killing Panicked enemies while Mayhem Ability is active, both Panic and Mayhem durations are extended)

Squad: Bombshells

To Unlock: Play Operation Raging Arrow (Special Investigation Rama) after you visit the ARK for the first time


  • Biophysicist (Increased Damage Over Time Effects)
  • Neurologist (Reduced Trap Arming Time)
  • Noble Avatar (Increased Weak Point Damage)
  • True Refuge (Reduced Debuff Durations)

Core Upgrades

  • Slayer Of Ravana (Accelerate Special Ability cool down and gain bonus Special Ability damage)
  • Rishi's Blessing (Fire two bonus Plague Arrows when using Mayhem Ability)
  • Pavana's Whisper (Smoke Screen Ability also causes damage over time)
Red Card

Squad: Bombshells

To Unlock: Play Operation Big Game  after you you kill the first Lieutenant


  • Aggravating Assault (Increased Life Drain from Enemy Kills)
  • Inner Calm (Increased Special Ability Charge Speed)
  • Oversharer (Increased Melee Damage)
  • Protected From On High (Increased Shield Reboot)

Core Upgrades

  • Big Swing (Alternate melee attack with bigger damage radius)
  • Unsportsmanlike Conduct (Damage and Stagger enemies when using Dash)
  • The Best Defense (Mayhem Ability damage is doubled)

Squad: Firing Squad

To Unlock: Play main story mission Operation Dimensions of the Ninja

Upgrades: Unkown... for now!

Core Upgrades:

  • Optimal Focus (Bonus damage to enemies with full Health and Shields)
  • Killing Floor (Gain additional duration to Mayhem Ability with each kill)
  • Phase Armor (Gain Fortify for a moment after each teleport)

Squad: Carnage a Trois

To Unlock: Play Operation Caged Ice after you unlock Rama


  • Coldblooded (Increased Shield Regen from Frozen Melee)
  • Frozen Concentrate (Increased Mayhem Ability Duration)
  • Icebreaker (Increased Melee Damage Against Frozen Enemies)
  • United Cold Front (Increased Max Shields)

Core Upgrades:

  • Cold Snap (Weapon is always Frozen while using Mayhem Ability)
  • Power of the Yeti (Gains 3 stacks of Empower when reloading)
  • Osmotic Stress Ball (Deal 20% bonus damage on Stunned or Frozen targets)

Those are all the Agents Of Mayhem characters currently available! Which one is your favorite, and whats your preferred three agent lineup? Let us know down in the comments!

Foxhole Ranks Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/f/o/x/foxhole-header-43ea8.jpg 1h3v1/foxhole-ranks-guide Tue, 15 Aug 2017 12:47:43 -0400 ThatGamersAsylum

Foxhole is a recently-released MMO where you take part in persistent, long-term wars between hundreds of players at any given moment. One of the many systems that contribute Foxhole's strategic gameplay is the Ranks system, which is made to emulate the ranks currently found in modern militaries. You start off as a Private (technically you start without an actual rank, but that’s neither here nor there) and can work your way all the way up to being a General and eventually even a Field Marshal.

As you would in real life, you start Foxhole as a Private (technically, you start without an actual rank, but that’s neither here nor there), and you work your way all the way to General -- and eventually even Field Marshal.

Ascending this echelon is relatively simple: all you need are the commendations of those that serve alongside you. In theory, the idea is that you are rewarded by your teammates for helping the war effort move to new front lines. However, that is not how things always work in Foxhole. In practice, players often abuse the system -- it’s entirely common to see people trade commendations to rank up faster. So while that may seem like an easy way to jump the ranks, this method is dangerous because you can also be reprimanded, which is means you'll lose commendation points.

And on top of that, the only real reward for Ranks in Foxhole comes very early on -- and that’s your ability to create Squads. This privilege is earned once you reach the rank of Corporal (Cpl), which only requires 8 total commendations. Squads serve as teams and can also claim property for themselves. The only other reward that you might receive is social clout amongst your Foxhole peers, or subordinates, depending on how into the game you are.

But if you're still dead set on climbing the bootstrapped ladder, here is a list of Foxhole's ranks and how many total commendations you need to obtain each rank:

Rank Required Commendations
Pte (Private) 1 Commendation
LCpl (Lance Corporal) 4 Commendations
Cpl (Corporal) 8 Commendations
Sgt (Sergeant) 20 Commendations
SSgt (Staff Sergeant) 50 Commendations
WO2 (Warrant Officer 2) 100 Commendations
WO1 (Warrant Officer 1) 150 Commendations
OCdt (Officer Cadet) 200 Commendations
2Lt (Second Lieutenant) 500 Commendations
Lt (Lieutenant) 800 Commendations
Cpt (Captain) 1,200 Commendations
Maj (Major) 1,800 Commendations
LT Col (Lieutenant Colonel) 2,700 Commendations
Col (Colonel) 3,900 Commendations
Brig (Brigadier) 5,900 Commendations
Maj Gen (Major General) 8,900 Commendations
Lt Gen (Lieutenant General) 13,400 Commendations
Gen (General) 19,900 Commendations
FM (Field Marshal) 29,900 Commendations



If you reach Field Marshal, then you for sure know that you are a useful asset to any army. That, or you have spent most of your time campaigning for commendations. Either way, you now know how to achieve these ranks and how far you have until you get your next Foxhole rank.  

Agents of Mayhem: A Beginner's Guide for New Field Agents,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/h/e/a/header-bguide-a234b.jpg 48257/agents-of-mayhem-a-beginners-guide-for-new-field-agents Mon, 14 Aug 2017 18:42:19 -0400 Justin Michael

In Agents of Mayhem, you're going to find yourself in all kinds of interesting situations. I know you're ready to take the fight to the Legion cronies crawling all over the city, but try to holster that excitement for a moment. What if I told you that by taking a minute to read this veteran's guide for beginners, you could be even more of a badass on the battlefield?

That's right, In this following Agents of Mayhem beginner's guide, I'm going to share with you some of the tips and tricks I've learned over the last 20 hours of kickin' ass and chewin' bubble gum -- so let's get into it!

Squad Up

Your Agents may be tough, but they're not a one-(wo)man army -- which is why you work in groups of 3. Initially you're limited to your choices of squadmates, but as you progress and do the special solo missions you'll unlock a plethora of interesting characters with their own unique skills and weapons. Make sure you're paying attention to the people that you're putting on your squad.

Each agent has 2 areas of specialization from 6 different areas:

  • World Savior
  • Skinpiercer
  • Shieldbuster
  • Deadshot
  • Master Programmer
  • Giant Slayer

For example, agents like Hardtack, Red Card, and Braddock have the Skinpiercer specialization -- allowing them to do more damage to armored enemies. This makes them good at dealing with the tougher veteran troops you'll start encountering in the harder difficulty modes.

You want to make sure that you get a good mix of skills on your squad so that you can deal with whatever situation you might end up in. 

Choose Gadgets That Compliment Your Playstyle

As you complete missions and find loot chests, you'll unlock gadgets for your various agents. Gadgets break down into 3 categories -- Special, Weapon, and Passive.

Special gadgets can change your agent's special attack in a number of ways. It can make it deal more damage, add status effects, have a longer duration, etc.

Weapon gadgets affect the abilities of your primary weapon. From increasing your magazine size to giving you stat buffs or greater damage, weapon gadgets are the ones that end up getting used most often -- so when you get new ones, check them out.  

Passive gadgets are great because they boost your other skills. For example, Hollywood's Star Power Amplifier passive inflicts debuffs on enemies he dashes towards. Other characters like Hardtack, for example, have passive gadgets that give them health boosts which are great for making tanks tankier.

If You're Struggling, Turn the Difficulty Down

I know it might seem common sense, but there is no shame in dropping the difficulty a level or two if your team is wiping on missions. Really, the only thing that you're missing out on is increased XP and Cash rewards when you complete the mission. 

Make Sure to Clear Legion Side Missions From Time to Time

It can get pretty annoying trying to take down an objective while Legion drops in reinforcements or turns the citizens against you with their hate machines. Make sure to take the time to clear this little side missions so that they don't build up all over the map.

It's also good to note that from time to time, Legion will retake their outposts and Relic's trading posts -- which are the fastest way for you to earn money for upgrades. It's important to keep on top of that, or you might end up playing for 3 hours only to realize that you haven't been passively earning cash the whole time because Legion = dickbags.

Channel Your Inner Parkour Master

There is a lot of vertical real estate in Agents of Mayhem -- so explore it! Not only is it fun and challenging to scale some of these structures, but it's a great way to find loot chests and crystal fragments tucked away in hidden corners of the city. 

Crystal shards are an important item for your agents. You use them for core upgrades -- permanent upgrades that make them more of a force to be reckoned with. You'll earn cores from doing some missions but the fastest way of getting them is to collect crystal shards. 10 shards make 1 core, and there are 300 shards spread out across the map

Loot chests drop all kinds of goodies depending on their "rarity" level -- which follows the same white (common) and purple (super badass) color scheme used by every other game out there.

Chests have everything from character skins to Legion/Gremlin tech, so seek them out.

Making Use of Consumables

There are 2 types of tech. Legion tech includes agent-specific and attaches to the gadgets via the armory. Gremlin tech includes consumables that you can requisition Gremlin to make for you on the Ark. 

These Gremlin tech items can confer very powerful buffs and abilities to your agents in the thick of battle, and are especially useful on the higher difficulties. Don't be afraid to use these if you're in a tight spot. Items like Lightning Strike and Tag-tical Nuke have been the difference between a lost boss fight for me more than once. Plus, who doesn't love explosions?

  • Note: If you're running low on R&D materials, you should put Joule in your party and toss some points into her Scavenger upgrade, which earns you bonus materials.

Other Miscellaneous Tips

  • If your agent is about to die, swap them out. They'll regain health while out of the fight. This can be further sped up by buying the Ark upgrade from Relic once you meet the agency level requirement.

  • Listen to your agents. If you're facing enemies that a particular agent fares well against they'll suggest you tag them in.

  • Make use of your dash in combat. Moving quickly in the middle of a firefight makes dealing with mobs easier.

  • If you're taking too much heat look for Legion stations on the map to destroy. This effectively drops your "wanted level."

  • The Mayhem meter is character dependent. Try to get 1 or more of your agents charged up for easier boss fights.

  • Tag team. If your current squad keeps getting crushed consider swapping in a different agent.


Hopefully, these beginner tips help start you off on the right foot -- the foot you'll be kicking Legion ass with. Got any tips you'd like to share? We'd love to see them in the comments below. And stay tuned for more Agents of Mayhem guides!

Fortnite Guide: Is The Legendary Troll Loot Truck Worth It?,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/f/o/r/fortnite-header-8a743.jpg syhg9/fortnite-guide-is-the-legendary-troll-loot-truck-worth-it Mon, 14 Aug 2017 18:33:32 -0400 LuckyJorael

Zombie horde survival/base-building game Fortnite won't officially be released as a free-to-play game until next year. But that hasn't stopped Epic Games from letting people play it... if they want to pony up the cash to do so. From all appearances, the game is solid -- with plenty of challenges to overcome as one of four heroes trying to survive the zombie apocalypse by rescuing survivors, building fortifications, and planting traps to hilariously end zombies' un-lives.

But along with a pricing scheme straight out of the Ubisoft playbook, Epic Games is also giving early-access players the option to buy VBucks -- digital currency to spend on.....what else? Pinata llamas that have sweet, sweet loot inside.

Most of these exploding llamas are your bog-standard loot boxes with a new, llama-shaped finish. But players have already found some seemingly amazing daily deals, like the Legendary Troll Loot Truck.

Is the Legendary Troll Loot Truck Worth It?

Honestly, that's up to you.

The Legendary Troll Loot Truck (Llama) was 1500 VBucks when it debuted in the game on August 8, and contains 20 random items. Since Epic Games is selling 1000 VBucks for $9.99 (US), each Loot Truck is about $15 -- unless you spent a load of cash and got some more VBucks as a bonus. (You can also earn VBucks just by playing the game, so you might be able to afford the Loot Truck the next time it comes up without spending a dime of real money.)

Everything in the Loot Truck is based on RNG, with some heavy skewing towards Legendary Heroes, Survivors, Leads, Defenders, and Weapons for a few of the 20 items, as well as a chance to get a Mythic version of the above. There's no way to predict if you'll open up the Truck and find a Mythic version of the class you want to play, or a bunch of Legendary Survivors you don't really need, or a Legendary weapon you don't like -- not to mention the collection of Epic and Rare loot that pales in comparison to the Legendary items.

If you've earned 1500 VBucks in-game, or you've already spent the cash to get VBucks, then buying the Legendary Troll Loot Truck is probably worth it. The amount of items and the heavy skewing towards Legendaries will likely make the Loot Truck a better buy than a bunch of lower-cost Llamas.

If, however, you're still on the fence and haven't spent any extra cash, I'd recommend you keep your credit card where it is. There's every possibility that you'll earn the VBucks to buy the Loot Truck by the time it comes around again -- and while you wait, you can have fun, y'know, playing the game.

Want some more info about Fortnite? Check out our review, a guide to the game's skill trees, and our base-building guide.

How to Install Minecraft OptiFine 1.12.1,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/i/n/minecraft-banner-a6e46.jpg y53hl/how-to-install-minecraft-optifine-1121 Mon, 14 Aug 2017 18:29:56 -0400 Greyson Ditzler (PurplePocketPirate)

Installing the OptiFine Patch 1.12.1 for Minecraft 1.6.2 (or newer) on PC will seriously enhance your block-building adventures. This patch is meant to provide more detailed, dynamic, and even somewhat more realistic graphics for your Minecraft experience.

With it you can expect a better-performing PC experience along with better and more immersive graphics. Among this patch's new features include a boost to the frame-rate, dynamic lighting, HD texture support, variable render distances, fog control, and so on. 

Need to know how to install the OptiFine patch for your game? This guide will give you step-by-step instructions. 

How to Install OptiFine Patch 1.12.1 for Minecraft

The Simple Way (For OptiFine 1.6.2_C4 and newer)

Double-click the downloaded JAR file to start the OptiFine installer

  1. Click "Install"
  2. OptiFine should get installed in the official Minecraft launcher with its own profile, "OptiFine"
  3. Start the official launcher and play!
The Complex Way (All OptiFine Versions) 

If the above method doesn't work for you, or you're running a version of OptiFine that's too old to be compatible with the instructions above, here's another way you can get it up and running in your Minecraft game.

  1. Use the  official launcher to download and start Minecraft 1.6.2.
  2. Go to the Minecraft base folder (shown in the official launcher when you click "Edit Profile" and "Game Directory")
  3. Go to the "Versions" subfolder
  4. Rename the "1.6.2" folder to "1.6.2_OptiFine"
  5. Go into "1.6.2_OptiFine" subfolder
  6. Rename "1.6.2.jar" to "1.6.2_OptiFine.jar"
  7. Rename "1.6.2.json" to "1.6.2_OptiFine.json"
  8. Open the file "1.6.2_OptiFine.json" with a text editor
  9. Replace "id":"1.6.2" with "id":"1.6.2_OptiFine"
  10. Save the file
  11. Copy the files from the OptiFine ZIP file in "1.6.2_OptiFine.jar" as usual
  12. Remove the META-INF folder from "1.6.2_OptiFine.jar".
  13. Start the official launcher
  14. Click "Edit Profile"
  15. Select "Use version: release 1.6.2_OptiFine"
  16. Click "Save Profile"
  17. Click "Play" or "Login" to start the game.

If only "Play Offline" is available, then log out and log in again to fix it.

Installing OptiFine to Minecraft with Forge

There is a slightly different process for those of you attempting to install the OptiFine 1.12.1 update if you've got Minecraft with Forge installed. It goes like this:

  1. Use the official launcher to download and start Minecraft 1.6.2
  2. Use the Forge installer to install Forge
  3. Go to the Minecraft base folder
  4. Go to "Versions" subfolder
  5. Go to subfolder "Forge9.10.X.Y"
  6. Copy the files from the OptiFine ZIP file to "Forge9.10.X.Y.jar"
  7. Remove the META-INF folder from "Forge9.10.X.Y.jar"
  8. Start the official launcher
  9. Select profile "Forge"
  10. Click "Edit Profile"
  11. Select the checkbox "JVM Arguments"
  12. In the field next to it, add: "-Dfml.ignoreInvalidMinecraftCertificates=true -Dfml.ignorePatchDiscrepancies=true"
  13. Click "Save Profile"
  14. Click "Play" or "Login" to start the game.

If only "Play Offline" is available, then log out and log in again to fix it.


That's all there is to it! Some of you may have a more difficult time getting this OptiFine patch into your game, but one of the methods listed above should work for you. If you need to download the update for yourself to test these out, you can do so from the main OptiFine forum thread

Got other issues you can't figure out? Check out the rest of our Minecraft guides for more tips and fixes!

The Long Dark Guide: How to Sleep,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/l/o/n/long-dark-banner-82d80.jpg axhlu/the-long-dark-guide-how-to-sleep Mon, 14 Aug 2017 18:14:59 -0400 Greyson Ditzler (PurplePocketPirate)

Sleeping is an essential aspect of survival in The Long Dark, one that can be used for benefits beyond its basic role of keeping you alive. But if you want ot sleep -- and trust us, you do -- there are some ways to do it that are better than others.

This guide for The Long Dark will tell you everything you need to know about sleeping, including the benefits of it and where it's best to lay down your head.

What You Need to Sleep in The Long Dark

In order to sleep in The Long Dark, you will need either a bed or a bedroll to sleep in. Beds can be found in various locations, while a bedroll can be crafted -- assuming you have the proper materials -- and used in most locations.

A Bearskin Bedroll is the ideal pick if you must use a bedroll, as it is much warmer than a standard Bedroll, and has a chance to keep animals away at night. One can be crafted if you have a Bear Skin.

How and Where to Sleep in The Long Dark

Sleeping is an easy action to perform if you know where it can be done. If you find a bed anywhere, you can just sleep in it -- simple as that. If you're using a Bedroll, however, you have a great deal more options.

With a Bedroll, you can sleep by placing it on the ground, or by using the Bedroll action while inside of a snow shelter or car. If you sleep outside in a bedroll, there is a risk of freezing depending on how warm the bedroll is and how cold the weather is. So be sure to keep that in mind before you lay down to nap.

Why You Should Sleep in The Long Dark

The short answer for why you should sleep is because you have to. If you don't sleep at fairly regular increments, you will become more and more fatigued -- and you want to avoid getting too fatigued as much as possible.

According to the The Long Dark Wiki: 

"If the player's fatigue level gets too high, the player will become "tired" and the amount of weight they can carry in their backpack slowly declines, to a minimum of half the maximum carry weight (30kg/66lbs). Eventually, the player will become 'extremely fatigued', vision will become blurry, and their condition will decline until they either rest, or die of fatigue."

The major benefits of sleeping (aside from fighting back fatigue) are:

  • Afflictions (sprained ankle/wrist, etc) can heal if you sleep for a set number of hours without requiring first aid. 
  • Other injuries (food poisoning, etc) require sleep in addition to medicine to be cured.
  • Can pass the time if players need to wait for weather changes or daylight
  • Can warm the player up and avoid (or treat) hypothermia if sleeping indoors or in a shielded area
  • Fastest way to recover Condition that's been lost

Sleeping is not without its own consequences and setbacks. It obviously takes time, which consumes calories and causes thirst -- both of which further necessitates the consumption of food and drink. And as previously mentioned, freezing in the outdoors while you sleep is a very real possibility, so make sure to have a proper source of heat on hand and watch the temperature.

If you keep all of these things in mind then you should do just fine in the bitter cold of the wilderness. Sweet dreams!


Need more help surviving in this unforgiving game? Check out the rest of our Long Dark guides so you can make it through the cold nights. 

PUBG Guide: How to Get Crate Keys,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/p/u/b/pubg-header-94592.jpg cmdnx/pubg-guide-how-to-get-crate-keys Mon, 14 Aug 2017 17:28:10 -0400 LuckyJorael

Recently, PLAYERUNKNOWN'S BATTLEGROUNDS introduced a new line of Battle Royale-inspired clothing to the game. While the clothing is purely cosmetic, some players became a little... concerned about paid cosmetic content in an EarlyAccess game, while others thought the idea was okay.

Regardless, the new outfits are here to stay, so here's how to get all the newest clothing in PUBG. You'll need to get Crate Keys in order to unlock some of the special crates that contain these items.

How to Get Keys for Gamescom Invitational Crates in PUBG

Just like the other crates, you'll need to purchase Gamescom Crates with your BP, and you're limited to 6 Gamescom Crates per week. But the Gamescom Invitational Crates come with a lock -- so you'll also need to purchase a key. First, here's what these special crates will cost you in BP:

  • 1st Crate: 1,200 BP
  • 2nd Crate: 2,400 BP
  • 3rd Crate: 4,800 BP
  • 4th Crate: 7,200 BP
  • 5th Crate: 9,600 BP
  • 6th Crate: 12,000 BP

Each crate you buy also needs a key, which you can go about getting in a couple ways:

  • Buy one through the Steam store.
  • Purchasing a key beforehand (also from the Steam store) using this handy link.
    • Note: The link provided there allows you to purchase one key at a time, and you can change the number of keys by changing the last number in the URL.

Once you have a key, you can open the Gamescom Crate and get to the sweet, sweet clothing inside. Each Gamescom Crate has a collection of Battle Royale-inspired clothing, and none of the clothing that was already in the game. Here's the loot pool that the crate pulls from:

  • Tracksuit Top
  • Tracksuit Pants
  • BR Cap
  • BR T-Shirt
  • Camo Hotpants
  • Tracksuit Top (Yellow)
  • Tracksuit Pants (Yellow)
  • Mandarin Jacket (Black)
  • School Shirt
  • Pleated Mini-skirt (Black) / Slacks (Black)
  • School Jacket
  • School Shirt with Blue Necktie
  • School Pants / School Skirt
  • Sneakers (White)
  • Velcro Trainers
  • Bloody Sneakers

The Gamescom Invitational Crates will only be available until August 27th. After that, you'll only be able to get the crates on the Steam Community Market. Keys for the crates will remain on the Steam store and in-game.

Survivor and Wanderer Crates in PUBG

When you decide to purchase a crate with your hard-earned Battle Points (BP), head to the in-game REWARDS page. You can buy a maximum of 6 crates per week, and the game determines randomly if you get the Survivor Crate or Wanderer Crate once you spend the BP.

Each crate you purchase costs more BP than the last, and you're locked out of buying more once you purchase the 6th crate. But at least for this set of crates, you don't need extra keys to open them. Here's the pricing scheme:

  • 1st Crate: 700 BP
  • 2nd Crate: 1,400 BP
  • 3rd Crate: 2,800 BP
  • 4th Crate: 4,200 BP
  • 5th Crate: 5,600 BP
  • 6th Crate: 7,000 BP

Both the Wanderer and Survivor Crates get you ONE clothing item from the Battle Royale movie-inspired sets, as well as some clothing items that were already in the game before the latest update. These other clothing items were previously available from the now-discontinued Pioneer Crates.

Note that the Wanderer and Survival Crates do have a different loot pool. The Survivor Crate has Trench Coats, for example. Wanderer Crates have the Mandarin Jacket (Blue) and Pleated Mini-skirt (Blue) / Slacks (Blue) clothing set, and Survivor Crates have the Women's Tuxedo Jacket (Purple) and Mini-skirt (Purple) / Slacks (Purple) clothing set.


That's everything you need to know about these special crates, the keys needed to open some of them, and the Battle Royale-inspired clothing inside. If you still need more tips and tricks related to this popular shooter, check out the rest of our PUBG guides for extra info!

How to Find the Fake Crash Easter Egg in Crash Bandicoot: N. Sane Trilogy,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/r/a/crash-bandicoot-sane-trilogy-screen-03dec16-6c36a.jpg 93yef/how-to-find-the-fake-crash-easter-egg-in-crash-bandicoot-n-sane-trilogy Mon, 14 Aug 2017 16:45:26 -0400 Bryantcpereira

The Crash Bandicoot N. Sane Trilogy is packed with easter eggs and fan service as an ode to the original games. Joining the party is Fake Crash, an easter-egg-turned-villain that debuted in Crash Bandicoot: Warped. 

At first glance, he can easily be mistaken for Crash's twin -- but the big-toothed "Trash Bandicoot" wouldn't fool any die hard fans. Fake Crash was influenced by some fake mock-ups of Crash, but ended up getting his own roles as a real character in games past the original trilogy. He can be found in the same locations as he was in the original, in addition to a number of new locations as well.

Without further ado, let's get right to finding our bushy-eyebrowed friend.

Beating the Game

If you just started up the game and were hoping to find Fake Crash right away, you're going to be disappointed. To see him, you have to achieve 100% in each game you plan to find him in. That means if you 100% the first game, you'll find him dancing around aimlessly in that game. But to find him in the other games, you need to 100% those as well.

Crash Bandicoot Locations

In the first game, you can find Fake Crash dancing in two different levels.

  • N. Sanity Beach -- On the top left-hand side of the first stone stairs.
  • Heavy Machinery -- Inside a pipe in the wall with green sludge oozing out of it. It's right after a descending staircase that leads Crash to a moving platform.

Crash Bandicoot 2 Locations

In Cortex Strikes Back, Vicarious Visions included Fake Crash in seven different stages for players to find and adore.

  • The Pits -- On a gray platform the left side of the path, near the first big mushroom.
  • Crash Crush -- In the section where Crash is getting chased by a boulder, he's in a snowy area to the left of all the nitro boxes.
  • Hang Eight -- At the end of the Blue Gem route, on a platform across the body of water.
  • Ruination -- On the right-hand side when you reach the first group of floating moving platforms.
  • Cold Hard Crash -- This one's harder to catch. In the first wall of ice on the death route, you can vaguely see him dancing.
  • Rock It -- In the first glass room in space, on the right-hand side.
  • Totally Fly -- In a similar location to The Pits, he's dancing between a tiki statue and a large tree on the left, a little past the rat with the nitro boxes behind it.

Crash Bandicoot: Warped Locations

To round things out, Fake Crash can be found in the following four levels.

  • Toad Village -- On the front porch of the third house on the right.
  • Makin Waves -- At the end of the level on the northern tip of a grassy island.
  • Hog Ride -- Dancing on the left-hand side of the road, right before a curve with the big green billboard.
  • Area 51? -- Once again dancing on the left-hand side of the road, this time near a tall cactus.

The goofy looking Crash imitator isn't a playable character, and nothing really happens if you find him. Even so, we can't help but love this simple addition and awe over those sick dance moves. 

While you're here, check out some of our other Crash Bandicoot N. Sane Trilogy guides below:

How to Get Essence in Paladins,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/3/6/5/36598f63b21ebea.png 3gxo4/how-to-get-essence-in-paladins Mon, 14 Aug 2017 16:36:03 -0400 Bryantcpereira

Much like the majority of competitive online multiplayer games, Paladins has a currency system used to acquire new characters, skills, and cosmetics. One of the forms of currency, Essence, is used to craft Cards that affect a champion's loadout at the beginning of a game. The cards enhance or change the skills of champions, allowing for a variety of different playstyles.

In this guide we’ll go over all of the different ways in which you can get Essence in Paladins, and how you can spend it. It’s fairly simple, but knowing the different ways of acquiring it can help you save up a large sum pretty quickly.

How to Acquire Essence in Paladins

Complete the Tutorial

For new players, the easiest way to get a lot of Essence is by completing the Basic Tutorial. The mode only takes a few minutes and rewards you with 36,000 Essence right off the bat. That’s enough to get at least one or two characters a decent amount of cards for their loadout.

Log In Daily

Daily Reward Login Bonuses are another easy way to get some essence to build up your assets. On the 4th, 5th, and 6th consecutive day in a row logging in, the game will reward you with up to 1,000 Essence. After the 7th day, the logins reset and you’ll have another chance to get some essence by taking advantage of the bonuses.

Weekly Quests

There are a few Weekly Quests that hand out Essence as a reward as well. Weekly Quests are given out once per week per player, and can stack up to six at a time. The quests consist of objectives like playing 10 games or winning four games in a party. And each one can reward up to 1,000 Essence.

If you don’t mind shelling out some cash, you can pick up the Founder's Pack for $20. This unlocks all current and future characters in the game and gives you a whopping 72,000 Essence.

Radiant Chests

Joining a myriad of other reward-based treasure chests in Paladins are Radiant Chests. They’re purchased with the game's other two forms of currency -- gold and crystals. The chests are sold for either 2,500 Gold or 50 Crystals and are also sold in bulk to include discounts to the Crystals cost. The chests are also obtained each time players level up their account, and occasionally when they level up their champions.

Radiant Chests reward players with Cards and cosmetic items. Any Cards already owned by a player automatically get turned into Essence. Because Cards have different rarities, this is how they’re disenchanted into Essence.

  • Common cards give 250 Essence
  • Rare cards give 350 Essence
  • Epic cards give 1250 Essence

Note cards that you own only one of can also be disenchanted into Essence for the same values, they just get removed from any loadouts they were being used in.

What Essence is Good For

So now you’ve got all this Essence, what do you with it? It’s simple -- players can use Essence to craft cards they don’t already own through the Cards screen in a champion’s profile. Just like the cards’ rarities break down into categories on how much Essence they give you, they each cost a specific amount as well.

  • Common cards cost 350 Essence
  • Rare cards cost 1,000 Essence
  • Epic cards cost 4,000 Essence
  • Legendary cards cost 10,000 Essence

Now that you know what to do with all this Essence you’ve got, go out and deck some Champions out to your liking! While you’re at it, check out some of our other Paladins guides here too.

Top 5 Starting Builds for Path of Exile 3.0: The Fall of Oriath,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/p/o/e/poefoo-22beb.png 1bqcj/top-5-starting-builds-for-path-of-exile-30-the-fall-of-oriath Mon, 14 Aug 2017 16:25:17 -0400 Craig Snyder

As one of the deepest ARPGs of all-time, starting Path of Exile in version 3.0 as a new player may look like a pretty daunting task. Just one glance at the sheer size of that passive skill tree is enough to make some people turn away.

We won't lie -- it's a lot of work developing your character. However, there are several builds that are very friendly towards new players and offer a lot of flexibility and room to grow.

If you're new to the game, check out these five starter builds that are going to help welcome you to Path of Exile 3.0 and get you started as smoothly as possible. To understand and visualize each of the builds, be sure to check out our article on how to use Path of Building so you can take the guesswork out of your building process. We'll also be including codes for each build that will allow you to import it painlessly into Path of Building. 

Ethereal Knives/Mind Over Matter Build for Path of Exile 3.0

This build is centered about grinding out maps and rushing to end-game content by using a spammable spell and skill tree keystone that utilizes your mana pool to make you tankier. Here's information on both:

Ethereal Knives:

Ethereal Knives (often referred to as EK) is a spell that throws five knives in front of the caster that deal physical damage. Multiple knives cannot hit the same target. The angle of the spell's arc is fixed and does not depend on where the cursor is, unlike other projectile skills.

Mind Over Matter:

Mind Over Matter (often referred to as MoM) is a keystone passive skill that allows the character's mana to absorb a portion of the damage dealt to life.

Understanding this spell and passive gives you a good idea of what this build tries to achieve. The EK/MoM build revolves around constantly throwing out EK as you path through maps, while tanking damage by mitigating 30% of all that's taken as a hit to your mana pool.

Why You Should Play It

It's worth mentioning that EK was recently nerfed by having its projectiles cut in half and even then the build remains incredibly powerful and easy to pilot.

EK/MoM builds are very forgiving and efficient when it comes to powering through maps. Bosses will give you a little bit of difficulty, as your single-target damage with EK isn't outstanding, but this build will get you to the end-game very quickly and safely.

One of the best parts of this EK/MoM build is that it's strength doesn't entirely revolve around gear, but it can be greatly improved as you scale up and get better gear. Having the best gear in the game feels like a "win more" condition while running this build.

Path of Building Code & Stat Numbers

Click to import the EK/MoM Build into Path of Building.

If you don't use Path of Building or just don't want to import the full build, click to enlarge the screenshot below so you can see a full overview of this build's numbers:

Tri/Quad Frostbolt (FB) Totems Build for Path of Exile 3.0

FB Totem builds have been a staple build in Path of Exile for a very long time. The build utilizes the Frostbolt spell and the Spell Totem Support gem to allow your totems to do all of the heavy lifting for you.


Frostbolt is a cold spell that fires a slowly moving projectile with 100% chance to pierce.

Spell Totem Support:

Spell Totem is a support gem that modifies the supported spell so that instead of casting it directly, a totem is summoned that uses the linked spell. The totem has a range of 60 units.

Coupling these two together frees your character up to clean up the tougher mobs that your totems don't manage to instantly AoE down.

Why You Should Build It

FB Totems have the fastest clear speed out of just about any build and can clear an entire screen in a matter of seconds. This is one of the most efficient builds for grinding to level 100 and farming shaped maps.

You'll find yourself struggling to dish out heavy amounts of single-target damage, but the benefit of totem builds is that you have the freedom to utilize your character to clear at the same time as your totems.

Path of Building Code & Stat Numbers

Click to import the FB Totems Build into Path of Building.

If you don't use Path of Building or just don't want to import the full build, click to enlarge the screenshot below so you can see a full overview of this build's numbers:

2H Ancestral Warchief (AW) Build for Path of Exile 3.0

AW builds are powerful, beefy, and pretty fun to play based on how interactive they are when compared to other starter builds. This is another build centered around one of the strongest totem skills in the game.

Ancestral Warchief:

Ancestral Warchief is a skill that creates a totem which will attack enemies with melee AoE slams while the player stands close to it. Being near it also increases the player's damage.

This build utilizes a ground-and-pound strategy where you really get in the face of mobs.

Why You Should Build It

This build is really easy to get started with, given that all you really need is a 2H axe. It's viable for Shaper and doubles as one of the strongest end-game builds once you get your hands on a Facebreaker.

This build won't clear as fast as others on this page, but downing bosses won't be nearly as difficult either. Play this build if you're interested in always being close to combat areas. It's not a build where you just run around a map and spam an ability. You really get involved and beat down enemies.

Path of Building Code & Stat Numbers

Click to import the 2H Ancestral Warchief Build into Path of Building.

If you don't use Path of Building or just don't want to import the full build, click to enlarge the screenshot below so you can see a full overview of this build's numbers:

Stunning Sunder Berserker Build for Path of Exile 3.0

Sunder is one of the most powerful AoE attacks in Path of Exile, so it's no secret why entire builds revolve around it and why you see it finish near the top of so many races.


Sunder is a melee attack creating a wave that travels forward and damages enemies in a straight line. Enemies hit by the wave release circular shock waves that further damage nearby enemies. Requires an axe, mace or staff.

Starting with a Sunder build lets you transition into many other options as far as melee characters go.

Why You Should Build It

There aren't many viable melee options when it comes to starting 3.0. A lot of the most powerful builds revolve around ranged spells and totems.

Sunder is a melee AoE ability that is arguably the most powerful leveling tool in the game. This build is very easy to acquire gear for, and it does just fine in end-game scenarios.

Most Sunder builds combine usage with the Multistrike Support gem eventually to create a wave of successive attacks. This particular Sunder build revolves around mowing down mobs with AoE and the stun status effect. This is a brute-force build where you overwhelm crowds of enemies as a melee character.

Path of Building Code & Stat Numbers

Click to import the Sunder Berserker Build into Path of Building.

If you don't use Path of Building or just don't want to import the full build, click to enlarge the screenshot below so you can see a full overview of this build's numbers:

Essence Drain (ED)/Contagion Trickster Build for Path of Exile 3.0

ED builds have been very popular league starter builds for quite a while. Combined with Contagion, this creates one of the most devastating synergies in the game:

Essence Drain (often referred to as ED) is a spell that fires a chaos projectile that applies a damage over time debuff when it hits the enemy. The spell also regenerates a portion of the debuff damage as life. If target dies while afflicted with both Contagion and Essence Drain, the remaining duration of both degeneration effects will be spread to nearby enemies.

Trickster builds allow you to be very nimble and dish out incredible amounts of damage over time.


Why You Should Build It

This a very low-budget build that rewards you with insanely high EXP per hour. No external abilities are required and you can rush through maps the moment you get to that stage of the game.

This build is available as both Trickster and Occultist, but the Trickster archetype of this build pumps out the most damage and is most efficient for taking down bosses quickly. However, you sacrifice some survivability.

With this build, you get in and out and let your DoT (damage over time) finish the job.

Path of Building Code & Stat Numbers

Click to import the ED/Contagion Build into Path of Building.

If you don't use Path of Building or just don't want to import the full build, click to enlarge the screenshot below so you can see a full overview of this build's numbers:


I think these five starter builds suit a wide range of different playstyles. The most important part is that they're easy to start with, provide room for growth, and don't lock you into a box of only being able to play the game one way.

Once you get comfortable with the basics of Path of Exile, transition into one of the most rewarding experiences in the game: setting up your own build to fit your style of play. That's what this game's all about. If you need more tips, you can check out the rest of our Path of Exile guides as well.

Which of these five builds is your favorite? If you know of a newbie-friendly starter build that isn't listed here, feel free to share it in the comments section below.

Hearthstone Frozen Throne Adventure Guide: Prologue and Lower Citadel,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/6/f/z/6fzlzvc-cbca2.jpg 22ppv/hearthstone-frozen-throne-adventure-guide-prologue-and-lower-citadel Mon, 14 Aug 2017 15:14:02 -0400 Sergey_3847

Alongside a whole arsenal of cards in the Knights of the Frozen Throne expansion, Hearthstone received a brand new adventure that comes completely free for all players. The adventure consists of three wings, each of which offers three boss battles.

This week, the Prologue and the first wing of the Lower Citadel are open for everybody. If you manage to beat all bosses, you will get a random Death Knight card and a pack of cards.

If you want to know how to beat all the bosses of the first wing, keep reading this guide for all the information you'll need!

How to Beat The Lich King in Hearthstone: Knights of the Frozen Throne 

The first boss you will encounter in the Prologue is The Lich King himself. In this case you don't get to choose your deck, but you will be provided with the pre-constructed one.

The match-up consists of two segments, the first of which you will lose no matter what. But don’t hit the Concede button yet. The Lich King will transform your hero into a Death Knight form, and in this case your vanilla Jaina will become Frost Lich Jaina.

In the second part of the match-up you will face Tirion and his army of horrible minions. This battle will be extremely easy to win -- just play on curve and you will get there soon.

In the end you will be rewarded with a random free Death Knight hero card.

How to Beat Lord Marrowgar in Hearthstone: Knights of the Frozen Throne 

The first boss of the Lower Citadel is Lord Marrowgar, who has a neat hero power that heals him to full health each turn. This means that you can’t kill him gradually, but you must come up with an OTK (one-turn kill) combo deck.

There are a couple of types of decks you can use in this battle:

OTK Priest

First, use Thoughsteal to copy Lord Marrowgar’s Bone Spike minions that deal 15 points of damage to the enemy hero. Then, use Divine Spirit to double the minion’s health, and Inner Fire to make its attack equal to its health. In this way you will finish Marrowgar in one turn.


  • Silence ×2
  • Holy Smite ×2
  • Inner Fire ×2
  • Northshire Cleric ×2
  • Power Word: Shield ×2
  • Divine Spirit ×2
  • Mind Blast ×2
  • Thoughtsteal ×2
  • Shadow Word: Pain ×2
  • Shadow Word: Death ×2
  • Loot Hoarder ×2
  • Novice Engineer ×2
  • Coldlight Oracle ×2
  • Gnomish Inventor ×2
  • Stormwind Knight ×2
Jade Druid

The Priest deck is a budget variant of the OTK deck. But if you have enough dust, you can craft the massive Jade Druid deck that will let you create an army of huge minions in one turn. In this way you can have over 30 damage on board and easily finish Marrowgar.


  • Innervate ×2
  • Earthen Scales ×2
  • Jade Idol ×2
  • Wild Growth ×2
  • Wrath ×2
  • Jade Blossom ×2
  • Swipe ×2
  • Nourish ×2
  • Jade Behemoth ×2
  • Malfurion the Pestilent ×1
  • Crazed Alchemist ×2
  • Stonehill Defender ×2
  • Jade Spirit ×2
  • Kooky Chemist ×2
  • Aya Blackpaw ×1
  • Gadgetzan Auctioneer ×2

How to Beat Deathbringer Saurfang in Hearthstone: Knights of the Frozen Throne 

Deathbringer Saurfang has a peculiar passive ability that protects him from any type of damage except one -- the damage from the weapons.

As you know, the class with the largest number of weapons in Hearthstone is Warrior -- so this is the best hero you can choose to play against Saurfang.

Your deck must consist of all the available Warrior weapons, excluding Fool’s Bane that can’t deal damage to heroes. Also, consider minions and spells that buff your weapons, such as Upgrade!, Heroic Strike, Bloodsail Cultist, Naga Corsair, Spiteful Smith, and others.

The deck against Deathbringer Saurfang should look like this:

  • N'Zoth's First Mate ×2
  • Southsea Deckhand ×2
  • Upgrade! ×2
  • Acidic Swamp Ooze ×2
  • Bloodsail Raider ×2
  • Execute ×2
  • Fiery War Axe ×2
  • Heroic Strike ×2
  • Hobart Grapplehammer ×1
  • Bloodsail Cultist ×2
  • Arathi Weaponsmith ×2
  • Death's Bite ×2
  • Dread Corsair ×2
  • Spiteful Smith x2
  • Arcanite Reaper ×2
  • Malkorok ×1

How to Beat Lady Deathwhisper in Hearthstone: Knights of the Frozen Throne 

The final boss is quite tricky and will be hard to beat, if your deck will not be able to effectively heal its minions. The problem is that Lady Deathwhisper’s hero power sets the health of all enemy minions to 1, which makes them extremely vulnerable.

At the same she has 30 health and 90 armor that requires 120 points of damage in total to kill her. Sounds challenging, isn’t it? But don't worry, you will have a helping hand in this fight. There is another minion on board at your side -- Valithria Deathspeaker, a dragon with 30 attack and 5 health.

Unfortunately, this powerful dragon can’t attack unless it is fully healed. If you remember Lady Deathwhisper constantly deals damage to all enemy minions, so you need to find a way to heal Valithria each turn for it to be able to attack for 30 damage.

The only hero in Hearthstone that is capable of doing this is Priest. Here’s the decklist you can use:

  • Circle of Healing ×2
  • Forbidden Shaping ×2
  • Silence ×2
  • Binding Heal ×2
  • Inner Fire ×2
  • Mind Vision ×2
  • Northshire Cleric ×2
  • Lightwell ×2
  • Radiant Elemental ×2
  • Shadow Word: Pain ×2
  • Shadow Word: Death ×2
  • Thoughtsteal ×2
  • Greater Healing Potion ×2
  • Darkshire Alchemist ×2
  • Holy Nova ×1
  • Mind Control ×1


With the help of these moderately budgeted decks you will be able to finish all the wings of the Lower Citadel, earn a legendary hero, and a free Knights of the Frozen Throne pack.

Come back soon for more Hearthstone guides at GameSkinny!

Dark and Light Complete Bestiary,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/a/r/darknlight-165ed.jpg z7syu/dark-and-light-complete-bestiary Mon, 14 Aug 2017 11:27:23 -0400 ESpalding

Even if you have only just started playing Dark and Light, you will be aware that the game is full of all kinds of wildlife -- there are over 50 species in-game. Some are friendly and docile, like sheep, but some you wouldn't want to wander too close to for fear of losing a limb, like bargesh. 

As you might have already seen in our Dark and Light Taming Guide, a lot of creatures can also be tamed and used as mounts to help you find resources faster.

But to get a real sense of what creatures roam the game world, here is a complete Dark and Light bestiary, as well as each creature's use in-game. Some of the creature information has yet to be revealed online, but this guide will be updated as soon as those details become available. 

Full List of All Creatures in Dark and Light


An Alligar is Water creature that cannot be tamed. Further information currently not available.


Bargesh are akin to hyenas. Even though they aren't powerful, they are agile and move quickly. The upside of Bargesh is that they can strip fallen creatures of their hides and meat, and they can be a combat or hunter/gatherer mount.


Bears can be tamed and can be used as a mount. Further information currently not available.


Information currently not available.


Information currently not available.


Boars are really easy to tame, but once you have them on the ground and have the food trough in front of them, they will go through food really quickly, so make sure you have enough!

Once tamed, Boars can be used to:

  • Collect berries from bushes
  • Harvest apples
  • Gather wood, mushrooms, and twine
  • Mount

Information currently not available.


It might come as a surprise, but you can tame Cyclops and even have them as mounts. They are really aggressive and run pretty quickly so you are going to have to find another way of slowing them down to make sure you get enough arrows into them.

Once you have them under your control, they are exceptionally strong and make fantastic siege weapons capable of breaking down all kinds of walls and defenses.


Tameable. Further information currently not available.


All Elementals in Dark and Light can be tamed, but you don't need to use hook arrows and food to win them over. To tame them, you need soul stones. You must make sure the Elemental is down to very low health before you start the taming process -- otherwise, the soul stone won't work. They can be crafted once you hit Taming Rank 6, but you'll need a core from each of the elements to make one.

Each Elemental can help you out in different ways. For example, the Earth Elemental can be used to construct defenses, while the Fire Elemental can provide heat in colder climates and cook food.

Elemental creatures in the game are Fire and Ice Imps, Dark Ice and Dark Fire Elementals, and Fire, Light, Wind, Ice, Earth and Water Elementals.


Information currently not available.

Fire Tiger

Information currently not available.


Information currently not available.

Frost Dragon

Information currently not available.


These majestic flying beauties are a must for mount collectors -- but be prepared for a fight when you go to train them. Griffins take quite a lot of arrows to bring down and will struggle to get airborne again as soon as they can. As with Boars, they do require a lot of food and will go through it quickly -- but the plus side is that they feel the effects of the hooks for longer.

Griffins can be used:

  • In battle
  • For carrying objects
  • For exploration
Grut Stag

These are one of the easier creatures to tame and can also be used as a mount. If you want to utilize them to gather resources, they are great at harvesting grass and straw.


Information currently not available.


Even though you don't have to tame them yourself and they are not found in the wild, Horses are widely available from vendors in towns and cities at minimal cost. 


Due to their size and toughness, Kebo require a lot of resources to tame -- not just arrows and their components, but also a lot of time and a lot of feed.

Kebo can be used to collect many items in Dark and Light, such as stone, sulfur, twine, and wood. Kebo have a hearty attack, but move rather slow.


Unlike Boars, Longhorns don't not tame very quickly. Actually, everything about them is pretty darn slow. On top of slow taming, they don't eat quickly and the torpor effect drains from them pretty slowly.

They can, however, carry quite a load, so they're useful when gathering sulfur and stone.


Information currently not available.


Information currently not available.


Pathers are really aggressive and can spot you from quite a distance. When attempting to tame one, you can't outrun one in a straight line. You need try and gain a height advantage to get the easiest shots in. Once they are down, they eat rather slowly but the torpor effect drains from them really quickly so you will have to be on your toes and get ready to fire more shots at it.

Panthers can be used as mounts.


Information currently not available.


Information currently not available.


Sheep are relatively easy to tame as they don't move very fast, at least until they are injured -- and then they move rather quickly.

Sheep are used for one thing in Dark and Light and that is to provide wool, which is used to craft certain items in the game. So you need a pretty decent supply of it.

Searing Dragon

Information currently not available.


Information currently not available.


Personally, I wouldn't be wanting to get anywhere near the Spiders that you find in Dark and Light. They are commonly found in jungle areas and can be easily spotted from a distance because they have a glowing mark on their backs. They eat slowly, so make sure you have the ways and means of defending yourself and your quarry as you tame them. 

Once tamed, you can equip Spiders with a mount and run off to hunt some goblins or other fast-moving prey.


For a creature that looks like a water fly, they are really substantial. They will take about 3 hours to tame -- but once you've managed to tame one, they can be used as a mount.


Information currently not available.


Information currently not available.


These two-headed vulture-type birds can be found living along the coastline. When taming one, be sure you're wearing sufficient armor because it will definitely attack you. the silver lining is that they don't take very many arrows to bring down. 

Vrocks can be tamed quite early in Dark and Light, too, making them a great choice for a beginner's flying mount.


Information currently not available.


Information currently not available.


Information currently not available.


Wyvern are the smallest of any of the dragon types and are relatively easy to tame as well. Normally quite docile, they will flee when attacked so you need to make sure you try and get them caught in trees or over the edge of a cliff.


There are two types of Yetis in the game -- wild yetis and summoned yetis. Wild yetis cannot be tamed and will more than likely rip you apart if you try. But if you collect shards from killing yetis, you can summon tamed yetis in special temples dotted around the snowy tundra.

These docile creatures will:

  • Guard your belongings
  • Assist you across tricky terrain
  • Help you collect resources and complete tasks.


So there you have it -- 50 creatures from the Dark and Light universe. As previously stated, there is a lot of information missing but this will be updated as the relevant information is released.

In the meantime, make sure you check out the rest of our Dark and Light guides here at GameSkinny to get the most out of your time in the wilds:

FFXIV Moonfire Faire Event Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-40e15.jpg 35asb/ffxiv-moonfire-faire-event-guide Fri, 11 Aug 2017 11:55:47 -0400 Sergey_3847

The annual Moonfire Faire event is now playable in Final Fantasy XIV. Lasting until August 26, it offers a few quests and FATEs that can reward you with some really cool and unique items. The event takes place on the Isle of Endless Summer, but first, you must speak with Mayaru Moyaru at the Upper Decks of Limsa Lominsa City if you want to access it.

If you want to know all of the details on how to take part in the event, then read on for a complete guide to the Moonfire Faire 2017 experience. At the end of the event, you can trade your Faire Vouchers for a host of special rewards.

Moonfire Faire 2017 Quests in FFXIV

The Isle and The Faire

As you speak to Mayaru Moyaru at the Aftcastle, he will ask you to travel to the Isle of Endless Summer, otherwise known as Costa del Sol, which is located in the southeast of Vylbrand, an eastern part of La Noscea. There, you'll need to speak to an NPC named Haermaga.

As soon as you arrive at the beach, you will find Haermaga standing at the bar. Speak to him and he will ask you to help deal with a few things at the faire. But first, you must speak to P’obyano -- a lady at the bar near Haermaga.

P’obyano will ask you to speak to Jiriri, the master’s assistant, about the fireworks at the faire. You will find her nearby on the beach. Lastly, Jiriri will ask you to throw a firework mortar into the firework cannon that is located off the shore at the indicated area on the map.

Swim to the mortar off shore and activate it. When you do this, go back to P’obyano and tell her you've completed the task. This will complete the quest of The Isle and The Faire.

These Fireworks Won’t Light Themselves

After, speak to P’obyano again, and she will give you more fireworks to burn, but this time, you must burn all three of them.

All three firework mortars are located off shore around the Isle of Endless Summer. They will be indicated on your map, so you will need to go to each location and fire them up.

Then, return to P’obyano and get your rewards.

You Had Me at Haddock

Now, speak to Hildelana -- the faire’s chef. She will ask you to bring her some battered fish.

There are two ways you can approach this quest: either you catch the fish yourself or you buy it from the festive fisher.

At the same bar, speak to Beaudefoin. He will ask you to bring some more haddock from the North Shore. This time, you actually need to go and catch the fish. Once at the North Shore, you'll need to start fishing for 3x Haddock. When you’re done, bring them back to Beaudefoin.

The True Meaning of Summer

Finally, speak to Haermaga (once again) for the last quest of the event, which will reward you with three new items: Faire Joi, Faire Kohakama, and Faire Zori.

In order to finish the quest, you must deliver seven faire vouchers to Haermaga, which can be earned by repeatedly accepting and completing all of the above-mentioned quests. When you have all of the vouchers, hand them to Haermaga and go wait for him at the Southern Isle.

There, he will ask you for another favor -- he wants you to figure out what Master Gegeruju is looking at through his spyglass. Go to the indicated destination on your map and check the spyglass for yourself.

As it turns out, the young master is strongly interested in the beautiful ladies on the beach. Bring this information to Haermaga to unlock your new items.

Moonfire Fair 2017 FATEs in FFXIV

Adopt a Beach

You will meet Moonfire Faire Chaperone on the beach, who will offer you to help gather the litter scattered around the isle. As soon as you join the FATE, you will need to gather all the unsightly rubbish from the beach.

The Summer of Ultros

Ultros, the giant purple octopus, is hanging out on the beach and makes all the ladies uncomfortable. You can join this FATE for extra rewards and help finish the beast.

In the end, you can watch the gorgeous fireworks light up the night sky.


You still have plenty of time before the Moonfire Faire is over, and if you need other FFXIV: Stormblood guides, here are a few to get you started:

Observer: Guide to the Fire And Sword Spiders Mini-Game,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/0/1/20170729001700-17a91.jpg pp128/observer-guide-to-the-fire-and-sword-spiders-mini-game Fri, 11 Aug 2017 10:15:37 -0400 Ty Arthur

Offering a little respite from the relentless dreariness and bleak surroundings in dystopian horror entry Observer, your cybernetically augmented detective can take some time out from investigating horrible murders to play the mini game With Fire And Sword: Spiders

Each level gets progressively harder as you master staying one step ahead of an endless stream of hungry spiders. Waiting at the end of each level is a princess and her gold-dependent affections!

Looking for more guides instead to get past some of the more difficult sections in Observer? Check out our other Observer guides here:

Basic With Fire And Sword: Spiders Strategy

There are a couple of basics to keep in mind for solving the puzzles on your own if you don't want a step-by-step walkthrough. First and foremost, spiders only move when you move, and it's a 1-to-1 ratio. In other words: The game isn't real-time, and you can stop and figure out your next move before you make it.

Second, and almost as important, is that when spiders collide, they stack together on the same square instead of making a chain. It's the spider equivalent of a rat king, with all of them getting tangled up together (eww, gross).

This is critical, though, because there are far too many spiders to kill with fire swords -- since using a sword removes it from your inventory -- so your strategy should revolve around forcing spiders onto the same tile so they combine.

Finally, remember that you can reach the princess without grabbing all the coins, but that won't actually finish the level. There's no doubt she's a gold digger, because if you show up empty handed, there's no princess love to be found.

With Fire And Sword: Spiders Level 1 Solution

For this first level, all you have to do is grab the fire sword first, then grab both the coins and approach the spider. As long as you don't go down the hallway and attract the spider's attention before grabbing the sword, you can't really lose.

Level 1

With Fire And Sword: Spiders Level 2 Solution

Once you figure out the spiders can be lured to take up the same space, this level becomes incredibly easy. Grab the fire sword and then move past the first spider -- but don't kill it yet! Ignore the gold piece and move up the central tunnel.

Move 1 spot above the middle section to force the three spiders to converge, then move down 1 spot to kill all three spiders at once. From there, grab the second sword in the upper-right corner, nab the final gold coin, kill the remaining spider, and smooch up the princess.

Level 2

With Fire And Sword: Spiders Level 3 Solution

Grab the first coin, which won't alert the spider. Lead the first spider left, up, right, and then back down so you can grab the sword while he's 1 space behind you. Kill the spider and grab the right- and left-hand coins you missed while he was chasing you.

 Leading the 1st spider on a chase

Move up the central tunnel until the next spider gives chase, and repeat the process of going left to force him to follow. Return back up to grab the sword, but don't kill the spider yet. Instead, move right and then up to force the spider guarding the gold coin to give chase.

Move one to the right toward a gold coin to force the two spiders to occupy the same space, then kill them both. Make sure you don't go too far right to draw out the third and final spider yet, however. Grab the top coin.

 Luring spiders into position to complete Level 3

With the previous two spiders dead, draw out the top spider and lead him on a merry chase left around the square again. So long as you don't take any detours, he will remain 1 square behind you until you reach the princess.

With Fire And Sword: Spiders Level 4 Solution

This one's tricky and requires a very specific path -- thanks to you readers for the tip! First get the attention of the spider guarding the upwards tunnel (the one with the extra sword), then get the attention of the lowermost spider guarding the bottom coin.

Head right and go up around the black square, then down and right towards the princess. She'll reject you, but that's OK because we're not done yet. You should have a ball of spiders that can now be killed by moving one square left, and two spiders left on the board - one above and one below a coin.

Go back and grab the sword and all available coins (but make sure to go up around the black square so the top spider doesn't kill you). Kill the top spider with the sword, then move down one, which draws the lower spider out. You can now go around any of the black square and get him to chase you 1 square behind. Circle back around to grab the coin and head to the princess.

With Fire And Sword: Spiders Level 5 Solution

This level is actually simpler than it looks. The secret is that you don't even need to grab the fire sword and you can ignore all the spiders on the lower half of the map. All you really need to do is avoid one single square.

First, go left and up to draw the attention of the spider in front of the princess. If you don't do this, you can't win the level, since we aren't grabbing the sword.

With that spider in tow, head down the main tunnel and go right, down, and right so that you should have five spiders chasing you in a ball as shown below. Don't keep going right when you see the next spider. Instead, go down to draw the attention of the spider to the left.

 Loads of spiders giving chase

Head right again to get the lower spider to chase you, then head up the far right-hand tunnel to grab the gold coin. When you reach the intersection where there's the spider above and to the left, don't go left -- he will reach you in one move every time. 

 Avoid the top spider at all costs!

Instead, go down, then go left. Keep moving left and the finally up. You can nab the final two coins and reach the princess one move ahead of the spider ball.

Level 5


With Fire And Sword: Spiders Level 6 Solution

This is another one that seems out of control but isn't that hard once you've got the mechanics down. It does introduce a new mechanic, though -- the spider queen, who will chase you once there's any line of sight (not just 1 square away). However, she will also break off the chase once line of sight is broken.

Grab the coin beneath you, then the coin to the left. This will start the spider queen chasing you (she will kill two spiders on the way to you). After grabbing the coin, move 1 right, then down and left to break line of sight with the queen.

 Breaking line of sight

Go grab all the coins and the sword on the far left side. This will get the queen chasing you again. Don't panic, just move straight back down after grabbing the top most coin, which will break line of sight.

Head right again and move down toward the lower left section. Here we're going to do all the spider chases you should be used to. When you hit the intersection, go right and down without getting the left spider's attention. Grab the coin and move left and then up, which should result in two spiders chasing you.

Don't kill either of them, but instead go back up to the main intersection with them chasing. Now, head over to the lower right section with the rest of the spiders.

 Moving to the lower right side

First, take the tunnel on the far right side to get three more spiders in the chase ball, then go left and back up the tunnel containing the gold coin -- this will get the spider on your left to follow you but will leave the two in the bottom where they are. 

 Spider chases! 

Go up to the central tunnel and then back down the far right side (by the spider hanging out by his lonesome in the longer tunnel segment). Go into the bottom-left square with the coin and get the spider to chase you around the square. You should now have a fire sword and only two coins remaining.

Don't worry about killing the spiders chasing you. Instead, just go straight for the princess. The queen will chase but can't catch you if you don't detour. Kill the spider next to the princess and grab the final two coins for the win.

Completing Level 6

With Fire And Sword: Spiders Level 7 Solution

Stay tuned for the full solution to Level 7!

With Fire And Sword: Spiders Level 8 Solution

Stay tuned for the full solution to Level 8!

With Fire And Sword: Spiders Level 9 Solution

Stay tuned for the full solution to Level 9!

With Fire And Sword: Spiders Level 10 Solution

Stay tuned for the full solution to Level 10! Completing this final puzzle nets you the Noble Sword achievement.


Have you found any other solutions to these puzzles with fewer moves? Let us know in the comments section below!

Colony Survival Cheat Codes Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/5/e/3/5e352837faf262638f0e83e1790aa1881189b3831920x1080-927f4.jpg y80hw/colony-survival-cheat-codes-guide Thu, 10 Aug 2017 10:09:59 -0400 ActionJ4ck

Cheat codes may be a dying breed in the video game world, but they are alive and well in Pipliz's blocky survival game, Colony Survival. With cheats activated, players are able fly, teleport, and loot at will, making these codes perfect for players that are primarily interested in the building aspects of Colony Survival. If those sound fun to you, then read on for GameSkinny's list of Colony Survival console commands and cheat codes. 

How to Activate Cheats in Colony Survival

Before using cheats in Colony Survival, you'll need to enable them. Simply press "T" to open up the game's command line, type the following, and hit enter:

/cheats on

Once enabled, you can use any of the cheat codes listed below by simply opening up the command line with T, typing in the code, and pressing enter. If you want, you can also disable cheats by typing: 

/cheats off

List of Colony Survival Cheat Codes  

Enable flying (note that you must press F to toggle flying and hold SHIFT to fly faster):

/setflight true

Teleport to your banner:

/teleport banner

Teleport to specific coordinates (x, y, and z should be replaced by the desired coordinate numbers):

/teleport x y z

Change time (replace # with the desired number of hours to move forward)

/time add #

Obtain any item (replace ItemID with the item's ID and # with the quantity of the item): 

/loot ItemID #

For this last code, note that an item's ID is not always the same as the name of the item itself. See below for the list of Item IDs. 

List of Colony Survival Item IDs

Here is an alphabetical list of all items in Colony Survival that can be spawned with cheats, followed by their corresponding ID:

Item Item ID
Adobe adobe
Arrow arrow
Axe axe
Banner banner
Bed bed
Berry berry
Berry Seed berrybush
Bow bow
Bread bread
Bricks bricks
Clay clay
Coal Ore coalore
Coated Planks coatedplanks
Command Tool commandtool
Crate crate
Dirt dirt
Flax flax
Flax Seeds flaxstage1
Flour flour
Furnace furnace
Gold Coin goldcoin
Gold Ingot goldingot
Gold Ore goldore
Grass grass
Grass Rainforest grassrainforest
Grass Savanna grasssavanna
Grass Taiga grasstaiga
Grass Temperate grasstemperate
Grass Tundra grasstundra
Grindstone grindstone
Gypsum gypsum
Iron Ingot ironingot
Iron Ore ironore
Leaves leaves
Leaves Taiga leavestaiga
Leaves Temperate leavestemperate
Linseed Oil linseedoil
Log log
Log Taiga logtaiga
Log Temperte logtemperate
Mint mint
Oven oven
Pickaxe pickaxe
Planks planks
Plaster Block plasterblock
Quiver quiver
Sand sand
Sapling sappling
Snow snow
Stone Block stoneblock
Stone Bricks stonebricks
Straw straw
Torch torch
Water water
Wheat wheat
Wheat Seeds wheatstage1
Workbench workbench


With Colony Survival's cheats at your fingertips, you should have no problem building the settlement of your dreams. If you found this guide helpful, be sure to check out some of our other Colony Survival guides on GameSkinny. Here are a few to get you started:

Observer Complete Keypad Codes and Passwords List,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov-74005.jpg g2c2k/observer-complete-keypad-codes-and-passwords-list Wed, 09 Aug 2017 18:06:37 -0400 Ty Arthur

Ready to have your mind bent to its absolute limits? That's what's in store when you and Polish detective Rutger Hauer go searching for a killer in a run-down dystopian apartment complex with Observer!

While exploring the many corridors and levels of the complex, there are a variety of locked rooms and secret areas. Some of these are critical to the story, while others just give access to new info and items.

Below we list out every single keypad password in the entire game. Having trouble getting through the endless hallway loop puzzle in Room 104 instead? Check out our guide to solving the Room 104 puzzle in Observer for the solution to escape.

All Keypad Codes and Passwords in Observer

Adam Lazarski's Apartment Keypad
  • Code: 1984

If you hack the keypad in your son's apartment, you will only get the last number revealed -- a 4. With a little snooping around, you can find a copy of the famous dystopian novel 1984 in the back of a closed closet, giving you a clue to the full code number. 

 Adam's Apartment Keypad

Ground Floor Back Room
  • Code: 0446

If you explore the ground floor area of the apartment, you will find a broken section of wall near rooms 11 and 12 that leads to a locked door. This keypad is opened with code 0446.

 Ground Floor Back Room Keypad

Apartment 114 Keypad
  • Code: 1074

You can get this password code when talking to the strange girl in apartment 113 who keeps changing voices. The actual apartment 114 is down the hall next to the bizarre ad with the executive guy who has multiple arms.

 Room 114 Keypad

Tattoo Parlor Chair Keypad
  • Code: 3615

This keypad is hidden next to Helena Novak's body in the back room of the tattoo parlor. To find the keypad, look at the back of the tattoo chair and open a secret compartment.

Based on the number 1 showing up when you hack the keypad, it seems like this full code should be one of the numbers of the tattoos stored in the computer, but it actually isn't. You can find the full code by hacking into Novak's mind after she's already dead and going through her interrogation segment.

 Tattoo Parlor Keypad

Apartment 28 Keypad
  • Code: 7441

After going through the secret room in the tattoo parlor and heading down into the basement corridors, you will come across this room that has the phrase "Chiron Eats My Dreams" spray painted on the wall nearby.

If you hack the keypad, the final number is 1. You won't actually find the full code organically in the game until much later in your playthrough, but you can just use 7441 now to get inside.

 Apartment Unit 28

Exit Door Keypad
  • Code: 4004

This door in the basement has the glowing Exit sign hovering above. Hacking the keypad reveals that the first three letters are 400 but it doesn't give the last number, so you can pretty well just guess this one by going through each iteration. The full code is 4004.

 Exit Door Keypad

Apartment 202 Keypad
  • Code: 36??

Hacking this apartment's keypad reveals the first two numbers as 36, but I haven't figured out the last two numbers yet. If you solved it, let us know in the comments section and we'll get this updated!

 Apartment 202 Keypad

Side Alley Door
  • Code: 2069

When you are in a side alley across from a tattoo shop (at the point where you see all the red silhouettes walking around), there's another keypad locked door.

Hacking just reveals the first two numbers as 20, so brute forcing this one with a bunch of guesses will take too long. If you search the area you'll find a night club where several "69" signs are hanging around though, letting you know the full code.

Those are all the locked keypad doors we've come across so far! Found any others that we missed? Let us know below, and stay tuned for more Observer guides coming soon covering collectibles, achievements, and completing the Fire And Spiders mini-games!

Citadel: Forged with Fire Admin Commands and Cheats,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/a/d/m/admincommandsandcheats-2976c.jpg o0gq5/citadel-forged-with-fire-admin-commands-and-cheats Wed, 09 Aug 2017 10:25:37 -0400 Joseph Rowe

Starting your own server in Forged With Fire and want to know how to ban people? Playing on your own as an admin and want to get some quick resources or skip the leveling grind? You'll need admin commands to do any of that. 

Don't know what they are? Don't worry! In this guide, we've collected all the Citadel: Forged with Fire server commands and cheats you need to get any job done.

How to Get Administrator Access in Citadel: Forged with Fire

Before being able to use the server commands and cheats, you'll have to get admin access. In order to do this, the server must have an administrator password set. To set a password, you or the owner of another server you want admin access to must take the following steps:

  1. Turn your game off and shut your server down
  2. Open your Windows explorer to the Users folder on your hard drive
  3. Go to the folder with your name on it
  4. Open the folder called AppData*
  5. Open Local -> Citadel -> Saved -> Config -> WindowsNoEditor
  6. Open the file marked Game.ini
  7. Place the following string of text above the file's current text and leave a blank line between the two sets of text:
  8. Save and close the Game.ini file

You don't have to set your password to 1234, but that is the one I used since I play Citadel: Forged with Fire solo on my server and it's easy to remember. If you have to worry about other players on your server trying to gain admin access, you can make it a more complicated password.

After the Game.ini file is altered, it's okay to start the game and server up again. Once settled into the world, type the following into the chatbox along with your password:

/admin_login [password]

If you were successful, you should get a notification letting you know you logged in like the one in the image (though your text admin_login command will disappear after hitting enter).

Now you can use admin commands and cheats to your heart's content!

List of Admin Commands in Forged with Fire

These are the admin commands in Citadel: Forged with Fire you need to know to run an effective server:

Code Command
/admin_autosave Saves the server in case you need to shut down in a hurry.
/admin_delete (player) Completely wipes a character from the server and displays their steam ID in the confirmation message.
/admin_logout Logs you out of administrator access.
/admin_startstats This will record the stats on your server for you to better understand its performance.
/admin_stopstats Stops what the previous command starts.
/admin_update (new password) Use this to change your password.
/cinecam  Removes your player's hands/arms from sight in first person view.
/server_ban (player) (reason) Ban a player and let them see the reason.
/server_kick (player) (reason) Kick a player and let them see the reason.
/server_unban (player) Unban a player.
/togglemeshes Seems to do the same as cinecam without the awkward second body.
/whois (player) Gives you information about a player character, online or not, on your server, along with their Steam ID.


Most of these admin commands are essential to making sure you run the kind of server you want. Don't be afraid to kick griefers or ban people who ruin your enjoyment of the game. Conversely, you can reward trusted players with administrator access if you feel they deserve it.

Important to note: you can wipe your characters as an admin in Citadel: Forged with Fire. This is something that a lot of players are unaware of. Make sure your community knows this on your server, as some players will head to new ones for a fresh start.

It's also worth noting that some of these commands don't work all of the time or possibly not at all. I tried to start stats on my server, but it failed to initiate. On the flipside, some commands work but are buggy. Just like the picture above, you, too, can hug yourself by using /cinecam while in a 3rd person view!

List of Cheat Codes for Citadel: Forged with Fire

Want to break your game a little bit? Here are all the cheat codes that you can currently use in Forged with Fire

Code Cheat
/giveallitems Gives you all the items in the game.
/giveitem (name) (amount) Gives you a specific item in a specific quantity.
/givespell (spell name) Teaches you a spell.
/giveexp (amount) Gives you exp.
/giveresources (amount) Gives you resources up to 1000.
/giverune (amount) Gives you Rune Crystals up to 1000.
/givestone (amount) Gives you Stones up to 1000.
/givewood (amount) Gives you Wood up to 1000.
/invincible (amount) Gives you a percentage based damage reduction (0-100%)
/knowitall Learn all recipes, spells, etc. in the game.
/regen Regenerate your health and mana.
/regrow Regrow all the resource nodes in the game.
/setname (new name) Changes your character's name.
/settime (between 0 and 2400) Set the time in your world based on a 24-hour clock.
/suicide Kills your character.
/teleport (player) Teleports to a specific player.
/teleport (lat) (long) Teleports to specific coordinates./giveallitems - Gives you all the items in the game.


These cheats are perfect for when you really want to get to the end-game in Citadel: Forged with Fire, but don't want to grind to get there. Whether you want to try out Dark Flight or Sinkat's Death Hands, you'll be able to if you /knowitall and /giveexp until you hit 60.

Another advantage of cheating on your server is you can practice group fighting strategies with your teammates. For example, if you're trying to combat an Infernal Dragon, you can do research ahead of time by studying its attacks while invincible.

The teleport feature is a great way to explore Forged with Fire's map in its entirety if you haven't yet. As cool as Dark Flight and the Legendary Broomstick are, it's not nearly as fast as instantaneous travel.

Just like with the  admin commands, these cheats can be inconsistent. I have successfully given myself exp until I hit 60 -- but after wiping my character, the /giveexp cheat didn't work.


These are all of the working Citadel: Forged with Fire admin commands and cheats I could find. Leave a comment if I'm missing any, or if one of the commands didn't work for you. This game is still in early access so bugs are to be expected -- but they're still a bother, which I talk about more extensively in my Forged with Fire review

Need more help with the game? Check out the rest of our Forged with Fire guides for more tips and tricks to make the most out of your play time:

Fortnite Guide: Troubleshooting Errors and Bug Fixes for Version 1.03,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-8ad06.jpg tzbbo/fortnite-guide-troubleshooting-errors-and-bug-fixes-for-version-103 Tue, 08 Aug 2017 17:54:58 -0400 Ty Arthur

Scheduled to stay in Early Access until 2018, Fortnite has been a killer multiplayer experience...with a few bumps along the way.

Unfortunately, this week Epic showcased a real downside to charging for Early Access to a game that will one day be entirely F2P -- those who laid down cash to get in are dealing with all the bugs and problems, whereas those who pay nothing down the line will get a smoother experience.

Although there have been a few lags and stutters up until now, the major problems seem to have arrived with Fortnite patch 1.03. Below we cover the biggest issues right now and all the known workarounds or fixes for these common errors. 

 Lots of people have been seeing this annoying message all week

How To Fix "Cannot Download" and "Login Failed" Error for Fortnite Version 1.03

On the PC edition, both of these issues seem to be tied to server problems that are overcome with simple persistence. Keep clicking Retry until you get the option to sign into your Epic account with your user name and password.

For console, players have had good luck resolving this manually by creating an entirely new Epic account, unlinking their PSN or Xbox Gold service from the previous account, and then linking it up with the new Epic account.

How To Fix Purchase Check Failure Error for Fortnite Version 1.03

This one is happening most frequently on the Xbox One edition, and seems to be an issue with the Xbox Live service not interfacing properly with the Epic Games client.

A patch is scheduled to fix this, but for now users have reported about a 75% success rate in either signing out and signing back into Xbox Live, or instead performing a full hard reset on their Xbox One. 

If you have your Xbox set to only go into lower power mode instead of restarting when you hit the power button, just tap the Xbox Guide button on the controller, then scroll down to the Settings tab, select Restart, and Yes.

A forum page specifically covering this topic is live and will be updated once the resolution is announced, so check back at this page for the latest info if you still can't log in.

How To Fix Tactical Bonus Locked Bug for Fortnite Version 1.03

This one doesn't actually appear to be a bug, but rather just an element of the game that isn't explained particularly well and has gotten lost in translation as elements of the UI and descriptive text have changed.

Some players have been baffled when they unlock the Hero Squad Tactical Op Slot node in the first skill tree -- yet when they pop a Hero into that slot who has a tactical bonus, it still shows as "locked" like in the image below.

 Tank Penny's Firewall tactical bonus is locked even though I have the skill

The issue here is two-fold: most Heroes have to be evolved to the 2-star rating to utilize their tactical bonus, and some tactical bonuses require a specific type of Hero in the main slot. (Check out our full guide to evolution in Fortnite to get your Heroes where they need to be.)

You can still put any Hero you want in the tactical slot and you will get a bonus to F.O.R.T. skills -- you just don't get the tactical bonus ability if you don't meet those two prerequisites.

Unfortunately, this isn't spelled out very clearly anywhere in the text. I've confirmed this is the cause of the issue by evolving my Rescue Trooper Ramirez to star rating 2, at which point her tactical bonus went from locked to unlocked.

You can actually already tell whether a tactical ability will be available or not by inspecting that Hero on the same screen where you apply experience to level up. As you can see below, the 2-star Ramirez's tactical bonus has its own icon, while the 1-star Tank Penny's skill shows the locked icon.

Having any other issues with Fortnite we didn't cover here? Let us know in the comments section and we'll look for a solution! When you get the game working, be sure to check out our other Fortnite guides to get the most out of your play time:

Observer Guide: Solving the Room 104 Amir Puzzle to Escape the Infinite Hallway,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov-e57dd.jpg 5o5pe/observer-guide-solving-the-room-104-amir-puzzle-to-escape-the-infinite-hallway Tue, 08 Aug 2017 16:16:44 -0400 Ty Arthur

Following the low-key exploits of the mad painter from Layers Of Fear, Bloober Team returns with cyberpunk/neo-noir follow-up Observer -- refining the slow burn horror formula and throwing in some serious acting chops with none other than Rutger Hauer (Blade Runner).

The game will task you with solving a series of grisly murders in a run-down dystopian cityscape, using both tried-and-true detective methods and hacking into the minds of the deceased.

While a good deal of the game is straightforward and follows a clear path, there are a handful of puzzles that will take you from "head scratching" to "keyboard throwing".

The first example of such an enraging puzzle takes place in the run down apartment room 104 while searching through the memories of dead drug pusher Amir. While nearing the end of Amir's shattered memories, you'll find yourself running at random down any hallway hoping to reach the end of a puzzle in an infinite loop... but no matter where you go, you always return to the same room.

How to Solve the Infinite Hallway Puzzle in Observer

The hub of this puzzle is a central room featuring three televisions -- all showing the same video feed image. To advance through the puzzle, you need to change the images on the screen by following a specific hallway pattern.

If you see anything on the screens other than a door with trash cans next to it, that means you've accidentally stumbled through one of the correct patterns so far.

You can look for the appropriate section below and move forward from there, or instead just turn around and run through any random door to reset the puzzle to the trash can screen.

 The Infinite Loop Trash Can Start Image

To start this annoying infinite loop puzzle, first go through the hallway with the bed cots (with the open green cage door).

When you return to the main room, walk forward so you can see the shuttered wood door that won't open (in this room there should be a huge chunk of cables on the wall, a door to your right, and hall to your left).

While in this room with the locked door, go down the left hall and return to the main room.

 The Hallway With Cots

Now look at the monitors to find that the trash cans are missing in the video feed, even though you can still see the main room. Anytime you see a different image, it means you've unlocked the next section.

In the main room, start by facing the door where the trash cans are positioned in your field of view, then turn left and go through the door near the table with the checkerboard cloth and the TV.

Go through the door back into the main room, and you should notice the TV screens are changed again -- this time showing you a flickering light, meaning you need to go down that hallway with the light near the top of the wall.

To access this particular hallway, when facing the trash can door, turn right and go forward. There are two doors here, though – don't go forward, and instead turn right immediately after the light to go through that door. 

 The Door With Trash Cans

Check the TV screen again, and it will show you an electric panel on the wall. This door doesn't quite look like the image in the screen since it's not sparking, however, so it's hard to find it you don't know where to look.

When facing the trash cans, turn right and keep going forward instead of turning into the door with the light. Now look at the TV one last time to see an image of a police interrogation room.

After looking at the screen for a few moments, you are automatically transported to the next segment. After the voice segment, just wiggle back and forth with the movement keys to break free. From there, the segment returns to more of a straightforward experience that's easy to follow to the end.


That's all you need to know to solve the infuriating infinite hallway puzzle in Room 104. Stay tuned for more Observer guides coming soon -- and let us know in the comments if you'd like us to cover and particular segment!

The Long Dark Story Mode Guide: Episode 2 Supply Cache Locations,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/u/r/survival-game-long-dark-troubling-yet-beautiful-gem-wired-1e200.jpg lqtiz/the-long-dark-story-mode-guide-episode-2-supply-cache-locations Tue, 08 Aug 2017 13:44:13 -0400 Sergey_3847

The second of the two available episodes in The Long Dark's story contains a number of hidden supply caches that you don’t want to miss. Some of them are really easy to find, but others require a more intrinsic approach.

There are nine locations in total in Episode 2 that each have their own supply boxes with valuable items inside. If you want to find them all without too much hassle, this location guide will tell you how to find every supply cache in The Long Dark

If you're looking for the supply locations from the previous episode, check out our Episode 1 supply cache location guide for all the info you need. 

All Hidden Supply Cache Locations on Mystery Lake

Cache #1: Alan’s Cave

The note to this cache can be found on the table inside the office of the Carter Hydro Dam located between Mystery Lake and Pleasant Valley.

You need to follow the frozen river that starts at the Carter Hydro Dam and look for a cave near a clearing with a hunter’s blind. The supply box is inside that cave -- but be wary of the wolves in the area.

Cache #2: Clearcut

If you find the note inside one of the cabins on the Mystery Lake, then it will lead you right to the Clearcut. It is the location at the crossroads to the Forestry Lookout to the west, the road to the logging camp, and back to the train tracks to the east.

Look for an area with log piles, where you will see the supply box at the stump between the two large logs.

Cache #3: Forlorn Muskeg Entrance

If you can reach the Forestry Lookout between the Destroyed Lookout to the west and Derailment to the east, then you will find a note with location to this cache inside the tower.

The cache is hidden at the entrance of the Forlorn Muskeg after you move through the Rail Tunnel. You need to move towards the cliffs beginning from the last wagon.

At the base of the cliffs you should find an orange box with hidden supplies.

Cache #4: Broken Railroad

At the end of the Forlorn Muskeg railway, you should find a note at the wagons. As you leave the Forlorn Muskeg, follow the Broken Railroad all the way through to the east. At the end of the railway, turn right and go down to the frozen river.

Go up the river, and at the end of the way you will see the box on the right side of the bank between the rocks.

Cache #5: Hunting Lodge

The Hunting Lodge is located to the east from the Rail Tunnel. The note with the cache’s location is nailed to the entrance steps.

The lodge is surrounded by hills, and the one you’re looking for is located in front of the building. Go up the hill and look for a fallen tree. Look behind the tree and you will see the supply box.

Cache #6: Forlorn Muskeg Docks

At the opposite end of the Rail Tunnel, look out for a yellow wagon. There is a pickup truck nearby with a note inside indicating the location of this cache.

When you arrive at the Forlorn Muskeg, you need to look out for the dock with a boat at the lake. It is easy to see as the area is quite large and open.

On the opposite side of the lake from the docks you will see a stump. The supply box is hidden right behind it.

All Hidden Supply Cache Locations of The Forest Talkers

The Hunting Lodge keeps one more note with three locations of the Forest Talkers supply caches.

Cache #1: Maintenance Yard

The fence that surrounds the Maintenance Yard at the Broken Railroad has a gap through which you can squeeze onto the path that leads to the river.

Follow the cliffs to your right and soon you will arrive at the place with the dent in the ground. Inside the dent you will see a supply box.

Cache #2: Old Spence Family Homestead

At the entrance to the Forlorn Muskeg turn left and follow the path to the Old Spence Family Homestead.

On your way there you will find a cave. To the right of the cave you will see a rock, and behind it you will find another box with supplies.

Cache #3: Logging Camp

Nearby Clearcut on Mystery Lake you will find a number of blue trailers at the Logging Camp. Behind the trailers you will see a steep hill.

Go up the hill in the direction of the tower and look behind the rocks on your way there. The last supply box is hidden right there.


If you you need more help surviving the snowy wilds in this game, then check out the rest of our The Long Dark guides for more tips:

Dark And Light: Troubleshooting Errors and Known Bug Fixes,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/l/c/dlcov-3dce3.jpg swcpr/dark-and-light-troubleshooting-errors-and-known-bug-fixes Tue, 08 Aug 2017 09:23:12 -0400 Ty Arthur

If Ark left the non-dinosaur crowd feeling a little out in the cold and wishing for knights and dragons in a fantasy world instead, Dark And Light is the answer to that predicament.

It remains to be seen if Dark And Light will beat Ark's ludicrous Early Access time record -- but for now the game should firmly stay there, needing some drastic updates to deal with a horde of bugs, frame rate drops, and connection issues.

Sadly, the bulk of the known bugs in Dark And Light don't have fixes at the moment. The latest patch seems to have actually nerfed some of the servers further, with many players unable to connect at all or freezing at 99%. Some of the current issues, however, can be mitigated or removed if you don't mind getting creative.

Immortal Harvest Objects

This issue is scheduled to be fixed in a patch, but for now can be very frustrating: sometimes random objects like trees, grass, and even some animals never run out of health and can't be harvested.

There's a weird fix to this issue -- just die, in any way at all. Piss off some guards and wait to get stabbed, poke your head under a lake, hang out in a frozen tundra with no clothes, attack something way higher level than you, jump off a cliff, or whatever.

When you come back, the problem seems to be resolved for the vast majority of users. Its not a very elegant (or convenient) fix, but there you go, just kill yourself anytime it happens.

Changing Dark And Light Steam Launch Options

In this instance, the standard troubleshooting issue of verifying your Steam files isn't going to help much, since the problem is on the game and server side and not with anything on your computer.

There are a few tweaks you can make for better frame rates (and in some cases, load times), however. Open up Steam and right-click the Dark And Light entry in your library, then choose Properties.

On the General tab, click the Set Launch Options button, and then copy and paste these changes directly into the text box and click OK:

-lowmemory -high -sm4 -d3d10 -novsync -USEALLAVAILABLECORES -malloc=system +r_waterforcereflectentities 0 +r_shadowrendertotexture 0 +mat_hdr_level 0 +vt_maxPPF 16

If you have any issues after making the launch changes, you can just use these options for the bare bones fixes that may work better, depending on  your rig setup.

 -USEALLAVAILABLECORES -sm4 -d3d10 novsync 

Remember that these options will stay in effect until you remove them, so if you don't get any increase in frame rate or drop in desync issues, just return to the same screen and delete out all the launch options.

 Changing Steam Launch Options

Changing Dark And Light Graphics Settings

If the aforementioned launch options aren't helping, there are additional graphics and gameplay settings that can be manually tweaked in a file rather than from any in-game menus (thanks to Steam user Misfits | Vega for the tip).

To make these changes, open up the C:\ drive (or wherever your Steam games are stored) and navigate to the following folder: 

steamapps/common/Dark and Light/DNL/Saved/Config/WindowsNoEditor

Right-click the file named "GameUserSettings.ini" and open it with Notepad so you can alter its contents without any formatting being added.

Fully delete the contents of the file, then copy and paste in the commands listed below. Keep in mind that may want to make a copy of the file's original contents first in case you run into any unexpected issues. Otherwise, re-installing the game is always an option if these settings mess up anything.

Commands To Paste

bUseSimpleDistanceMovement=False bDisableMeleeCameraSwingAnims=False
LastUserConfirmedResolutionSizeX=1600 LastUserConfirmedResolutionSizeY=900


Found any other reliable fixes for the many Dark And Light bugs? Let us know in the comments section! If the game is working for you, be sure to check out our other Dark and Light guides to get the most out of your play time:

Fortnite Guide To Evolving Everything,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-2b307.jpg tn5xo/fortnite-guide-to-evolving-everything Mon, 07 Aug 2017 15:43:03 -0400 Ty Arthur

Is it possible? Has a multiplayer online game finally arrived to dethrone the likes of Overwatch and DOTA 2? There's no question that Fortnite is sure trying to be king of the crop, and all without even being on Steam!

Although the game does have a few too many elements to juggle, part of the appeal is actually in that complicated leveling and evolving structure, which will have you continuously improving everything from Schematics to Survivors -- and then giving away extras to the Collection book

With so many elements at play, you won't hit end game content and run out of things to do straight away, but getting started with evolving any of your randomly drawn cards is a bit of a chore without a proper tutorial. In this Fortnite evolution guide, we cover everything you need to know to evolve an card type at all.

Unlocking Evolution in Fortnite

The annoying thing about this system is that you will almost certainly have the prerequisites for evolving any given Hero (or anything else) long before you actually have access to the specific evolution skill needed.

Every single type of card -- Schematic, Survivor, Defender, Hero, etc. -- has its own evolution skill. For instance, to upgrade the four main types of Heroes to a two star evolution, you have to reach the end of their branches on the first skill tree

Each upgrade star rating above that first skill is found at the end of each branch for that respective class on the second, third, and fourth skill trees. Soldier, Outlander, Ninja, and Constructor all have their own separate skills -- meaning to upgrade all Heroes to max star rating, you will have to unlock 12 different skill nodes over time.

Making this even more complex is the fact that Defenders, Survivors, and trap/weapon Schematics all have their own nodes on the skill tree (separate from Heroes) to unlock before evolution can take place.

It's a huge, unwieldy mechanic with skills scattered all over the place -- but it also helps ensure you'll keep playing and always have a new goal to strive for reaching. (And if you need extra help, you can always check out our Fortnite skill tree guide to make sure you're navigating this part of the game properly.)

 Unlocking The 2 Star Soldier Evolution Skill Node

Evolving Heroes And Schematics

After unlocking the specific evolution skill node for any card, there are additional prerequisites and items that are used up in the evolution process. Either go to the Hero or Armory screen, click the specific card you want to evolve, and then choose "Upgrade/Inspect."

Underneath the "Level Up" option is the "View Evolution" button that brings up an evolving screen showing what skills, items, and experience points are necessary to upgrade the card.

A card -- no matter what type - first has to be at max level (for a 1 star evolution, this is usually level 10), then you need a specific number of items (such as a Training Manual or 4 Drops Of Rain), and enough experience to raise them in level again (for heroes, usually 1,500 Hero XP at the first evolution). 

After the first evolution to a two star rating, you need to unlock the next skill in the evolution line, then have even more items for the three star upgrade. Requirements get exponentially higher with each star rating of the evolution ladder. Second to third star, for instance, might require 3,750 Hero XP, 20 Drops Of Rain, 3 Training Manuals, and 7 Lightning In A Bottle.

Where do you get these evolution items? Most of them are given at specific ranks of upgrading the Collection book, but you can occasionally find them in reward llamas if you're lucky.

Here's something most players miss: after permanently giving a card to the Collection book, you can still level up -- and yes, even evolve -- those cards to higher star ratings. In fact, you will eventually be required to upgrade some of them to reach max Collection book level.

 Evolving Ramirez From 2 Star To 3 Star

Those are all the basics you need to know to use the Evolution system! Need help with the rest of the game? Check out our other Fortnite guides here:

How to Get Into Professional CS:GO,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/u/counter-strike-global-offensive-game-wallpaper-1920x1080-897-34ad4.jpg zma24/how-to-get-into-professional-csgo Mon, 07 Aug 2017 14:36:19 -0400 alex.csgoreview

Kids these days often dream of becoming professionals in fields that didn't exist just a few years ago, like vlogging, Instagram modeling, or eSports. They see lots of people finding success in these roles, and dream of all the glamour that comes with them -- lots of praise, inboxes and social media filled with admiration, and constant requests for selfies. 

But everyone who dreams of this lifestyle runs into the same issue. How do they get from where they are to where they want to be? This is especially true for passionate gamers who want to get involved in eSports. I see more and more comments under videos and blog posts where people are asking how they can get into professional leagues. 

If you're dreaming about pro tournaments and world fame, there are some practical steps you can take to achieve your goals. And in this article, I'll outline what you can do to come closer to making this dream a reality. Because CS:GO is my wheelhouse, all the advice below will be pointed towards becoming a professional CS:GO player. But these tips can be applied to other eSports-centric games that have professional leagues, as well. 

Tip 1: Start Early

This is a simple and rather obvious piece of advice. If you want to get pro-level good at a game, you have to start playing it early on so you have plenty of time to learn and move up through amateur and mid-level leagues. 

Most of the people who ask me about a pro gaming career range from 13 to 16 years old, which is a great thing for two reasons. First of all, they'll have a lot of time to practice and polish their skills, so eventually they can break the Internet (and the enemy) with their impressive rush matches by age 18-19. Secondly, it's nice to see that today's teenagers are taking a more practical approach toward choosing and chasing their dream careers. 

Though you can start later on and find some success, considering a gaming career and initially pursuing that is ideally done around the age of 13.

Tip 2: Dedicate a Lot of Play Time

If you want to git gud, you have to practice -- that means you'll need to spend a LOT of time playing. Though playing your favorite game may sound like a dream come true, young players rarely understand the pitfalls of pursuing a pro career. 

Let's look at an example -- a day in the life of Hùng Phạm, an eSports blogger and startup enthusiast. When he was playing CS:GO at the professional level, he would start playing with friends around 3 PM, played a few DM sessions, then a few games with random teams afterwards. According to the blogger, tournaments would usually start around 8 PM, and sometimes lasted until 1 AM that morning. This kind of schedule can be quite rough when you still have real life going on and need to be at school, college, or even work around 9 AM the next day.

So before you enthusiastically dive into the world of training and chasing your pro-gamer dreams, make sure you'll be able to withstand the demanding schedule without damaging other areas of your life -- or at least without doing so irreparably. 

Tip 3: Have Talent (And Luck)

Talent isn't something you can decide whether or not to have. Either you're good at delivering headshots with 100 FPS, or you're not. Practice can take you a long way, but having that natural gift for the game you're playing is important (though you'll still need a lot of practice to hone your skills). 

There are some pro players who don't put in as many hours, but earn more achievements than players who practice all day every day. So you need to find out if you have the natural skills suited to CS:GO or any other game before you dive headlong into trying to make it as a pro. 

But in addition to natural talent, you'll also need a bit of luck. Truly succeeding at something requires not only talent and consistent work, but also a few lucky breaks. In CS:GO (or any other eSport, really) you need to get lucky enough to play with the right people, find the right team, hit the right keys at critical moments, and have the right connections in the gaming world to make your own way on the eSports circuit.

Tip 4: Make Sure Your Life is In Order

We've talked about consistent practice, passion for your game of choice, and natural talent. Now let's have a more down-to-earth conversation. Before you decide to invest a chunk of your life into gaming, you need to at least have a basic understanding of the state of eSports in your country -- or even in your local region. 

The eSports scene is not the same from region to region. In some areas, it's a booming industry where players can reach near-celebrity status. In other areas, it's still an up-and-coming scene that's trying to find its place. 

If you're in an area (specifically NA and EU) where CS:GO players are celebrated like rock stars and earn five or six-digit wages, you'll have a much better chance at becoming a part of the professional circuit and making a living. However, if you are from a country where eSports are just starting to develop, it’s better to reconsider your choice or wait a couple of years.

Of course, eSports trends are shifting rapidly -- so keep an eye on how things progress and see if you find any opportunities to put yourself on the forefront of a burgeoning competitive scene. 

All in all, you should always consider your personal circumstances and the state of the world around you before dedicating yourself to an eSports career path. You should make sure that you have other things to fall back on in case your dream doesn't pan out. 

You can make a fair amount of money in the eSports circuit, but you need to ask yourself: "Will I be able to earn a living if I never make it to the pro league?" If you can't support yourself on eSports alone, you'll need to find a way to balance it with a different job.

It sounds rather gloomy, but it will help you avoid the sort of turmoil that other players have found themselves in while pursuing their competitive careers. Professional CS:GO player Tomáš 'oskar' Šťastný found himself in some tough times before he made it to a Major. He sank all the money he had into a powerful computer that would let him play the game at the best level possible, then encountered a number of obstacles in smaller tournaments and on other teams before he finally found his way into the higher levels of the pro circuit and made a name for himself. 

Tip 5: Learn Good Communication

CS:GO and other eSports are team games -- which means your overall performance relies heavily on the communication skills of everyone involved. So you need to have reliable and amiable communication skills if you want to work well enough with a team that you might have a shot at pro play. 

If you go into rage fits every time a teammate makes a mistake, or mock someone for failing, you're probably good enough to be an internet meme, but not good enough to be a pro CS:GO player. 

Years of playing and watching competitive CS:GO have shown me that the worst thing you can do in a game like that is feel entitled -- even if your skill level is markedly higher than that of your teammates. Poor communication will irritate even the calmest of players straight away, which won't make your experience any better and won't help you improve as a player. 

So if you want to pursue a professional eSports career, you have to hone your communication skills so that you can make good, clear calls that your entire team understands and is willing to listen to. Otherwise, you'll never make it out of the ranked grind and into the tournament circuit. 


There's a lot more advice I could give you about getting into professional CS:GO, but what I've said above covers the gist of what you really need to keep in mind when you consider this as a career path. I hope it helps you stay inspired about pursuing your passion, while helping you adopt a practical approach to the more mundane tasks you'll have to undertake to get there. 

Have these tips been helpful to you? What other advice do you have for aspiring eSports professionals? Taken any steps yourself to get onto a professional circuit? Leave your thoughts down in the comments! 

Injustice 2 Guide: Power Leveling Characters to 20 in Versus Mode,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/3/1/1/3111459-injustice-screenshot-deadshot-aquaman-1471368876-4dfc5.jpg aausu/injustice-2-guide-power-leveling-characters-to-20-in-versus-mode Mon, 07 Aug 2017 10:13:18 -0400 Zantallion

Injustice 2 is a blast to play, and the game is still growing. With Darkseid, Red Hood, and Sub-Zero already added as DLC -- and Starfire and Fighter Pack 2 right around the corner -- this year's premiere comics fighter keeps getting better.

But with all these new characters coming out, how are you meant to catch up on getting all the others maxed out at level 20? Don't worry, GameSkinny has got you covered. In this leveling guide for Injustice 2, we're going to tell you how to get your fighters to 20 without having to spend a single source crystal.

There are two ways to power-level your characters: by grinding through Endless Mode or by forging games in Versus mode. We've already talked about power-leveling and earning gear in Injustice 2's Endless Mode, so we'll talk about the second method in this short guide. This one requires players to be a bit more active -- but if you do it right, it'll end up being the faster way to level your characters.

How to Power Level Characters with Versus Mode in Injustice 2

For this method, you'll need two controllers. Head into Versus Mode and select two characters you want to level up, then hop into a quick match. Grab the controller of the character that's lower level and win the match by beating on the helpless P2 dummy.

Winning against a character of a higher level will earn you EXP faster than by beating one at the same level or lower, and the rematch button makes the time between matches shorter -- so overall this method ends up being a bit faster than just sending a bot into Endless.

If the characters end up at even levels, just fight with the one of your choosing until it's higher level, then switch to the other. Continue this process until you hit 20 for all the characters you want to level.

When using this method, make sure to equip any EXP-boosting gear pieces you have. Pieces that give you bonuses for perfect rounds are extra useful here, as you'll be fighting a motionless dummy -- so you're assured a perfect each time.


And there you have it! Another simple way to power up your favorite superheroes and supervillains in Injustice 2. With Starfire due to launch soon, now's the perfect time to grind those last few characters up to 20 before she adds another to your to-do list. Let us know how your grinding goes in the comments, and we'll keep you posted on more Injustice 2 content in the future.

Need more help with this DC fighter? Check out the rest of our Injustice 2 guides to make sure you always come out on top: 

Citadel: Forged with Fire - Level 1~20 Beginner's Tips Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/b/e/g/beginnersguideheader-823e7.jpg 3cjdq/citadel-forged-with-fire-level-120-beginners-tips-guide Sat, 05 Aug 2017 15:42:47 -0400 Joseph Rowe

Welcome to the wizarding world of Harry Potter Citadel: Forged with Fire! Before you tame a dragon to fly around the skies with, you've got to pick up some sticks and kill some orcs. This beginner's guide will show you the way.

Getting Started

First things first, you'll have to choose a server. If you want to level up faster or play in an easier way, look for the 2-10x style servers. These servers give you bonus EXP, attribute points, knowledge points, and/or harvested resources. If you're looking for just a vanilla experience, look for a server with a relatively normal sounding name without a 2-10x marker.

You can choose a PvP server in Citadel: Forged with Fire if you want, but keep in mind that this guide is intended for starting out on a PvE one.

After that, you will have to create a character. After joining or creating your own server, you will be brought to this menu. You can choose your gender, one of four different faces, one of four different hairstyles, and the color for your skin, hair, nails, and eyes. Give yourself a proper magic-y name like Merlin, Morrigan, or Phillip. 

After that, you'll be given the choice of starting off in one of three different areas. I go with Raincourt because it's near a coast with easy access to iron and gold ore, but you can still find those in mountains or on other coast near the other starting zones.

Shortly after spawning, check your keyboard configurations and make sure you know your bindings in Forged with Fire. It's also helpful to make sure you know where your melee button is for when you need to attack enemies close up when you're out of mana. You can make the game easier for yourself by going to the game tab in the options section and enabling the equip on auto equip feature.

Magical Gathering

After doing all the above, you're finally ready to play. Look around you for resources on the ground. Your first batch of resources in Citadel: Forged with Fire will be Wood, Yellow Pine, Stone, and Rune Crystals. These will be used for building your structures, crafting weapons and armor, brewing potions, etc. You'll also find Ghost Orchids, Mushrooms, and Crowberries, which can be consumed to restore mana and health. They're also used in creating mana and health vials which will be important later on.

Once you hit level 5, you can unlock the extract spell, which allows you to take resources like wood from trees, stone and ores from different kinds of rocks, for 1.0 mana per second. This is a very, very useful and time-saving spell to have, so be sure to get it as soon as you can.

Progression - Primary Attributes

If you couldn't tell by my previous mention of it, leveling up is a part of Citadel: Forged with Fire. You level up in the game by collecting resources, exploring new areas, killing enemies, crafting items, and building structures. When you level up, you gain attribute points and knowledge points.

Attribute points go towards increasing your health, mana, damage, or storage capacity. Depending on the kind of server you're on, you'll get one or more points per level. When you get extra points, you have more freedom when spending them, but if you're playing on a no bonus attribute point server, you'll want to only spend as much on storage as is absolutely necessary because health, mana, and damage will take priority. 

Progression - Knowledge

Knowledge points go towards recipes for crafting and structures as well as unlocking spells. Each node, save for the Amnesia Elixir under Utility, has at least one more node underneath it. They all have level requirements. For example, you can create the most basic versions of the four weapons, a couple pieces of cloth armor, a health and mana vial, wooden floors, walls, and doors, a throne, one combat spell, and four other spells for each weapon type. 

In Citadel: Forged with Fire, each piece of knowledge has its on point requirement. For example, the combat spell Mana Blast costs only 1 point to unlock but Lightning Bolts, the level 10 combat spell, takes 4 points. The most expensive unlock is the Dark Flight flying essence; it costs 12 points.

When playing on a vanilla server with limited points, you have to plan ahead. If it's possible, it's best to work with other people. One wizard can focus on one type of combat or crafting structure (which I'll address later) while another takes what that wizard didn't. One ally can focus on wands, pump his mana up, and brew potions -- while another one focuses on axes, pumps her health up, and forges armor. Trading resources, weapons, armor, etc. with each other is an efficient way to play the game without spreading your focus too thin. This is important in PvP and in higher level PvE situations.

The picture below is a progression I followed in a recent game of Forged with Fire. This is at level 22. You don't have to follow this build, but it is an example of a solo one where I focused on the staff as my main source of damage.

Starter Weapons and Armor

You are free to choose your first weapon, but I have a preference for staff and axe so that's what I'll suggest.

In order to build a Staff of the Forest in Forged with Fire, you'll need: 1 Rune Crystal and 6 pieces of Wood. You should unlock the Fireball spell when you can to go along with this weapon. This will let you do some decent damage to enemies from afar. When they get in close, you can try to melee them with your staff but it might break so be warned.

To build a Stone Head Axe, you'll need 4 pieces of Wood and 2 Stones. I usually just use this as an off-hand weapon to melee with when I very first start out so take Terrene Smash if you so desire, but it's not necessary.

For a Woodland Cloth Hat and a Woodland Cloth Tunic, you'll need 2 pieces of Cloth and 6 pieces of Cloth respectively. This will be your first armor set. It's quite wizard-y.

As you level up in Forged with Fire, you'll be able to unlock improved versions of these weapons as well as new kinds of armor. I recommend sticking with the same style of weapon you picked at the beginning in order to conserve knowledge points. For example, if you went staff, once you hit 10, you can build the Deathweaver -- and at 20, you can build Gorthrax's Ramshead. You have more freedom in what kind of armor you wear. You'll also be able to gain better armor as you loot enemies and treasure chests.

Let the Base Drop

You can access your structure building menu by pressing B if your keys are set to the default bindings. This will pull up a menu (pictured below) that allows you to choose between structures of different types. Under Wood, you'll find what you've unlocked for wooden structures, like doors and walls. For magic, you'll find your throne, the forge, the workbench, etc.

Find yourself an open area to build your structure. Depending on the surrounding ground, your floors might need support -- so try and look for an area that is flat to save resources. You'll need to build some floors. I find a 3x3 is okay for starting out, but 3x5 or more will eventually be needed to fit your chest, throne, etc. if you go for all of them. You must place your throne in your house to make sure it doesn't disappear. As of right now, you can only have one throne out at a time.

Your base will be where the majority of your crafting is done. The picture above with the built house features one I made in the aforementioned solo play. I had a throne, forge, workbench, tailoring bench, storage chest, and respawn stone. I recommend this for your first solo playthrough, though you don't need to have all three of the crafting tables if you're playing in a group.

You'll need a Forge to craft certain weapons, armors, and all the jewelry. You'll need a Tailoring Bench to create certain crafting materials like leather and refined cloth, as well as to craft certain armors like your level 5 set with Soloman's Hat, Initiate's Robe, and Footwraps. The Workbench is used for certain weapons and armors as well as brooms, saddles, and Soul Binding Scrolls for taming. You'll need a Conjuring Cauldron to brew vials for health, mana, and more.

Mana and Health Regeneration

Depending on the server you're on, mana is scarcer than you'd think. The regeneration rates in Citadel: Forged with Fire are pretty low so you'll want to craft as many health and mana vials as you can.

You can build health and mana vials starting at level 1. Health vials require 1 Rune Crystal, 3 Crowberries, and 1 Mushroom. Mana vials require 1 Rune Crystal and 2 Ghost Orchids. At level 10, you can unlock potent health and mana vials. These require a cauldron, so don't get them unless you have one of those already. They're stronger versions of the previous vials yet still require the same type and number of ingredients. 

You can also craft a Primitive Magic Ring for an extra +1 to your mana regen and a Magic Necklace for the same in health regen. A Primitive Magic Ring requires 2 Iron Bars, 1 Amethyst Crystal, and 3 Rune Crystals. A Magic Necklace requires 2 Iron Bars and 1 Precious Stone.

Iron Bars are found on enemy corpses or smelted from Iron Ore found on the black rocks that line coastlines and lay on the sides of mountains. Precious Stone can be found in similar rocks that are in caverns or on certain mountain-y areas. Amethyst Crystals can be found at giant geodes located in more dangerous areas you're not ready for. You can also craft one under your Inventory recipes with 2 Precious Stones and 1 Light Essence (found on peaceful creatures.) 

Monster Hunter

After the exp from resource gathering, base-building, and exploring becomes negligible, it's time to start slaying some beasts to level!

Always check an enemy's level before engaging in Citadel: Forged with Fire. When you're level 5, it's dangerous to do combat with a Level 20 Giant, but not too scary fighting a level 3 Boar. Unless, of course, you have the pacifist enemy bug where none of your foes attack you. If that's the case, then as long as you're not in the aura around them that does damage to your character, you can take down higher level monsters to level faster. It's not quite as fun, but it's good for trying out spells, testing damage, etc.

You'll be able to find Enemy Camps to clear as well. They are marked with a red sword on your map. These are areas where you'll find groups of enemies. Early on, this is likely to be an encampment of Orcs like shown above (though on this server for some reason, all my spells were on constant cooldown so I died shortly after this screenshot). Normally, there's also a treasure chest nearby, so be sure to look for one of those. It might save you some resources or knowledge points, because they sometimes contain resources, armor, weapons, and potions.

Once you get some more levels under your belt, you can explore caverns, which are also marked on your map. These are where you'll find rarer materials like Precious Stone. They're guarded, of course, by stronger enemies than what you're likely to find outside. These are best tackled with a group of other players.


Travel and Exploration

Traveling by foot is a pain in the butt in Forged with Fire, but thankfully by level 10 you'll be able to craft a Traveler's Broomstick to let you fly around much faster. One of the downsides to this is that it takes mana, of course, unless you're on a server with the mana cost removed. This is where your mana potions will come in handy. You'll need them to ensure you don't fall to your death while up in the air on your broom.

Another downside is that it prevents you from having any other trinkets equipped -- because apparently in this universe, you can't wear a ring or a necklace at the same time.

In order to create a Traveler's Broomstick, you'll need a Workbench and 10 pieces of Wood, 2 pieces of Leather, and 1 Faery Dust. I recommend doing this as soon as you hit 10. You can get Faery Dust from faerie and sprite enemies.

One of the most convenient features of Citadel: Forged with Fire is fast travel. There are a number of towers spread throughout the map that you can use to travel between them. In the map picture above, the player icon is where the closest fast travel tower is. These are very easy to unlock on a no broom mana restriction server so if you're on one of them, fly around and unlock as many fast travel towers as you can as early as possible. This will save you some travel time later on.

You can also try and build your base close to a travel tower if it's safe to do so. This is especially useful as you progress in the game since you'll need rarer resources from deeper into the map. You can use the towers to head back to your base shortly for dropping off resources when you're encumbered. 


You unlock the spell to tame creatures called Pacify at level 10 in Forged with Fire. This is useful, as it'll not only give you a 4-hour long pet that follows you around, but it also lets you give them commands. You can give orders like those shown above, as well as mount certain creatures like horses, elk, and dragons. The storage function is great for when you are on a resource run and get encumbered, but are too far from your home to get to your chest.

You can extend the duration by anywhere from 4 hours with soul binding scroll I (level 15 requirement) to 14 days with soul binding scroll VI (level 60 requirement.) This is of the utmost importance, as you're likely to bond with your pet. I had a wonderful elk named Goofus who carried my burdens, let me ride him, was a loyal friend, and died valiantly defending me from a group of orcs. Rest in peace, Goofus.

Hitting Level 20

If you followed my advice above for building your base, crafting your weapons, etc., you're likely to get somewhere in your teens just from harvesting, crafting, exploring, and killing the handful of monsters you run into. After that, though, you will have to hunt monsters more. As mentioned above, I recommend going for the camps. Keep doing this until you hit 20 in Forged with Fire.

If you hit 20 and are using the staff, I have a specific recommendation for you. The third tier of the staff is Gorthrax's Ramshead, which requires 11 Rune Crystals, 3 Bones (found on demons and the like), 6 pieces of Wood, and 1 Eagle Feather. An Eagle Feather is something you likely won't have come across at this point, as it drops from powerful Giant Eagles.

If you go to the east of Raveneye Lake, there is a cave marked on the map above called Yako Bokin's Cave. Outside of the cave is a camp of undead enemies. Inside of it is a bear and two Giant Eagles that are around level 20. If you maintain the right distance and you're lucky, you can attack the first Giant Eagle you see without it aggroing. Be careful, though, as it will easily kill you if you try to engage it up close and aren't prepared. It's doable solo, but if you can, I recommend grouping up for this.

After getting an Eagle's Feather from one of the Giant Eagles, head back to your base and forge your new level 20 weapon. You can see how much you've progressed in a few hours by flying back to the starter areas and trying out your higher level spells and weapons on weaker enemies. It's nuts to see how many enemies you can one  and two shot at this point.


If you follow the beginner's guide above, you'll have nothing but smooth sailing -- assuming the game doesn't bug out a ton for you, an issue I address thoroughly in my Citadel: Forged with Fire review. If there's anything missing from the guide that you think I should add in, something that I didn't explain in enough detail, or anything else, leave a comment below! Either way, happy wizarding!

Need more help with the game? Check out the rest of our Forged with Fire guides to get all the information you need!

Fortnite Guide To Stats And Survivor Squads,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/f/o/r/fortcov-273ce.jpg d8hx0/fortnite-guide-to-stats-and-survivor-squads Sat, 05 Aug 2017 15:09:26 -0400 Ty Arthur

There's co-op base building and zombie slaying shenanigans to be had in spades with the Early Access Fortnite, once you get done navigating through the confusing menu and its overly complicated layout.

One of the least explained elements of the game revolves around Hero stats and how they interact with Squads. Many players have been left confused because Defender Squads, Hero Squads, Survivor Squads, and Expedition Squads all serve different functions and don't have a clear tutorial.

Some of those Squad types will show up on a map with you, while others provide your Hero with stat bonuses or are unavailable for a set amount of time before returning with resources and crafting materials. In this Fortnite guide, we'll cover each type of Squad and how they work. 

Fortnite Stats

Your Heros' base stats are intimately tied into Squads, but Squads aren't the only way to raise stats, with many of the skill tree nodes bumping up stats as well. Not surprisingly, the main stats spell out F.O.R.T. -- and they have the following effects:

  • Fortitude: Health and health regeneration go up by 1% for each point
  • Offense: Damage (ranged and melee) goes up by 1% for each point
  • Resistance: Hero shield and shield regen rate goes up by 1% for each point
  • Tech: Efficiency of traps, gadgets, abilities, and healing pads goes up by 1% for each point

Pay attention to the team version of these bonuses in the skill tree and Squad screens, because these provide the bonus to your hero and all the other heroes in a match.

Building stats aren't as front-andg-center as the main four stats, but they can be just as important because they affect the max health of your structures, the speed at which structures are built, and how well the abilities of the Constructor class work.

Fortnite Squads

There are four main types of Squads, and they aren't all located in the Squads screen. The first type is actually found on the Heroes screen instead and gives your main Hero bonuses to his or her stats. 

Hero Squad

Popping Heroes into the Hero Squad Bonus slots doesn't bring them onto a map with you at all -- you don't get to actually control extra Heroes while defending a Storm Shield or going on quest. Instead, the level and evolution of whatever Hero you slot there will provide a bonus to F.O.R.T. stats, as well as giving a specific new ability like Ammo Recovery or Firewall.

You can tell what bonuses are available by looking at the icon directly underneath the Hero star rating. The icon on the lower left is the support bonus slot, while icon on the lower right is the tactical bonus slot. Heroes who are out on Expeditions aren't available to be used in the Squad bonus slots.

 Hero Squads and bonuses

Survivor Squads

Next up are Survivor Squads, which serve a similar role to Hero Bonus Squads, but instead of Heroes they use all those Survivors you get in reward llamas. The higher the level, rarity, and evolution star rating of a Survivor, the bigger a bonus to your F.O.R.T. stats.

While the different types of Survivor Squads seem to indicate they would do things on the map -- EMT, Fire Team Alpha, Corps Of Engineering, Scouting Party, etc. -- they all just serve the same purpose of stat bonuses. Each individual slot within those various Survivor Squads is unlocked over time on the skill tree.

There's another element to take into account when choosing Survivors: personality. If all the Survivors on a Squad have the same personality trait (competitive, cooperative, adventurous, dreamer, analytical, curious, and dependable) you get a big boost to the stat bonuses.

 Putting a cooperative legendary Survivor in the Fire Team Alpha Squad

Defender Squads

Unlike all the other varieties of Squads, these characters do actually appear on maps with you, although you don't control them directly.

Instead, you have to set down a Defender Pad on any floor piece you've built and then choose one of your selected Defenders to be an A.I. ally.  Don't forget -- you have to actually craft a weapon and drop it next to the Defender pad for the Defender to pick it up.

Whichever character you pick for the Defender squad uses your ammo (so make sure to craft plenty ahead of time), and they will automatically give your gun or melee weapon back at the end of the mission.

Before you upgrade or evolve your Defenders, they will have very low accuracy, so it's a good idea to give them single shot weapons rather than automatic machine guns.

 Picking Defenders for the Homebase Storm Shield

Expedition Squads

These become absolutely critical later in the game, as you won't find enough crafting parts in any given mission to keep up with the rate of weapon decay and the absurd amount of ammo you chew through as the waves get bigger.

There are three types of Expedition Squads: land, sea, and air, which all have to be unlocked on the skill tree node and can be expanded with extra slots for more characters in the research tiers.

Any given Expedition requires a Hero, and then if you've unlocked more slots additional characters can be added. Expeditions have a base success percentage based around the power level of the Expedition Squad -- the higher the power of the Heroes, the better.

Keep in mind that Expeditions take real world time, and while Heroes are tied up on an Expedition, they can't be used in quests or placed in the Hero Squad slots.

 Starting an Expedition with a 52% chance of success

Those are all the basics you need to know to use the Squad system! Need help with the rest of the game? Check out our other Fortnite guides here:

The Long Dark Story Mode Guide: Supply Cache and Deposit Box Keys Locations,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/l/o/n/long-dark-000-launch-trailer-youtube-68f47.jpg 04yvc/the-long-dark-story-mode-guide-supply-cache-and-deposit-box-keys-locations Fri, 04 Aug 2017 10:56:49 -0400 Sergey_3847

The new Story mode for The Long Dark contains many secrets that you can uncover by speaking to Grey Mother, or if you simply pay attention to all the details and check every hidden area for the clues. But if you want to quickly move through the chapters without wasting too much time, then follow the instructions below on how to find all the hidden items.

This guide will help you deal with Grey Mother and earn her trust, uncover all the secret caches in Milton, and locate all the keys to the deposit boxes scattered around the map.

How to Earn Grey Mother's Trust in The Long Dark

As soon as you reach the Town of Milton in the first episode you will need to go up the first hill to the left, where a big house accommodates an old blind lady called Grey Mother. She will give you many quests and reveal a ton of important information -- if you can earn her trust, which is a new game mechanic.

The best way to make Grey Mother trust you is to supply her with rabbit skins. One rabbit skin will earn you 50 points of trust that can be exchanged for a piece of information. If you have no patience for chasing rabbits, then you can use bandages and cloth that each give 5 and 2 points of trust respectively.

In any case, below you will find the breakdown of information you can get from Grey Mother by using the trust mechanic:

  • 25 Trust: Milton Township related information
  • 50 Trust: Tips on how to maintain a blade tool
  • 75 Trust: Crash-landing related information
  • 125 Trust: Tips on how to unlock the hidden supplies
  • 175 Trust: The Distress Pistol location
  • 225 Trust: Unlock the rabbit skin gloves blueprint
  • 375 Trust: A pair of good hiking shoes

All Hidden Supply Cache Locations in Milton

If you don’t want to deal with Grey Mother and do quests for her, then just follow the tips listed below to find all the hidden supply caches.

Cache #1: At the Church

Before you arrive at Milton you will stumble upon a St. Christopher’s church. There is a fallen tree behind the building, where you will see a box on the ground.

Inside the box you will find a small bottle of lantern fuel, an Emergency Stim (a steroid injection), a basic sewing kit that can be used for fixing clothes, a piece of cloth, and an MRE.

Cache #2: In the Cave

The cave with the next cache can be located on your way to the Tower. Instead of going forward, just turn left and go all the way down the path into the dark cave.

At the end of the cave you will see a pile of rocks -- that’s your cache. Open it up and loot a pack of MRE, water purification pills, wool ear wrap, and a flare.

Cache #3: In the Miller’s House

The Miller’s house is the last house in Milton that is also the most destroyed one. Behind the house you will find another one of those orange boxes.

Inside the cache you will get a bottle of antibiotics, an antiseptic, an energy bar, and some painkillers.

All Deposit Box Keys Locations in Milton

There are four keys to deposit boxes in total in Milton. Each box contains supplies that are of great value in The Long Dark, so take your time and find them all.

Bank Deposit Box Key #7

When walking around Milton you will notice a blue car standing near the banker's house. Now look across the road and you will see another smaller house. Walk inside and look under the bed for a plastic container. The key you’re looking for is right there.

If you go to the Bank of Milton, you can now open deposit box #7. Inside the box you will find a bundle of cash, and a flare shell for your Distress pistol.

Bank Deposit Box Key #13

The next key is hidden inside a backpack that can be found on a corpse that got stranded on the bank of a frozen river that flows under the smaller wooden bridge at the farm.

When you search the body you will find a few more supplies that you can take. Then, go to the bank and open deposit box #13 that contains a ragged balaclava, a book, a pair of ragged ski gloves, and a stack of papers.

Bank Deposit Box Key #15

This key is hidden inside an urn that stands atop a fireplace on the Paradise Maedows Farm located in the western part of the town. But it can be obtained only by speaking to Grey Mother first, so there is no way around it.

This particular deposit box will have an item that has been stolen from Grey Mother, which is a part of a quest that you must do for her.

Bank Deposit Box Key #20

Go to the gas station and find a blue pickup truck at the back. Open the door and sit on the passenger’s seat. You will find the key on the floor right there.

The deposit box #20 holds a magnifying lens, and a bundle of cash. Not much, but the lens can be used to make fire during day time, which can save you life if you suddenly find yourself out of fuel.


Looking for some more The Long Dark guides to help you through this game? Check them all out right here:

Dark And Light Guide: Keyboard Shortcuts and Basic Tips,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-8f4e4.jpg td8cj/dark-and-light-guide-keyboard-shortcuts-and-basic-tips Fri, 04 Aug 2017 09:26:36 -0400 Ty Arthur

Offering the Ark survival experience with a stronger fantasy flavor, Dark And Light is difficult for new players to get into without some serious knowledge before hand of what to craft and how to play.

Due to major lag problems, FPS drops, and constant desync in Early Access, keyboard shortcuts can be a life saver. The less often you have to pull up menus to scroll through, the better.

Below we've listed out all the basic beginner info you need to know to get started with this survival sim. Want to get into the more advance topics? Check out our other Dark and Light guides here:

Dark And Light Keyboard Shortcuts

Some of the standard shortcuts aren't what long time PC gamers will be used to, and you'll need to know how to quickly order around your tamed creatures without highlighting them and pulling up a sub-menu. Here are the most helpful shortcuts (and don't forget you can re-bind them):

  • R - Reload (also Open Container / Access Object when highlighted)
  • Q - Holster
  • C - Radial Belt Menu
  • Right Shift - Sprint
  • G - Drag Body
  • Control - Crouch 
  • Alt - Swap Hotbar Belt
  • A - Transfer Item
  • D - Drop Item (for many items at once, hover over the item in the inventory)
  • ' - Mount Follow
  • L - Mount Move
  • , - Mount Stay
  • J - Mount Passive
  • K - Mount Passive
  • H - Mount Attack
  • DEL - Remove On Screen HUD
  • END - Switch Camera
  • Mouse 3 - Center Camera On Player
  • O - Quests
  • P - House Info
  • U - Skills
  • \ - Toggle Auto Hide Chat Box

Dark And Light Basic Harvesting / Building Strategies

When first getting started, its important to construct a thatch hut with a door in a defensible position, preferably near a city. Eventually you will want to upgrade to better structure types. Remember that when you log out, your character and tamed creatures are still there -- and yes, you can be killed and looted while logged out. Griefing is a problem, and you need to find ways to protect yourself.

Always be hidden somewhere first before logging out -- like inside your house behind the closed door (although this isn't completely safe, since other players can destroy your buildings). Note that if your structure is missing parts when you log in, usually doors, they haven't actually disappeared, the textures just aren't loading. It's a known bug being worked on at the moment.

 Building A Home Base

Besides building a structure, you need to stay on top of hunger and thirst. Berry Jam (made with berries and grass) is a good early option for managing thirst and hunger, but it spoils quickly, so only craft it as needed rather than making several ahead of time. To keep objects, especially meat, from spoiling, get yourself a larder box (although note that the in-game text is wrong, you use Sulphur Powder for the box, not Silica Powder).

Finally, always search a corpse for extra loot before harvesting. Below we've listed out what you should focus on harvesting in the early stages of the game and with which implement.

Use your bare hands to harvest:
  • Grass from grass
  • Straw, magic shards, and twine from bushes, flowers, and trees
Use an axe to harvest:
  • Wood and apples from trees
  • Stone, sulfur ore, and straw from rocks and mineral veins
  • Meat, bones, and hide from corpses
Use a pickaxe to harvest:
  • Twine from trees
  • Hay from bushes
  • Sulfur from rocks
  • Gold from city barrels
  • Elemental cores from elemental corpses
Use a sword to harvest:
  • Shards, berries, flowers, and hay from bushes
  • Meat from corpses
Use a scythe to harvest:
  • Fur from animal corpses
  • Seeds from bushes

 Harvesting From Rock

From there its time to explore the world and learn how to craft and tame along the way! Have any other beginner's Dark And Light tips and tricks that new players should know? Sound off in the comments section below!

How to Open Treasure Pods in Slime Rancher,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/l/i/slime-b2aee.jpg 6soeh/how-to-open-treasure-pods-in-slime-rancher Thu, 03 Aug 2017 18:15:14 -0400 Ty Arthur

After gaining a cult following in Steam Early Access, the adorable physics based game Slime Rancher has not only hit consoles, but is now this month's first free Xbox One title in the Games With Gold program.

If you haven't started building your own sprawling slime ranch and battling off harmful Tarr invasions yet, now is the time! Finding rare plorts is the main way of getting Newbucks and upgrading various aspects of your ranch -- but there's more than just plorts to be harvested across the game's map.

While exploring all the nooks and crannies of the Far, Far Ranch, you'll come across dozens of tantalizing treasure pods hidden just off the beaten path. None of these pods open on their own however, and sadly there aren't any magic keys lying around. So it will take a little more effort to crack these pods filled with goodies!

Slime Rancher Treasure Crackers

To open the various green, blue, and purple treasure pods scattered around the game map, you need a corresponding treasure cracker keyed to each of those three tiers of pods.

All three types of treasure crackers don't become available until after unlocking The Lab (for 10,000 Newbucks), building any Extractor, and then allowing it to run a full cycle.

After your first Extractor runs its cycle, you can buy the initial treasure cracker MKI for $4,500 Newbucks, which opens any of the standard green pods you come across in the Ancient Ruins, Dry Reef, Indigo Quarry, and Moss Blanket areas.

The upgraded treasure cracker MKII costs $9,000 Newbucks and is available after buying the previous model and building 35 gadgets in The Lab. With this model added to your Vacpack upgrades, you can open any of the blue treasure pods found in the previously mentioned areas and the Glass Desert.

To unlock all the final purple pods, you need to buy the treasure cracker MKIII for $25,000 Newbucks after building 100 gadgets in The Lab. These pods are found in every area of the game, but tend to be a bit more hidden or in out-the-way areas on islands.

Previous updates to the game seemed to tie Extractor cycles to unlocking the second two treasure cracker models, but that no longer appears to be the case in the full release version -- all you need to do is buy gadgets and have the requisite number of Newbucks.

  Buying the Treasure Cracker MKI

Slime Rancher Treasure Pod Rewards And Locations

So what exactly do you get with your fancy new MKI, II, or III treasure crackers added to the Vacpack gun?

Slime Rancher treasure pods contain various slime science blueprints, random resources, decorations for your ranch, or occasionally coveted golden plorts for a big Newbucks boost. 

There are specific numbers of each type of treasure pod, all scattered across the game in the following numbers and locations:

19 Green Treasure Pods
  • Ancient Ruins: 2 pods
  • Dry Reef: 7 pods
  • Indigo Quarry: 4 pods
  • Moss Blanket: 6 pods
 29 Blue Treasure Pods
  • Ancient Ruins: 6 pods
  • Dry Reef: 6 pods
  • Indigo Quarry: 6 pods
  • Moss Blanket: 4 pods
  • Glass Desert: 7 pods
37 Purple Treasure Pods
  • Ancient Ruins: 6 pods
  • Dry Reef: 2 pods
  • Indigo Quarry: 6 pods
  • Moss Blanket: 7 pods
  • Glass Desert: 16 pods

More updates are still slated to land for Slime Rancher in the future, so expect more pods to arrive, as well as the possibility of a fourth golden tier with a rumored new treasure cracker!

Have you found any other treasure pods we missed? Let us know in the comments section below! If you need more help with this cutesy but addictive game, be sure to check out all our Slime Rancher guides for more tips and tricks:

How to Unlock Hunted Outfit in Dying Light,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-9fd2a.jpg 4q0xa/how-to-unlock-hunted-outfit-in-dying-light Thu, 03 Aug 2017 11:36:07 -0400 Sergey_3847

Besides the new types of enemies and a brand new military rifle, the latest content drop for Dying Light introduced a new character outfit -- the Hunted Outfit. It is similar to the Urban Explorer Outfit, so if you like that style, then you should get this one as well.

However, getting the new outfit is not that easy. It will take you some time before you can put it on your character. But if you're having trouble, just follow the steps listed below, and you will have it for sure.

How to Get Hunted Outfit in Dying Light

Step 1: Collect Requisition Packs

First, you need to get to the Old Town from the slums using the sewers system. Then, head straight to the north-western part of the town where the Quartermaster is located. Go up the stairs and approach the bounty board.

Among all the bounties in the selector choose the special one -- Knowing Your Enemy. As a reward it will indicate the Hunted Outfit, which is the one you’re looking for. Accept the bounty and finish the given task of collecting 50 Requisition Packs.

The only way to get these packs is to kill and loot the bodies of the new type of human enemies that have been introduced in the latest DLC. They are extremely strong, so to defeat them you'll need a weapon like the Harran Rifle.

Step 2: Claim Your Hunted Outfit

Now your job is to find the enemies in the north-eastern part of the Old Town. You will see them on the roofs of the buildings and inside the buildings. They wear black outfits; they are well-armed and extremely dangerous.

Each enemy will drop one pack, so you need to kill 50 of them to get all the required packs. If you can’t find enough enemies, just return later and they will respawn. The whole thing should take you about three to four hours.

Finally, when you have all the packs on you, go back to the Quartermaster and claim your Hunted Outfit.


That wraps up this guide! Enjoy your new outfit. If you need further help with the game, check out our other Dying Light guides at GameSkinny for even more tips and how-tos:

Fable Fortune Class Tier List,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-49300.jpg urjnw/fable-fortune-class-tier-list Thu, 03 Aug 2017 10:06:25 -0400 Ty Arthur

Albion's venture into CCGs with Fable Fortune still has some balancing to be done in Early Access, so there are clear winners and losers in the class categories -- even for those who haven't mastered deck building and working around the meta yet. Below we rank each class from best to worst.

How did we come up with these rankings? Each class was examined based on their class ability, class-specific cards, how those cards interact with the neutral cards, and how quickly they can complete quests to upgrade morality.

Before anyone loses their minds and goes all keyboard warrior on the rankings: clearly there's some wiggle room based on personal experience and skill level. A well constructed Knight deck can potentially win against a poorly constructed Shapeshifter deck, especially if you get unlucky on the card draws. But in general terms, these are the best and worst classes for overall win ratio.

Keep in mind this is based on the current status of the game in Early Access -- changes are almost certain to be made before the game goes F2P in full release. Want help with building specific decks? Be sure to check out our other Fable Fortune guides for more tips:

Best Class in Fable Fortune: Shapeshifter

Hands down, there is not a better Fable Fortune class at the moment than the Shapeshifter. Even a basic deck with no thought or strategy can annihilate the competition.

Blooded Balverine is quite powerful for a 3-gold card that can be played the first turn and heals itself whenever destroying an enemy creature, while the upgraded 5 cost Predatory Balverine pumps its strength in addition to its health.

If you like to always have tons of options available, a combo of Wild Rend (or even just the straight Shapeshifter class ability) + Blood Frenzy will see your hand flooded with cards.

The Shapeshifter doesn't lack for spot removal or board clearing either. Ambush lets you deal 4 damage to any enemy -- including directly at the opponent -- for 3 gold. Compare that to the Knight's Puncture card, which can only hit an enemy creature for the same gold cost. Surge Of Fangs is also one of the game's best board clearing cards.

Snarling Lunge is just absurd. For 3 gold (meaning it can be played on absolutely any turn, since you start with 3 gold) you deal 4 damage direct to the opponent and heal yourself 4 health. That's 8 health for 3 gold -- and if you're smart, you're doing that twice per match. Couple that with the Evil power Ferocious Rend, and it doesn't really matter how much damage the opponent gets through.

By building a Balverine deck bolstered with Neutral Hobbes or Bandits, it's incredibly easy to get into a rhythm of remove, heal, damage, remove, heal, damage...and cruise to the win.

 Wanna win? This is your lady right here.

Second-Tier Class: Gravedigger

The Gravedigger is really the best foil to the top tier Shapeshifter decks at the moment, although you're still going to have to play well and will likely be low on health when the win finally arrives.

Requiring a bit more forethought and skill, Gravedigger is all about going against your instincts and killing your own creatures to cause cascading waves of new and bigger creatures to appear.

If you are killing your own creatures each round (and you should be), two Profane Magicians at a measly 2 gold a piece can be a sudden win condition in the late game. If you get lucky and combo that with Cullis Master's ability to return cards to your hand, you can potentially deal 9 - 12 damage straight to the opponent in one round.

Spitecaster and Cemetery Bannerman both ensure an endless stream of small units to vex the enemy and keep your board flush with victims to kill for Eulogy effects.

With Necroblast for spot removal and Hunger For Knowledge to keep your hand heavy with cards, it's not hard to get ahead on board tempo and dominate all the way to victory.

While a little more high maintenance, she's still got a solid win percentage

Second-Tier Class: Prophet

Master of all things healing and health-related, the Prophet can outpace an opponent just by keeping himself and his creatures alive longer. The only thing keeping this system from becoming absurd is Fable Fortune's inability to raise a player's health above max. If this were Magic: The Gathering, the Prophet would be one of those ludicrous life gain decks where you end with 50 or 100 health.

When you choose your morality for completing quests, either option can be helpful -- but at healing yourself 4 health for 2 gold, the Good version ensures you will outlast your opponent unless they have a seriously aggressive deck.

Wear Away isn't quite spot removal, but it does handily neutralize any big, beefy creature your opponent has been buffing up. Leeching Swarm is a must-have x2 card, helping to clear out the board while healing you.

Since so many of the Prophet's cards are based around healing, the big factor determining how well the deck does is in your Neutral card choice. Because of the ability to raise a creature's health above maximum, Wasp Queen is an endless factory of 1/1 creatures and fits nicely in just about any Prophet deck.

Spot removal, silence effects, and direct damage combos will be your bane here. So long as you can keep putting creatures on the board, its unlikely your opponent will be able to outpace you on the tempo front.

 Its hard to lose when your creatures never die...

Third-Tier Class: Knight

Now we're hitting the bottom tier, where the following classes just objectively aren't as powerful as the above three.

The equivalent of the small creature Plains deck from Magic, the Knight is all about putting as many tiny peasants out as possible and then comboing them to get bigger.

There are lots of options on that front, but obviously they aren't as powerful as many creatures from other decks. Master Of Bacon can get built up to a high strength, but he he's easy to remove before he can get any hits straight to the opponent.

Your only real board clearing option is All Peasant And Correct, which turns all of your and your opponent's creatures into 1/1 peasants. Puncture is what passes for spot removal on the Knight side -- but as mentioned before it's less versatile than similar cards from other classes.

Because you have a flood of small creatures, board clearing spells will annihilate your rhythm and put you back on the tempo, making it difficult to stay ahead.

 There's a reason you don't usually see armies of peasants winning wars!

Third-Tier Class: Merchant

All around, this is just a bad class. Yes, you will frequently have loads of gold and a flush hand. But since you don't have many cards worth playing, that doesn't really matter.

Blockade is actually a useful card, giving all your creatures Guard and a boost for a turn, so it can keep you in the game while trying to regain control.

Your spot removal is Cast Away, which not only costs more than the removal cards from other classes, but still lets the opponent potentially cast the creature again down the line. At an 8 gold cost, Horn Of The Deep has got to be the most expensive board clearing card in the game.

To make Merchant work, you've got to stay alive long enough to build up your gold and hand, then use all that extra gold to put out some strong neutral creatures. The problem is that by that time, the opponent will be so far ahead it won't matter, and the big bad you bring out will probably just get spot removed anyway.

 Who do you want in a mage duel? Not the rich guy with no creatures.

Worst Class in Fable Fortune: Alchemist

Here we are, at the bottom of the barrel. This is actually my favorite class to play, but it has major flaws that are difficult to overcome against anyone who knows what they are doing.

The most notable problem is the focus on buffing one single creature through Vials using your class ability. If you're lucky and the opponent has no spot removal cards at their disposal, then you're large and in charge. But anyone who has built a half-decent deck is going to get ahead in the board tempo to a point that becomes impossible to overcome.

Chain Reaction is too unpredictable to be useful as board clearing or spot removal, and Liquid Fire is as sad a board clearing card as there can be. If you can keep your menagerie alive long enough, you can get some powerful creatures with Jar Of Ogre Slobber, Potion Of Youth, and Recipe For Success.

The only way to make this deck work is to remain aggressively in control of the board during the early game, and lure the opponent into wasting their spot removal and board clearing cards before you start pumping your one or two main creatures.

 Oh how I wish you were a viable candidate...

What did you think of our rankings, and what's the strongest deck you've faced off against so far? Let us know in the comments below!

How to Make Rose Hip Tea in The Long Dark,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/0/0/1/001-a7f18.jpg bx3l8/how-to-make-rose-hip-tea-in-the-long-dark Thu, 03 Aug 2017 09:40:19 -0400 Sergey_3847

The latest update for The Long Dark not only introduced a brand new Story mode, but also added a few changes to the game mechanics. For example, now you can’t just use rose hips to make a tea, but you must prepare them first before cooking.

If you can’t figure out how to prepare the rose hip tea in The Long Dark so that you will be able to cure your wounds, this short guide will give you the rundown of all the steps you need to take. 

Making The Rose Hip Tea in The Long Dark

Step 1: Collect Rose Hips

Rose hips grow on rose hip bushes, which can be found around shelters or near cliffs. You need to find three bushes that will provide you with the 24 rose hips required for making the tea. Each bush drops 8 rose hips.

You cannot consume the rose hips, and you cannot make tea from raw rose hips either. But if you do everything right, then you can consume the rose hip tea as an alternative for painkillers or as a source of calories and hydration.

Step 2: Cooking Rose Hip Tea

As soon as you have the required number of rose hips, open your backpack menu, and click on the crafting tab. You will see a list of blueprints among which you will find the rose hips that you have just collected.

Choose them and press the “Begin Crafting” button in the bottom right corner. Your regular rose hips will turn into “Prepared Rose Hips.” After that you can start cooking the rose hip tea.

You will also need 0.25 liters of water and a source of fire, such as a campfire or a fireplace inside a building. When the fire is ready, choose the food tab and boil your prepared rose hips in the water for 10 minutes.

As a result, your rose hip tea will be ready for consumption. Use it to heal wounds, warm yourself up, and add some calories to your daily nutrition plan.


That wraps up this guide! If you’re completely new to the game, then check out the rest of our guides for The Long Dark to make sure you survive the harsh winter nights:

How to Unlock Harran Rifle in Dying Light,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-cea36.jpg ykr7p/how-to-unlock-harran-rifle-in-dying-light Wed, 02 Aug 2017 11:11:22 -0400 Sergey_3847

The latest content drop for Dying Light comes in the form of its first free DLC -- "Reinforcements." It introduces new types of enemies and weapons. One such weapon is the brand new Harran Military Rifle that promises to be the best one in the game so far.

If you want to unlock this powerful weapon, then read this guide for a complete instruction. In the end you will have a weapon that can deal with all the enhanced zombies and human enemies.

How to Get Harran Rifle in Dying Light

Step 1: Redeem Your Steam Code
  1. Go to Gemly and choose Dying Light -- Harran Military Rifle (DLC).
  2. Press the “Add to Cart” button.
  3. The service will ask you to login with your Techland account, but if you don’t have one you will need to register.
  4. Check your e-mail for an activation code.
  5. Go back to the Gemly page and “Add to Cart” once again.
  6. The service will provide you with the Steam key for the Harran Rifle.
  7. Go to your Steam account and activate the key in your game library.

Step 2: Crafting the Harran Rifle

Now this part is more exciting, as it requires you to actually craft the new weapon. You will need to find a weapon shop in the game and purchase any military rifle. Then, go to your Blueprints menu and look for Harran Military Rifle. It should be indicated with the blue color.

The military rifle that you have just purchased will serve as the basis for your new weapon. Also, you will need 6x Metal Parts and 3x Duct Tape. When you have all the components ready, you can finally craft the Harran Rifle.

This new weapon is similar in stats to the Advanced Military Rifle with 959 points of damage and 100 rate of fire. However, the Harran Rifle has a better accuracy, so it’s a much better weapon overall.


If you’re looking for some other Dying Light guides, then check them out below:

Dark And Light Console Cheat Commands,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/i/o/ciov2-d47c5.jpg pys1r/dark-and-light-console-cheat-commands Wed, 02 Aug 2017 09:42:24 -0400 Ty Arthur

The fantasy world that survival simulator fans have been craving is now in Early Access with Dark And Lightwhich will have you gathering resources, constructing buildings, and taming creatures. 

Dark And Light has more than a few similarities to Ark, including the list of console admin commands that let you either outright cheat or just spawn specific items for crafting.

How to Access Admin Console Commands in Dark and Light

To open the Dark And Light admin console command section, you just need to tap a single key. By default, this is set to the + key, but you can change the key binding to anything you want -- like the more industry standard Tab.

Navigate to the Key Bindings section of the Options menu and look for the "Toggle Console" entry to change the key for accessing the admin area.

Now just tap that key and a black bar appears on the bottom of the screen letting you type in specific commands. Type enablecheats and hit Enter to get going.

 Changing the Toggle Console option

Basic Dark And Light Cheats

The basic Dark And Light cheats are all very similar to Ark -- so if you've been playing that survival simulator already, you should know the commands by heart at this point.

After enabling cheats and toggling on the admin console command section, just enter any of these codes to breeze through single-player local server experience:

  • cheat god - enables invincibility mode so no enemy can kill you
  • cheat infinitestats - similar to the previous one, this gives you highest possible stats for everything
  • cheat fly - fly into the air rather than walk
  • cheat ghost - similar to the previous one, except this lets you move through any object or barrier
  • cheat destroyallenemies - removes all enemies from the entire game, although they will respawn
  • cheat giveresources - automatically get 50 of all resources

 Stab me all you want - with god mode on its doesn't matter!

Spawning Dark And Light Items

After enabling cheat codes, open up the admin console command area and use the GiveItemNum command to force spawn a specific item. The pattern to use is as follows:

GiveItemNum (item ID) (quantity) 1 0

The item codes are listed below, and the last number refers to whether you are getting the item or a blueprint for the item. For the blueprint, switch the final 0 to a 1. 

For instance, if you wanted 10 Foundations in your inventory, type GiveItemNum 411 10 1 0 and hit Enter while the admin console area is active.

Note that some users have reported having to type cheat before it like with the other cheats, so if the command doesn't work, use Cheat GiveItemNum instead.

Item Item ID
 1  Bedroll
  2   Small Chest 
 3  Medium Chest 
   4    Wall Torch
  5   Bed 
 6  Fireplace
 7  Wooden Sign
 8  Private Storage
 9  Larder Box
 10   Dining Table
11  Wooden Chair
12  Cooking Pot
  13   Stone Axe
 14  Stone Sword
 15  Stone Pickaxe
  16   Stone Spear
 17  Wood Bow
 18  Stone Arrow
 19  Throwing Arrow
 20  Crossbow
  21   Unused ID
 22  Small Plot
 23  Medium Plot
 24  Large Plot
 25  Compost Bin
 26  Mortar
  27   Workbench
 28  Forge
 29  Sulfur Powder
 30  Quartz Sand
 31  Ground Bone
 32  Lightstone Sand
 33  Darkstone Sand
 34  Iron Axe
 35  Iron Pickaxe
 36  Iron Scythe
 37  Iron Spear
 38  Stone Hook Arrow
 39  Iron Hook Arrow
 40  Unused ID
 41  Wooden Feeding Trough
 42  Stone Feeding Trough
  43   Paper
 44  Magic Parchment
  45   Iron Dagger
 46  Iron Sword
 47  Iron Hammer
 48  Iron Greatsword
  49   Unused ID
 50  Tree Bark Shield
 51 - 52  Unused IDs
 53  Summoning Pool
 54  Irrigation Intake
 55  Pipe Cross
 56  Straight Pipe
 57  Slanted Pipe
 58  Vertical Pipe
 59  Sprout
 60  Water Reservoir
 61  Sand Table
  62   House War Flag
 63  Glass Bottle
 64  Hanglider
 65  Parachute
 66  Boar Saddle
 67  Bargesh Saddle
 68  Vrock Saddle
 69  Bahamut Saddle
  70   Wyvern Saddle
 71  Bear Saddle
 72  Panther Saddle
 73  Griffin Saddle
 74  Infernus Dragon Saddle
 75  Unused ID
 76  Grut Stag Saddle
 77  Longhorn Saddle
 78  Horse Saddle
 79  Deer Saddle
 80  Arachane Saddle
 81  Stirge Saddle
 82  Lavatiger Saddle
 83  Nidhog Saddle
 84  Voidray Saddle
 85  Mastodon Saddle
  86   Yeti Saddle
 87  Kodo Saddle
 88  Frost Dragon Saddle
 89 - 97  Unused IDs
 98  House Contract Table
 99  Contract
 100  Soul Of Darkness
 101  Soul Of Light
 102  Unused ID
 103  Small Spell Tower
 104  Canopy
  105   Cooked Meat
 106  Fine Cooked Meat
 107  Cured Meat
 108  Fine Cured Meat
 109  Copper Ingot
 110  Iron Ingot
 111  Mithril Ingot
 112  Ink
 113  Focus Elixir
 114  Focus Potion
 115  Centaur Wine
 116  Summoning Stone
 117  House Seal
 118  Goblin Contract
 119  Cooked Mushrooms
 120  Spiced Meat
 121  Silica Powder
 122  Cloth Shirt
 123  Cloth Pants
 124  Cloth Cap
 125  Cloth Gloves
 126  Cloth Boots
 127  Leather Breastplate
 128  Leather Pants
 129  Leather Helmet
 130  Leather Gloves
  131   Leather Boots
 132  Druid Tunic
 133  Druid Pants
 134  Druid Cap
 135  Druid Gloves
 136  Druid Boots
  137   Copper Breastplate
 138  Copper Pants
 139  Copper Helmet
 140  Copper Gloves
 141  Copper Boots
  142   Fur Breastplate
 143  Fur Pants
  144   Fur Cap
 145  Fur Gloves
 146  Fur Boots
 147  Mithril Breastplate
 148   Mithril Pants
 149  Mithril Helm
 150  Mithril Gloves
  151   Mithril Boots
 152  Mithril Robe
 153  Mithril Light Leggings
 154  Mithril Hat
 155  Unused ID
 156  Mithril Shoes
 157   Breastplate Of Darkness
 158  Darkstone Pants
 159  Darkstone Helm
 160  Darkstone Gloves
 161  Darkstone Boots
 162  Robe Of Lightsone
  163   Pants Of Lightstone
  164   Hate Of Lightstone
 165  Gloves Of Lightstone
  166   Shoes Of Lightstone
 167  Brimstone Tunic
 168  Brimstone Pants
 169  Brimstone Gloves
  170   Brimstone Boots
 171  Brimstone Hood
 172  Icewind Robe
 173  Icewind Pants
 174  Icewind Gloves
 175  Icewind Shoes
 176  Icewind Hood
 177  Iron Breastplate
 178  Iron Pants
 179  Iron Gloves
 180   Iron Boots
 181  Iron Helm
 182  Ranger Tunic
 183  Ranger Pants
 184  Ranger Gloves
 185  Ranger Boots
 186  Ranger Helm
 187  Magic Essence
 188  Fire Essence
 189  Water Essence
 190  Air Essence
  191   Earth Essence
 192  Light Essence
 193  Dark Essence
 194  Chaos Essence
 195  Magic Altar
  196   Spell Tower
 197  Spell Generator
 198  Spell Tower Ammo
 199  Sorcerer Staff
 200  Druid Staff
 201  Celestial Staff
 202  Battlemage Staff
 203  Drain Spell
 204  Rune Of Restoration
 205  Rune Of Warmth
 206  Rune Of Light
 207  Rune Of Radiance
 208 - 210  Fireball 1 - 3
 211 - 213  Lightning Bolt 1 - 3
 217  Polymorph
 218  Unused ID
 219   Rune Of Haste
 220  Unused ID
 221  Arctic Illusion
 222  Rune Of Deathstalker
 223  Rune Of Wyvern
 224  Wall Of Fire
 225  Wall Of Ice
 226  Wall Of Lightning
 227 - 228  Firestorm 1 - 2
 229 - 230  Hailstorm 1 - 2
 231  Telekinesis
 232  Dark Vision
 233  Rune Of Guidance
 234  Resurrection Altar
 235  Planar Gate
 236  Rune Of Recall
 237  Flame Missile
 238  Rune Of Soul Binding
 239  Rune Of Greater Soul Binding
 240  Acid Extract
 241-262  Unused IDs
 263  Small Fertilizer
 264  Medium Fertilizer
 265  Large Fertilizer
 266  Herbivore Feed
 267  Carnivore Feed
 268  Mystical Feed
 269  Magic Shards
 270  Grass
 271  Straw
 272  Field Flowers
 273  Blueberries
 274  Field Mushroom
 275  Wood
 276  Charcoal
 277  Twine
 278  Apples
 279  Stone
 280  Sulfur Ore
 281  Copper Ore
 282  Iron Ore
 283  Mithril Ore
 284  Lightstone
 285  Darkstone
 286  Bones
 287  Raw Meat
 288  Fine Raw Meat
 289   Rotten Meat
 290  Ice Chunk
 291  Fur
 292  Hide
 293  Fire Element Core
 294  Water Element Core
 295  Earth Element Core
 296  Air Element Core
 297  Light Element Core
 298  Dark Element Core
 299  Gold Coin
 300  Fire Blossom
 301  Fire Blossom Seed
 302  Snow Lotus
 303  Snow Lotus Seed
  304   Terra Flower
 305  Terra Flower Seed
 306  Thundergrass
 307  Thundergrass Seed
 308  Light Blossom
 309  Light Blossom Seed
 310  Darkweed
 311  Darkweed Seed
 312  Nightcap Mushroom
 313  Deathcap Mushroom
 314  Vigor Mushroom
 315  Whitecap Mushroom
 316  Fungal Spores
 317  Wheat
 318  Wheat Seed
  319   Cooking Herb
 320  Luck Clover
 321  Shrub Seedling
 322 - 326  Unused IDs
 327  Shabby Foundation
 328  Shabby Door Frame
 329   Shabby Cieling
 330  Shabby Wall
 331  Shabby Door
 332  Triangle Shabby Left Wall
 333  Triangle Shabby Right Wall
 334  Slanted Shabby Roof
  335   Shabby Dormer
 336  Simple Foundation
 337  Simple Wall
 338  Simple Ceiling
 339  Triangle Simple Wall Left
 340  Triangle Simple Wall Right
 341  Slanted Simple Roof
 342  Simple Door Frame
 343  Simple Door
 344  Simple Window Frame
 345  Simple Steps
 346  Simple Skylight
 347  Simple Skylight Hatch
 348  Simple Wall Spikes
 349  Simple Barrier Door
 350  Simple Barrier Door Frame
 351  Simple Barrier
 352  Simple Railing
 353  Giant Simple Beast Gate Frame
 354  Giant Simple Beast Gate
 355  Large Simple Beast Gate Frame
 356  Large Simple Beast Gate
 357  Simple Window
 358  Simple Column
 359  Simple Ladder
 360  Simple Rectangle Foundation
 361  Firm Foundation
 362  Firm Wall
 363  Firm Ceiling
 364  Triangle Firm Wall Left
 365  Triangle Firm Wall Right
  366   Slanted Firm Roof
 367  Firm Door Frame
  368   Firm Column
 369  Tiled Firm Roof
 370  Firm Skylight Frame
  371   Firm Skylight Hatch
 372  Archer Firm Door
 373  Archer Firm Wall
 374  Firm Window Frame
  375   Firm Window
 376  Firm Ladder
 377  Firm Door
 378  Firm Steps
 379  Curved Firm Ladder
 380  Giant Firm Beast Gate Frame
 381  Giant Firm Beast Gate
 382  Large Firm Beast Gate Frame
 383  Large Firm Beast Gate
 384  Firm Rectangle Foundation
 385  Rugged Ceiling
 386  Rugged Skylight
 387  Rugged Skylight Frame
 388  Rugged Door
  389   Rugged Door Frame
 390  Rugged Foundation
 391  Archer Rugged Door
 392  Rugged Ladder
 393  Rugged Column
 394  Archer Rugged Wall
 395  Rugged Steps
 396  Slanted Rugged Roof
 397  Triangle Rugged Left Wall
 398  Triangle Rugged Right Wall
 399  Rugged Wall
 400  Rugged Window Frame
 401  Rugged Window
 402  Rugged Wall Spike
 403  Rugged Barrier Door
 404  Rugged Barrier Door Frame
 405  Rugged Barrier
 406  Rugged Rail
 407  Rugged Rectangle Foundation
 408  Framework Ceiling
 409  Door
 410  Door Frame
 411  Foundation
 412  Column
 413  Stairs
 414  Slanted Roof
 415  Left Gable
 416  Right Gable
 417  Wall
 418  Rectangle Foundation
 419 - 421  Unused IDs
 422   Castle Of Hope Ceiling
 423  Skylight


Have you found any other useful IDs for spawning Dark And Light items? Let us know in the comments section! And be sure to check out the rest of our Dark and Light guides for more help with the game.

Fable Fortune Deck Building Guide: Gravedigger,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/0/1/20170801114916-3735a.jpg jczov/fable-fortune-deck-building-guide-gravedigger Tue, 01 Aug 2017 17:43:57 -0400 Ty Arthur

The classic graveyard-exhuming wizard equivalent to the swamp mage in Magic: The Gathering, the Gravedigger class in Fable Fortune will have you killing your own creatures and bringing them back in bigger and badder forms over the course of the match.

The opposite of the Knight class, your goal here isn't to keep a bunch of tiny creatures on the board, but rather to have them die so they create more or buff other cards.

Below you can find our full break down of how to effectively use the Gravedigger in PvP matches. Need help with any other part of this CCG? Check out our other Fable Fortune guides:

Neutral/Trophy Card Choices

On the trophy front, the lowly Chicken Vengeant is a frequent choice for any Gravedigger deck, since it makes it easy to trigger the Eulogy effect that requires a card to have died that turn. Throw in the helpfulness of 2 damage for no gold cost on any turn, and Chicken Vengeant ends up being much more useful than you'd expect.

If you need a steady supply of small creatures to die or get in the way, don't discount Wasp Queen. She gives you another 1/1 Wasp any time she survives damage, even if she initiates that damage by attacking a creature. When coupled with quest rewards like Brandish, you can keep the Queen alive a decent amount of time and keep churning out those Wasps. 

Although they don't play as well into the Last Laugh and Eulogy mechanics, as with all decks Hobbes and Bandits can make for some well-rounded combos that are helpful in nearly any situation, especially if you are going for aggro direct damage.

 This little clucker is surprisingly effective in the right circumstances

Gravedigger Class Cards

The heart of nearly any Gravedigger deck should be a horde of undead minions that are more useful when they die. Reanimate can be used on your cards that are due to die at the end of the turn so you still get them back even if you normally wouldn't.

Hunger For Knowledge requires you to destroy one of your own cards, and who wants to do that? A Gravedigger, that's who. Get rid of one of your army of 1/1 Wasps, Shamblers, or Crumbling Corpses to grab yourself two extra cards for extra utility and more tactical options.

Couple all this with Morbid Arcanist, a card that costs a whopping 10 gold... except that it drops its price by 1 gold for every friendly card that dies, eventually costing nothing.

To offer further death options and make creatures cheaper to put back out, don't forget Reassemble The Bones, which kills one of your creatures, but puts it back in your hand at a 2 gold cost reduction.

Board clearing option Stench Of Death isn't as powerful as some of the other classes board wipe cards, but it has the bonus of getting rid of all your own little undead, allowing Eulogy to take effect and frequently triggering a cascading wave of reanimation.

If you can combo Stench Of Death with Wake The Dead, you can easily take total board control and completely mess up the enemy's rhythm.

 Sometimes clearing the whole board works in your favor

Gravedigger Class Ability

The Gravedigger's base 2-gold cost ability is Exhume, which summons a 1/1 Crumbling Corpse with Rush that dies at the end of the turn. While that's useful for pinging the opponent or weakening a Guard creature, the real appeal here is using the creature as a suicide attack to trigger Eulogy, or to return the Corpse to play with various reanimation abilities.

With a Gravedigger deck it is extremely easy to hit Quest goals quickly, getting to max morality in just a handful of turns by either choosing to cast spells or use Last Laugh abilities.

Going Evil ups the power to a 2/1 Raging Corpse with Rush that dies at the end of the turn, while Good gives you a permanent 1/1 Shambler and a 1/1 Crumbling Corpse with Rush that dies at the end of the turn.

 Exhume, Enslave, and Resurrect Abilities

Sample Gravedigger Deck

Below we've assembled a baseline Gravedigger deck that revolves around killing your own creatures, but there plenty of ways to modify this and go in different directions.

If you want to shift the focus away from Last Laugh effects towards a more aggressive deck, swap out Acolyte Of The Skorm, Reanimate, and Undead Footman with Hobbe Warlock, Tattooist, and Royal Officer.

  • Necrotic Enforcer X 2
  • Reassemble The Bones X 2
  • Cemetery Bannerman X 2 
  • Hunger For Knowledge X 2
  • Necroblast X 2
  • Acolyte Of The Skorm
  • Depraved Cultist
  • Reanimate
  • Undead Footman X 2
  • Stench Of Death X 2
  • Corrupted Spellblade
  • Spitecaster X 2
  • Damned Legion X 2
  • Wake The Dead
  • Cursed Warrior X 2
  • Nostro
  • Frightblade Stalker X 2
  • Rotlung Slaver
  • Morbid Arcanist

What did you think of our sample deck, and what Gravedigger strategies have you found to work best while battling other players? Let us know in the comments section below! 

The Long Dark Beginner's Guide: Survival Tips and Tricks,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/4/8/148361197312422795-382f8.jpg wyzte/the-long-dark-beginners-guide-survival-tips-and-tricks Tue, 01 Aug 2017 12:22:07 -0400 Sergey_3847

The Long Dark, an indie survival game from Hinterland, is leaving Early Access today -- and is celebrating its full launch with a brand new story mode! But if course, the sandbox elements are still this game's most essential component, and you'll need to understand them thoroughly if you want to survive. 

If you haven't played the game during the alpha stage, then you'll have some trouble progressing -- as its challenges are quite hard, even for experienced players. So in this beginner's guide for The Long Dark, we're going to give you some tips that will help you make this dangerous journey and endure your adventures in the snowy wilds.

Set the Right Difficulty

The Long Dark offers four levels of difficulty. If you’re a new player, you'll want to skip the Interloper one, which is the hardest. But if you really want to learn something, then don’t take the easiest setting, either. Instead, go for Stalker difficulty. It is perfectly balanced, and can really give you a sense of realistic survival.

Find Shelter and Get Warm

Your game starts in the Northern Canadian wilderness, and your first task is to get warm clothes and shelter. Your starting clothes are not very good, so you must find a place to hide from the cold as soon as possible.

Don’t stray away into the wilderness too much, but try to follow the main path or the highway, as this will surely lead you to a safe place. On your way, you can start picking up sticks from the ground that will serve as the fuel.

As soon as you find a cabin or a house, immediately start looking for clothes and food inside. But be careful with your food and always check it for staleness. If it’s below 50%, then it is advisable not to consume such stale foods as they may provoke sickness.

Change your clothes and use any bed for sleeping. This will help you get warm and protect you from freezing.

Beware of the Wild Animals

Before leaving your shelter, make sure that you have a torch with you. For now it’s your only protection from the wolves and bears. You can craft a torch using three simple components: wood, cloth and lamp oil. You should be able to find all of them in your shelter.

Another way of getting rid of wild animals is to throw them a decoy, which is basically a piece of meat that you can carry around. The wolves will most definitely smell it on you, so drop it as soon as you hear barking in the distance. This way they will chase the food rather than you.

One more trick you can use to avoid wolves is to crouch. It will make you almost invisible to them, even in cases when they appear really close to you. But don’t get too close, as there is a chance that they will attack you no matter what.

In time you will need to find a real weapon, such as a rifle. It is way more effective against wild animals. You might also want to get yourself a hunting knife that can be used for skinning animals.

Learn Navigation and Weather Prediction

Navigating the map and predicting weather are probably two of the most important skills for survival in The Long Dark. It will help you find the best locations for setting up your base and hide in there in case you get caught in a blizzard.

The best places for setting up your base on the map are following:

  • Trapper's Homestead: A decent location that has fine loot inside, including a rifle. (Mystery Lake: South-West)
  • Camp Office: Located in the central area of a Mystery Lake, which makes it perfect for fishing.
  • Quonset Gas Station: Located in an area infested with wolves, but has tons of valuable loot inside. (Coastal Highway: East)
  • Farmhouse: Find it in the central part of the Pleasant Valley. It not only has good loot, but also a basement that can be used for storage purposes.

Try not to leave your base too early in the morning, as usually the weather is extremely cold at that time of the day. If you see that there is snow falling and wind blowing, then return immediately to your base -- in such cases, the blizzard is inevitable.

If you do get caught in blizzard, then try to find any other shelter that is close to you. Don’t try to reach your base if you know that you’re too far away. Just light up your lantern and get to the closest building you may have passed during your exploration.

Hunt For Survival

When you have all the clothes, equipment, and your own base, you can start hunting for wild animals. Now you’re the predator, so learn as much as you can about hunting.

First, look up into the sky and check for a pack of crows circling above a certain area. This will indicate that there is a dead animal nearby, which you can use for meat or skin.

Secondly, don’t forget to check for footprints. You will see them in the snow. In time you will be able to distinguish them pretty well, and even follow your prey.

Lastly, learn fishing. You can craft hooks and lines easily using metal scraps and cured guts. If you are located on a lake, then look out for fishing huts. Often these huts already have fishing equipment inside them, so you don’t really need to craft anything. Make a hole in the ice and catch some fish, which is an excellent source of food.


This is pretty much it for the basics of the survival game in The Long Dark. With the new Story Mode, the game should deliver all kinds of fresh challenges. So keep your eyes open and come back soon for more The Long Dark guides at GameSkinny!

Diablo 3 Challenge Rifts: Explanation and Rewards,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/a/challengeriftheaderimageresized-06398.png f6wfm/diablo-3-challenge-rifts-explanation-and-rewards Tue, 01 Aug 2017 12:01:53 -0400 Joseph Rowe

It's been a while since Reaper of Souls came out, and fans have been wanting more content for a while. With the new Rise of the Necromancer character pack, Diablo 3 added in a new feature called the Challenge Rift to quench our thirst for new content.

This rift is similar to the Nephalem Rifts and Greater Rifts -- you go into dungeons, kill tons of enemies until you fill your bar, then defeat the rift guardian. So how are these Challenge Rifts different? In this short guide, we'll break down what makes them unique and what rewards you can reap for completing them.

How Challenge Rifts Work in Diablo 3

In CRs, you are given another player's character to use instead of one of your own. This character comes with their own build already pre-chosen, so you have to work with what you've got. The challenge then comes from trying to beat the original player's time for the rift.

If you succeed, you get a treasure chest full of rewards. If you fail, you have to try again until you get it right.

Challenge Rift Rewards in Diablo 3

Upon completing the rift by the given time, you will be able to claim a cache that has the following:

  • 8x each act's legendary crafting materials (Khanduran Runes, Arreat War Tapestries, etc.)
  • 300 Blood Crystals
  • ~80-250 of Reusable Parts, Arcane Dust, and Veiled Crystals

 As of right now, challenge rifts can only be done once a week. Some players have complained about that as they don't feel the rewards are significant enough for a weekly event, so perhaps this will change in further updates to Rise of the Necromancer.

Every week, a new character is picked for the rift. If you've only ever really played one or two classes, this is a great way to get a feel for other classes and their respective end-game builds.


Have you completed a challenge rift yet? Which one was your favorite so far? Let us know in the comments! And be sure to check out the rest of our Diablo 3 guides for Rise of the Necromancer to get the most out of this season:

Crusaders of Light Stamina Guide -- How to Use and Recover Stamina,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/l/col-stam-guide-79d0b.png hrf1f/crusaders-of-light-stamina-guide-how-to-use-and-recover-stamina Mon, 31 Jul 2017 17:27:05 -0400 Ashley Gill

Stamina doesn't get in your way too often in Crusaders of Light. Unlike many other mobile RPGs, where Stamina is used to bottleneck your primary progress day to day, in Crusaders of Light, it's used for typically minor tasks. And it's hard to complain about that.

In this guide, we're going to go over the uses of Stamina, which uses are most worth it, and how you can recover it. It's a pretty simple system, but you have to know how it works in order to make the most out of your Stamina.

So let's go over the uses of Stamina first. What uses it up? Is it as valuable as it seems? Well, let's find out!

Stamina Uses in Crusaders of Light

Your Stamina is, luckily enough, only used in a few broad ways: gathering and opening chests. However, there are specifics to that.

When you gather a plant or ore in the field, the cost is 1 Stamina. That's not too bad, right? Right.

When you gather a plant or ore from your guild's node collection, the cost is 10 Stamina. That sounds a bit steep, but collecting from the guild nodes not only grants you the material you want, but it may also grant you gold or other much-needed items for late-game crafting.

Opening treasure chests is another Stamina sink, but luckily, the amount of Stamina needed isn't too high. Opening a small treasure chest costs 5 Stamina while opening a large treasure chest costs 10 Stamina. Pretty easy to remember, and often, it's worth it for the free gold.

And lastly, sending messages to World Chat consumes 5 Stamina per message. Spamming the world doesn't seem like that great of an idea, does it? That's 5 Stamina you could have spent on opening a chest and getting some gold.

How to Restore Stamina

This is one thing that everyone playing Crusaders of Light needs to know: Stamina may not be tied to your overall progress, but being able to gather and open treasure chests is part of the MMO experience. You want to do it, you probably need to do it.

Unless you're a hardcore gatherer, keeping your Stamina up isn't terribly difficult. You'll be racking up Stamina points left and right just by doing your normal routine, and here are the activities that regenerate your Stamina and how much they regenerate:

  • You get 30 Stamina for completing a dungeon for the first time each day (up to 120 a day)
  • You get 1 Stamina per Reputation-Granting Trial Quest (up to 20 a day)
  • You get 15 Stamina per Reputation-Granting Strange Events quest
  • You get 1 Stamina per Preparation Quest (up to 10 a day)
  • You get 3 Stamina per Tournament Battle (up to 15 a day)
  • You get 3 Stamina per Final Challenge Coliseum Battle (up to 30, Saturdays only)
  • You get 3 Stamina per Agitated Elemental clear (up to 15)
  • You get 30 Stamina for clearing a dungeon for the first time 

It's easy enough to rack up 195 Stamina in a single day just going about your business, and on Saturdays, you have that optional extra 30 Stamina to add to the lot.

This sort of Stamina system is much more lenient than many of those you see in competing mobile RPGs and MMORPGs, with your Stamina being closely tied with your gold gains. Your two biggest uses of Stamina, opening treasure chests and gathering, lead to gold gains one way or the other. Opening chests often grants gold, and the refined materials you can craft via your life skill can be sold for gold at the Trading House.

Hopefully, this guide has helped you wrap your head around Crusaders of Light's Stamina system. It doesn't have that many uses and it doesn't regenerate on its own, but the things you can use it on are well-worth it. Knowledge, as always, is power.

Make sure to check out our other Crusaders of Light guides to get even more tips, tricks, and strategies:

Crusaders of Light Classes and Paths Overview Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/l/col-class-head-47735.png gmj8w/crusaders-of-light-classes-and-paths-overview-guide Mon, 31 Jul 2017 17:10:29 -0400 Ashley Gill

With three main classes and three paths each, it can be hard to lock down which class you want to main in Crusaders of Light. The game's heavy emphasis on both PvP and raids in end-game only makes the decision harder. You want something you can have fun with while still being useful to prospective guilds and raiders.

We're going to go over all three classes in Crusaders of Light, along with their respective paths in this guide, with an emphasis on helping you choose your primary path. While the game lets you swap paths on a whim, the amount of EXP it takes to get your path level up to snuff at later levels is exceedingly high. You're going to be picking a main path whether you know it now or not.

You're allowed to choose a path and pump EXP into all three at level 20. Leveling a path increases your stats when you are using it, which all goes toward your total Assessment Score, ultimately making you more powerful.

At the time of this writing, there are three classes in Crusaders of Light: Ranger, Warrior, and Mystic. They all seem to be pigeon-holed into certain roles, but they are a bit more diverse than you might at first think.

Ranger Class

The Ranger may seem like your bread and butter DPS class (and it certainly can be), but this class has some support capabilities in its Animal Tamer branch that diversify its uses.

Scout Path

This is the big go-to for overall DPS in raids. As it stands, no other class provides more damage than the Scout in PvE situations. Here are its modifiers:

This all makes for a critical-hit-oriented class, one that's able to snipe the enemy with heavy hits using the Razor Wind skill before following up with a barrage of auto attacks.

The Scout also receives the skill Starblade Volley, which adds another potent damage skill to this path's arsenal.

Choose Scout if you like to absolutely melt your enemies, just don't expect to be able to do much else. It's decent in PvP, but the Forest Guide path is better suited for going against other players. Scout Path is better as a PvE path.

Forest Guide Path

On the other side of the Ranger spectrum is the PvP-oriented Forest Guide path. While the Scout Path deals heavy damage, the Forest Guide Path specializes in binding and dazing enemies. Here are its modifiers:

Forest Guide is meant to make other players have a bad time. They can be repeatedly bound by Tempest Shot if you get lucky with Slow resists, which in turn, significantly increases damage dealt to them by your character.

This path also gains access to the Moonlight skill which, when you've hit level 30, has a chance to provides a more potent version of the skill that hits 2 or 3 times instead of just one.

Choose Forest Guide if you want to be a complete nuisance in any form of PvP, where you'll be able to totally shut down your foes without taking a scratch and knock any enemy Mystics out of healing their allies. This path is not very effective in PvE.

Animal Tamer Path

This is the support path for the Ranger Class, and it is also the only pet class in the game. Animal Tamers are able to make the absolute most of the Wild Spirit skill, which summons a wolf to fight by the player's side. Here are its modifiers:

What you don't see in the image above is the real draw to the path: The wolf's actual capabilities. Once you reach certain active skill levels and unlock new path-exclusive passive and active skills, the wolf itself becomes a supporting monster able to buff the Attack of nearby allies, as well as grant a moderate heal when it disperses.

The Animal Tamer Path is best in PvE and is a must-have for raids later in the game, making this a solid choice for players who like to hybrid support in large scale PvE endeavors.

Mystic Class

Every MMO needs a healer, and the Mystic is Crusaders of Light's answer to the age-old need for sweet, sweet healing. Like the other classes, the Mystic's paths all have their own specialties, meaning not all of them are dedicated healers.

Verity Spirit Path

The Verity Spirit path isn't just able to heal, it's also able to put out some decent area of effect (AoE) damage to clear waves of mobs with ease. Here are its modifiers:

This path is almost exclusively useful in PvP situations as it has some good mobility via Void Walk and Light Sigil's synergy, as well as some reliable AoE damage. That combination makes this a reliable healer-damage hybrid in PvP fights, which any Verity Spirit player should be focused on over PvE content.

This path's exclusive Void Spirit Rain skill is its main attraction, and once you've leveled more, you get increasing chances to reset its cooldown to recast in sticky situations.

Choose Verity Spirit if you want to lay waste to several enemies at once in PvP while staying well out of harm's way (and able to get out of it if caught). This is not a very suitable PvE path.

Magellana's Judgement Path

Another hybrid path, Magellana's Judgement is even more offense-oriented than Verity Spirit, and it is ultimately the Mystic's only go-to for single target damage. Here are its modifiers:

This is a critical-hit-oriented path, much like the Ranger's Scout Path. But it plays very differently.

Magellana's Judgement relies heavily on the use of its exclusive Suppression skill. Its multiple hits means multiple chances to crit, which will, in turn, do an additional 15% of your Attack Power in damage. The path also converts Light Sigil into an offensive spell at level 25, changing its periodic healing into periodic damage.

This path is still able to heal but is the least healing-oriented of the three. It's viable in PvE and PvP, but do be aware that the Scout's damage is still much higher. There's always a trade-off for hybrids.

Shepherd Path

This is the only "pure" healer path the Mystic has, and it does a fantastic job of keeping everyone on its team alive. Every high-level raid needs Shepherds -- without exceptions. Here are its modifiers:

Shepherd is almost entirely focused around the synergy between Consolation and the passive-granting of the Enlightenment state, which is applied on healing or using Purifying Blast on allies.

Consolation itself heals you and nearby allies at the same time, with Enlightenment increasing the amount of HP restored on Consolation use. It's fairly straightforward, as is everything about this path.

This is a suitable path for most types of content because of the extreme healing. It's most suitable for PvE, but it can do a decent job in PvP.

Warrior Class

Crusaders of Light's only melee class, the Warrior is a capable fighter able to either dish out damage or tank raids depending on the chosen path. If either of those options sounds good, this may be the class for you.

Executioner Path

We've already gone over the other two classes' critical strike-oriented paths, and here we are at the Executioner, the equivalent path for the Warrior. Here are its modifiers:

The Executioner Path relies on getting critical hits with skills to further chain critical hits, and if that Anvil Drop crits, it's going to do a massive amount of damage.

Its real strength lies in its exclusive Blood Thirst skill which, upon unlocking its passive at level 30, will have its cooldown reset if Meteor Crater crits. The class is able to put out a massive amount of damage and can handle group fight situations with ease.

Choose the Executioner if you want to be the heavy-hitting monster you always knew you could be, and are okay with not specializing in either PvE or PvP.

Gladiator Path

If you want to tank, this is your only real option in Crusaders of Light. Gladiator was built to tank PvE content and it does it without breaking a sweat. Here are its modifiers:

The Gladiator is able to repeatedly cast Searing Chains in raids, allowing it to hold enemy aggro -- and it takes less damage from monsters, too.

Its exclusive skill, Gladiator Heart, is a fantastic addition to the path's kit and allows it to take even more damage. It's great to use at the start of boss encounters, as well as keeping yourself alive mid-fight.

This is not a path you would take for PvP situations as the Gladiator is almost entirely focused on making Gladiator Heart more effective and keeping it up. Plus, the modifier that makes this path take less damage from monsters is completely useless in PvP.

Choose the Gladiator path if you want to be the center of any PvE team at all stages of the game. Everyone needs one, but not everyone wants to play one!

Fang of Titanus Path

Another offense-oriented class, the Fang of Titanus Path does things a little differently than the Executioner Path. Instead of relying on critical hits, the Fang of Titanus relies on almost constant area of effect damage. Here are its modifiers:

This path enhances the Warrior's AoE skills to not only make every enemy near it take nearly continuous damage, but to also deal heavy damage to its primary target.

The real clincher for the Fang of Titanus Path is its exclusive skill. Death Gaze ensures no foe will be able to run out of range for long, and at higher skill levels, you can increase its range and potentially have its cooldown reset by the Deadly Forge skill.

This is a PvP-oriented path, as the Executioner can deal with PvE much better. Choose Fang of Titanus if you want to rock the battlefield, but be aware you won't be all that useful in raids.


And that's it for this guide covering the Classes and Paths for Crusaders of Light. Make sure to check out our other Crusaders of Light guides to make the most of your time in this mobile MMORPG

Fortnite Guide: Navigating the Unwieldy Skill Trees,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-12491.jpg e5qnh/fortnite-guide-navigating-the-unwieldy-skill-trees Mon, 31 Jul 2017 16:42:02 -0400 Ty Arthur

Two of the many complicated systems featured in the Early Access rendition of Fortnite are the skill and research trees, which aren't clearly explained to new players.

Simply jumping into the sea of unlockable nodes can be a daunting proposition, with four huge skill trees and four increasingly large research tiers available. Many of the game's other elements -- from the Collection book to Survivor Expeditions to Evolution -- are dependent on knowing the ins and outs of these trees.

Once you get past the size and number of options though, there are some clear patterns between the trees that make it simple to decide where you want to go first and formulate a plan of attack for future skill choices.

Just getting started with the game? Be sure to check out our other Fortnite guides first:

Fortnite Skill Tree Basics

Let's get some of the common Fortnite forum questions out of the way that aren't properly covered in the tutorial.

There's currently no level cap or end to the number of missions you can undertake, so yes, you can eventually unlock every single branch of all four Fortnite skill trees and research tiers.

To access the next tree in the list, you have to first unlock the final node in the middle branch of the previous tree, which usually involves earning most of the nodes along the entire tree, as well as completing specific quests.

Remember that in terms of character swapping, Fortnite is more along the lines of a MOBA than an MMORPG -- you are intended to frequently switch between classes and characters for different quests, so there's less of a reason to stick to one particular branch of the tree at a time.

Unless you want to evolve one class earlier than others or get a particular Gadget, there's really no "wrong" branch to go down.

Keep in mind that to play the other two classes besides Constructor and Soldier, you first have to unlock the Fortnite Leadership skills for the Ninja and Outlander classes. Those who are Founders and are part of Early Access get these skills for free -- they don't need to be unlocked at all -- while those who join the game later will have to unlock them by navigating the lower two branches of the first skill tree.

 Yeah, there's a lot to unlock here

Navigating The Fortnite Skill Tree

Although they look crazy, there's a method to each skill tree's madness. After you get past the initial 10 skills on the first tree, there's a clear pattern of where skills are positioned, with only a handful of exceptions.

  • The bottom branch of each tree is always focused on the Ninja class and the Ninja Leadership skill
  • The branch located second from bottom is for Outlander upgrades and the Outlander Leadership skill
  • The middle branch focuses on Defenders, Survivors, and the Pick Axe
  • The branch second from the top focuses on the Constructor class
  • The top branch covers the Soldier class

Where it gets confusing is on all the random skill and ability upgrades scattered throughout each branch. Here are the basics of what you need to know:

  • To unlock or upgrade the Collection, go down the middle branch of the first skill tree
  • To access the Transformation screen of the Armory, go to the bottom of the final blue segment in the middle branch of the first skill tree (see image below)
  • To unlock Evolution abilities, go to the very tail end of each class branch in any of the four skill trees
  • To unlock building upgrades, head down the Constructor class branches
  • To access Storm Shield upgrades, navigate through the Outlander class branches or the bottom side of any research tier
  • To unlock Gadgets, go along the class branch associated with that Gadget, such as the top Soldier branch for Air Strikes

 Survivor Transformation node of the first skill tree

Fortnite Research Tiers

Separate from the four skill trees are the four research tiers, which are closely interconnected to various skill nodes. Unlike with skills, you don't unlock research points by completing quests in Fortnite. Instead, research points accrue automatically over time, but you have limited storage capacity for research points. 

If you aren't logging in every few hours to collect your points, you are losing out on future research capability. To increase your maximum research point storage capacity, and increase the rate at which points are accrued, advance along the middle branch of each of the skill trees.

Many research nodes are similar to skill nodes in that they give bonuses to stats like Tech, Resistance, and so on. Others, however, have completely different effects. Most notably, the research tree is where you can unlock slots for Survivor Expeditions, letting you send additional Heroes out on the row boat, speed boat, dirt bike, truck, and helicopter.

Rather than having five branches, the research tiers simply go up and down. Which direction you head depends on which Survivor Expedition abilities you want to unlock, although eventually, you'll end up filling all nodes.

 The labyrinth of research tier 4!

Have you found a particularly helpful skill or research tree unlocking strategy so far? Let us know in the comments section below!

How to Tame Creatures in Dark and Light,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/a/r/darknlight-d0435.jpg mhtp7/how-to-tame-creatures-in-dark-and-light Mon, 31 Jul 2017 09:06:19 -0400 ESpalding

As you journey through the world of Dark and Light, you will come across many of the world's other inhabitants -- its wild creatures. Some may be hostile, but the majority of them can also be tamed regardless of their persuasion. Whether you want to try and tame a sheep or something a lot larger and mythical, you'll need to know how to do it and this guide is going to show you how.

Equipment Needed for Taming in Dark and Light

Before you go venturing out to tame yourself a creature, there are some things that you are going to need to take with you -- a way to capture the beast and a way to lure the beast.

Using a Bow

Using a Bow weapon is a rank 2 Ranged Combat skill and gives you the ability to engage creatures at distance, as well as tame those creatures.

To make a Bow, you are going to have to gather:

  • Wood x15
  • Twine x50
Stone Hook Arrow

These special arrows are vital if you are going to have any luck taming creatures. You could say that they have an effect like a sedative, which makes the creature in question go into a sleep-like state, making it easier to capture. You are able to craft them when you reach rank 2 Ranged Combat.

To make Stone Hook Arrows you will need:

  • Stone-tipped Arrow x1
  • Magic Shards x1
  • Twine x5
  • Charcoal x3

What Animals can be Tamed in Dark and Light?

The bestiary in Dark and Light has about 150 creatures in it but not all of the creatures can be tamed. There are real-life animals as well as mythical ones, so if you have ever wanted to catch a Griffin, now's your chance! On your travels, you will come across both herbivores and carnivores, so you need to make sure you have enough of the correct food with you to tame them.

Some of the herbivores in the game include:

  • Sheep
  • Boars
  • Horses
  • Deer
  • Grut Stags

With a few exceptions, all of the herbivores in the game eat grass -- but there are other types of food which have a greater effect on the speed at which taming is successful. From least effective to most effective, these are the types of food you can use when taming herbivores:

Grass < Apples < Rare plant drops such as Lucky Clover < pre-made Herbivore feed.

Some of the carnivores in the game include:

  • Hyenas
  • Wolves
  • Bears
  • Vrocks (which are like 2-headed vultures)
  • Wyvern
  • Yeti

Also with few exceptions, all of the carnivores in the game eat raw meat, but there are other types of food which have a greater effect on the speed at which taming is successful. From least effective to most effective, these are the types of food you can use when taming carnivores:

Raw meat < Rotten meat (be aware that some creatures may not like this) < Raw fine meat < pre-made Carnivore feed

One thing you should note is that if you run out of feed before finishing taming, you will have to start again with more feed. All food needs to be presented to the creature in a Feeding Trough because if you don't give it enough feed, the taming process will end. 

Catching Creatures to Tame them in Dark and Light

So once you have your arrows, the right kind of feed, and feeding troughs, it is time to head out into the wild and find your intended target.

Once your quarry within sight, you need to target them with an arrow. When you fire the hook arrow at the animal, you need to left click to hook the other end of the rope to the ground.

The arrows don't start taking effect until the hooks have taken hold. As an animal runs away, the hook will embed itself and the torpor effect starts to take effect. If the animal is aggressive, you will need to fire multiple arrows and attach them to the ground so that when the animal is at a certain distance, the hook will snag and start the process.

When the creature goes down, you can place a trough next to it and fill it with food. As the creature starts to eat, the taming process starts. If the creature starts to come around from the effects of your arrows too soon -- before it is tamed -- you can fire another arrow into it to add to the torpor effect. However, as the creature is no longer moving, you will need to move away until the rope is taut and then fasten it into the ground.

With a little bit of time and patience, it won't be long before the creature will be 100% tamed!

We hope that this guide on how to tame creatures in Dark and Light has been useful. You really must let us know what kind of creatures you've managed to tame! Show us whats out there!

Make sure you check back to GameSkinny for more Dark and Light guides!

Crusaders of Light Life Skills Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/l/i/f/life-skills-head-594db.png vp99d/crusaders-of-light-life-skills-guide Sun, 30 Jul 2017 17:07:51 -0400 Ashley Gill

Crusaders of Light, a free-to-play mobile RPGseems to have all the major bells and whistles of typical MMO gaming. These include life skills, such as the ever-prevalent mechanics of crafting and gathering. You can make some good gold off of both activities, and it's not even all that difficult to do so.

There are currently two life skill paths in Crusaders of Light: Ore mining and plant gathering. Both certainly have their uses, but you can only choose one or the other, and once you've chosen, you also gain access to that life skill's basic refinement processes.

Let's go into the basic ins and outs of the game's life skill system, including how to get started and how to keep up your newfound crafting and gathering skills.

When Life Skills Open Up

At level 13, you will receive a quest to open up life skills. This is easily taken care of and won't take more than a minute or two of your time to complete.

Changing Life Skills

Don't stress over your choice of life skill, as you can easily drop one and pick up the other at any time via the life skills menu by tapping the "Forget Skill" button.

It doesn't cost anything to drop or pick up a skill, but you do permanently lose your proficiency level if you do decide to drop your current skill. You'll have to grind it up all over again.

How to Find Plant and Ore Nodes in Crusaders of Light

As with most other traditional MMORPGs, you have to find gathering nodes in Crusaders of Light to get those useful raw materials.

In the life skill menu (which is found at a tab at the bottom of the skill menu), tap on your gathering skill and then the Ore Exploration or Plant Exploration button depending on which you chose.

You'll be presented with the map, this time specially marked with areas with one to a number of nodes available. Tap on a node to auto-travel there.

When you arrive at your destination, you should be able to see multiple nodes on your minimap, and each one of those nodes can be harvested -- provided you have the stamina.

Thar be iron nodes!

Nodes come in small, medium, and large sizes. The larger the node, the more times you will be able to harvest it.

Gathering Limiters: Stamina and Character Level

If you're like most, you probably want to rush straight toward higher level materials. Unfortunately, there are limiters in place to prevent you from doing so.

The first limiter is your stamina. Stamina is used to gather materials and open the treasure chests you've surely seen on your travels. You can see your stamina gauge in the character attribute screen.

Each time you gather from a standard node, no matter the size, you spend 1 stamina. Gathering from your guild's special node patch costs 10 stamina each time you gather, but may give you more than just the typical materials.

Once your stamina reaches 0, you can no longer gather.

The second limiter, your character level, prevents you from leveling your life skill proficiency past your current level. So if your character is level 19, you're only going to be able to get your skill proficiency to 19.

These are both pretty reasonable requirements and, luckily enough, refining doesn't use any stamina at all.

How Do You Get More Stamina?

There are a few ways to do this. Some of which are:

  • Completing raids (Once per raid, per day)
  • Completing daily events
  • Completing reputation tasks (I'm not sure about the details on this yet)


This is actually very simple. When you initiate smelting, extracting, or weaving, the game will auto-run you toward the relevant workbench. It's done one by one and can take some time, so refining is the perfect time to take a break.

Which Life Skill Should You Choose?

I would say it's up to you, but frankly, the imbalance between miners and plant gatherers in Crusaders of Light is pretty huge. Far more people choose to mine ore than gather plants, and that's something to keep in mind.

Because there are so many people mining instead of plant gathering, going with plants is the easier money maker of the two. You can gather cotton and toss its refined products up on the trading house for an easy and fast gold profit. But the same can't be said for dark iron ingots due to the high supply compared to demand.

Conversely, there is surely going to be high demand for high-tier ores, bars, and other items gained from ore mining as more players hit higher levels and don't have the stamina (or patience) to hunt down materials for their own crafting.

You can choose based off prospective profits or your own long-term crafting needs, but I go the lesser-done route every time. Competition for ore nodes is fierce, and the potential gold to be made off of plant materials in the long and the short term just seems like a no-brainer.

That's about it for this rundown of Crusaders of Light's life skill system. It's fast, easy, and ultimately, profitable.

Make sure to check out our other Crusaders of Light guides to get even more tips, tricks, and strategies:

Hey! Pikmin Beginner's Guide -- Tips for Amassing Sparklium,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/5/3/153979233-0adc8.jpeg d0axb/hey-pikmin-beginners-guide-tips-for-amassing-sparklium Sun, 30 Jul 2017 16:47:24 -0400 Autumn Fish

When you crash land in Hey! Pikmin, you're spaceship tells you that you'll need to collect Sparklium as fuel in order to return home to Hocotate. Over the course of your adventure, you'll encounter different colored Pikmin with unique abilities that can help you collect far more Sparklium than you would be able to on your own. With their help, you'll have no problem collecting the 30,000 Sparklium you need to fly back home.

Following these simple tips, you'll hit your Sparklium threshold well before you ever come face-to-face with the game's final boss.

Don't Rush Hey! Pikmin -- Take Time to Explore

Every level hides treasures in various nooks and crannies. Take the time to hunt down these special treasures, as they'll be your main source of Sparklium throughout your journey.

While you're exploring, keep in mind that you may not be able to backtrack if you progress too far in the level, so think carefully about which paths you'll take. Afterall, you don't want to find yourself trapped at the exit to a level on a near-perfect run with only one treasure left to find.

Unlock and Complete Bonus Levels

Every Sector has a Bonus Level that you can unlock and complete for the chance at some extra treasure. (Check out our guide on How to Unlock Bonus Levels here.) It'll be a challenge to collect all of the treasure in each Bonus Level, but the extra Sparklium these treasures provide is well worth it.

Visit the Sparklium Springs Every Day

Each Sector has a Sparklium Spring that unlocks by completing certain levels. Visiting the Sparklium Springs prompts you to play a mini-game where you collect balls of Sparklium to see how much you can amass before time runs out. The Sparklium Springs in every Sector reset daily, so be sure to return to them each day for a large boost in your Sparklium reserves.

Hey! Pikmin Beginner's Guide Tips and Tricks for Amassing Sparklium Manage Pikmin Park

Manage Pikmin Park

Make sure that the Pikmin in Pikmin Park are always working if you can help it. Clearing out the park is an excellent way to find spare Sparklium and, eventually, treasure. Just set them up and head out on your next Expedition since they're not going to make any progress with you watching. When the left and right sides of the map are clear, you'll unlock the southern-most areas for the chance at even more treasure.

Scan Hey! Pikmin Compatible amiibo

Finally, you may use amiibo to top off your Sparklium reserves, though don't expect them to be a massive help. Compatible MarioAnimal Crossing, and Splatoon amiibo can be scanned straight into the game as treasure, while non-compatible amiibo will just give you straight Sparklium once per day. Note, however, that scanning the Pikmin and Olimar amiibo will just give you more Pikmin, not Sparklium.

Keep these tips in mind and you're bound to blast past the Sparklium threshold before you can say "Take me back to Hocotate!" Be sure to check out some more of our Hey! Pikmin guides while you're hanging about.

Kingdoms and Castles Achievements Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/r/s/z/rsz-kingdoms-7de49.jpg j9myj/kingdoms-and-castles-achievements-guide Sun, 30 Jul 2017 16:15:41 -0400 ESpalding

Released on July 20, Kingdoms and Castles is an indie city-building simulator developed by indie developers Lion Shield. In Kingdoms and Castles, players must start by building a tiny village that ultimately transforms into an imposing castle and medieval city. Overall, the game features 12 Steam achievements for you to unlock as you progress from tiny hamlet to a powerful fiefdom and beyond.

While some of the achievements are pretty straight forward, some of them are going to need a little more work to complete. So here is our guide to Kingdoms and Castles' achievements.

Related: How to Tax in Kingdoms and Castles

Population Achievements for Kingdoms and Castles

Your First Hamlet

This is the first achievement you will get. It comes when you build your first keep. As directed by the in-game tool tips, you will find your Castle Keep under the "Castle" menu tab at the bottom of the screen. Make sure you place your keep in a position that is relatively near resources such as fertile land or woodland to provide you with land to farm and wood for building.

Your First Village

As you start to work on gathering resources, you need to make sure that you also start to build more houses. The first kind of dwelling you get is called a Hovel, which can house up to five citizens. To get this achievement, you need to raise your population to 25+ citizens.

Your First Town

This is similar to the previous Your First Village achievement, but you need to raise your population to 100+ citizens.

Your First City

This is similar to the previous two achievements, but you need to raise your population to 250+ citizens.

The following achievements are also population related Kingdoms and Castles achievements, but are more difficult to obtain:

  • Humble Kingdom
    • Raise your population to 1000+ citizens.
  • Thriving Kingdom
    • Raise your population to 1500+ citizens.
  • Dignified Kingdom
    • Raise your population to 2000+ citizens.
  • Magnificent Kingdom
    • Raise your population to 3500+ citizens.
  • Kingdom of the Gods
    • Raise your population to 5000+ citizens.

To more efficiently increase your population, you need to fully exploit the map:

  • Make sure you are prioritizing very fertile land over fertile land. This yields a higher quantities of food. With higher food production, you will be able to sustain a higher population.

  • You are bound to lose citizens during Viking raids, so you need to have built adequate defenses. Consider having some of your population behind city walls and make sure you have enough Archers and Ballista Towers, a large enough army, or enough Turrets to see off any threats.

  • If you find yourself running out of space to build housing, don't worry. Later on in the game you get the option to build piers. These piers can support buildings, so they also make for great housing. Just be aware that they will be easy targets for Vikings.

  • A great way for draw people into your city is to hold festivals in your Town Square. Prior to holding a festival, make sure you have enough housing to accommodate any visitors who decide to stay. Multiple town squares mean multiple festivals -- which will hopefully make people stay.

Combat Based Achievements in Kingdoms and Castles

Slayer of Dragons

While you've been worrying about whether or not Vikings are going to invade your city, you might have forgotten that Dragons also exist in the land of Kingdoms and Castles. You will need to make sure that you have adequate Archers and Ballista Towers to stave off these flying menaces. You will get the Slayer of Dragons achievement when you kill a Dragon with an Archer or Ballista.

Slayer of Ogres

As if the Vikings and Dragons weren't enough, you also have to protect yourself against giant Ogres! These units will easily bash through your walls and towers if they aren't stopped quick enough. You will earn the Slayer of Ogres achievement by killing an Ogre with your Army or a Turret.

Miscellaneous Achievements in Kingdoms and Castles

Tower of Babel

Do you know what the Tower of Babel supposedly was? It was a great tower in the Bible that was apparently the birthplace of all world languages. It reached up to the heavens.

But no, there isn't an actual building in Kingdoms and Castles called the Tower of Babel. This achievement simply means that you need to build an incredibly tall tower in your city. You do this by building Castle Walls one on top of another. 

We hope that you find this guide on how to get all the achievements in Kingdoms and Castles useful. Make sure to check out our other Kingdoms and Castles guides!

Hey! Pikmin Guide - How to Unlock Bonus Levels,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/a/x/maxresdefault-57142.jpg tkohi/hey-pikmin-guide-how-to-unlock-bonus-levels Sun, 30 Jul 2017 15:57:18 -0400 Autumn Fish

Every Sector in Hey! Pikmin hides a challenging Bonus Level that's great for rounding out your hoard of Sparklium. These can be unlocked by completing certain requirements in a specific level in each Sector.

As you're working your way through a Sector, you'll notice that one of the levels you complete actually has a branching path on the map screen that leads to nothing. This signifies that you can unlock the Bonus Area from that level. If you're careful and observant, finding the entrance to the bonus level is a rather simple affair.

How to Unlock Bonus Levels in Hey! Pikmin

Levels that unlock a Bonus Area have not one but two exits! The exit that leads to the Bonus Level is generally locked behind a door that to open, requires you to find most of the Pikmin in the area. Make sure you search out and whistle every group of Pikmin to your party. Be patient while going through the level and don't give your enemies the chance to kill your Pikmin. Pick your fights and you should be fine by the time you reach the gate to the Bonus Level.

Hey! Pikmin Guide How to Unlock Bonus Levels

Make sure you explore every alternative route available. There might be Pikmin hiding in a cave or you may find the alternative exit leading to the Bonus Level. Be observant and check the top screen occasionally to make certain you don't miss anything. Remember that you can take a peek at the area map by tapping the L or R buttons.

Once you corral all of your Pikmin and reach the gate at the end of the level, exit via the ship to unlock the Bonus Level. Note that this only unlocks the Bonus Level, and if you want to unlock the level you'd get from normal progression, you'll have to complete the level you just came through again and take the main exit. You don't have to take the normal progression, however, since completing the Bonus Level provides you with an alternate path to finish the Sector.

Armed with this knowledge, it won't be long before you unlock and complete the Bonus Levels in every Sector. Be sure to check back with GameSkinny for more Hey! Pikmin guides coming your way.

Last Day on Earth: Survival -- How to Get Every Weapon,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/l/a/s/lastdayonearthheaderbanner-54995.jpg cbzyk/last-day-on-earth-survival-how-to-get-every-weapon Sun, 30 Jul 2017 15:53:37 -0400 Seth Zulinski

Hey, there. Glad to see you're still alive in the world of Last Day on Earth: Survival. By now, you've probably figured out how to fill up water bottles and make some food -- but we know what you're really after in this zombie-eat-person world: weapons. Lucky for you, we have plenty of extra tickets to the gun show. 

While some weapons can be found on fallen enemies, in drop crates, and via other sources of swag (listed as Looted below), the majority of weapons in the game are made by you. It can be hard to piece together what your de facto zombie destroyer is when you're in the dark, but with a little bit of digging (and some help from our friends over at the Last Day on Earth Wikia) we found the sweet stat spread so you can find your favorite method of mayhem for surviving your Last Day on Earth. 

Here is each weapon in the game, as well as that weapon's type, damage, speed, DPS, and sneak attack where applicable. 

Weapon Name Type Damage Speed DPS Sneak Attack
  Spear  Crafted   10   1.0  10   30
  Hatchet  Crafted   7   0.9  7.7   21
  Pickaxe  Crafted   7   1.1  7.7   21
  Torch  Crafted   12   1.1  13.2   36
  Makeshift Bat  Crafted   14   1  14   42
  Cleaver  Crafted   17   1.4  23.8   51
  Crowbar  Crafted   17   1.6  27.2   51
  Nail Board  Crafted   22   1  22  66
  Shovel  Crafted   27   1  27   81
  Spiked Devastator  Crafted   27   1.3  35.1   81
  Glock 17  Crafted   20   3.3  66   N/A
  Skull Crusher  Crafted   45   0.7  31.5   135
  Machete  Crafted   30   1.3  39   90
  VSS Vintorez  Crafted   50   2  100   N/A
  Saw Blade Mace  Crafted   55   0.7  38.5   165
  S&W Magnum  Crafted   -   -  -   N/A
  Shotgun Crafted   70   0.9  63   N/A
  M16  Crafted   12   8.3  99.6   N/A
  AK-47  Crafted   15   8.3  124.5   N/A
  The Dragunov  Crafted   -   -  -   N/A
  Turret  Crafted  -   - -   N/A
  Mortar  Crafted   -   -  -   N/A
 Hammer  Looted   8   1.7  13.6   24
  Hockey Stick  Looted   15   1.3  19.5   45
  Golf Club  Looted   18   1.1  19.8   54
  Baseball Bat  Looted   20   1  20   60
  Paddle  Looted   20   0.8  16   60
  Road Sign  Looted   30   0.7  21   90
  Katana  Looted   35   1.3  45.5   105
  Minigun  Looted     17     8.3  141.1   N/A

Now that you've picked out your tools of the trade, the hard part begins. See, crafting in Last Day on Earth: Survival has a few requirements -- to unlock most items, you need to be at a certain character level. Once they are, a range of skill points is needed to "unlock" that schematic (usually a single point). Finally, you're going to need the actual materials to make the weapon itself. 

If that sounds like a lot, never fear -- we've broken it down into zombie-bite sized chunks below:

Weapon Name Level Requirement Materials Needed
  Spear  - 3 Pine Logs
  Hatchet  -  3 Pine Logs
3 Limestone
    Pickaxe    -   3 Pine Logs
3 Limestone
 Torch   14   5 Pine Logs
1 Animal Rawhide
2 Rope
  Makeshift Bat  6   5 Pine Planks
3 Duct Tape
  Cleaver  18   5 Iron Bar
5 Leather
4 Pine Planks
  Crowbar  22   7 Iron Bars
3 Leather
  Nail Board  28   5 Pine Planks
8 Nails
3 Duct Tape
  Shovel  34   8 Pine Planks
7 Iron Bars
5 Nails
  Spiked Devastator  34   10 Iron Bars
5 Empty Cans
5 Leather
8 Nails
  Glock 17*  40   20 Steel Bars
15 Bolts
8 Weapon Parts
  Skull Crusher  40   12 Iron Bars
12 Nails
5 Leather
4 Duct Tape
  Machete  52   15 Iron Bars
3 Pine Planks
12 Leather
  VSS Vintorez*  58   14 Weapon Parts
8 Titan Bars
10 Ash Planks
  Saw Blade Mace  64   15 Iron Bars
10 Pine Planks
5 Duct Tape
5 Scrap Metal
12 Leather
  S&W Magnum*  70   2 Weapon Parts
4 Tungsten Bars
2 Ash Planks
1 Duct Tape
  Shotgun*  76   2 Weapon Parts
5 Tungsten Bars
3 Ash Planks
2 Duct Tape
  M16*  76   4 Weapon Parts
8 Tungsten Bars
5 Ash Plank
  AK-47*  88   4 Weapon Parts
7 Tungsten Bars
5 Ash Planks
  The Dragunov*  88   5 Weapon Parts
10 Tungsten Bars
5 Ash Planks
  Turret*  88   8 Weapon Parts
15 Tungsten Bars
5 Hi-Tech Components
10 Ball Bearings
8 Wiring
  Mortar*  88   8 Weapon Parts
15 Tungsten Bars
20 Ball Bearing
15 Wiring


 *Currently uncraftable in-game due to unimplemented materials or workspaces. Some may be found through various packs/crates or throughout the game. 

Of course, some items can't be crafted in Last Day on Earth: Survival no matter how advanced your character is and must be found in the crates, bags, and corpses (hostile and otherwise) found out in the world -- or purchased through the Trader.

While most of these spawn in a grab-bag, RNG-confetti style all over the map, one weapon specifically has a zeroed in "spawn location" -- that is, it will appear in the same location in a new game every time

The bad news is, it's only a guaranteed drop on your first trip through the spawn location. The good news is, it's a lot better than a wood plank with a couple nails through it:

Weapon Loot Location
 Minigun   Banker Alfa -- Basement, Floor 1
  Guaranteed drop on first run only

Of course, you can always add a little more firepower to your arsenal by picking up one of the many in-game packs available for purchase (some containing valuable, currently uncraftable firearms) but with the lists above and some smart use of the free Minigun the game hands you, you can easily grind horde after horde without dropping a dime. 

All it's gonna take you is 18 Tungsten bars and 4 Weapon Parts...


That's a wrap for this guide! If you need more help with the staying alive in this mobile game, be sure to check out the rest of our Last Day on Earth guides for other tips and tricks to help you get ahead:

Don't be That Guy: Five Tips in Surviving Online Competition,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/m/competitiveheader-2dec4.jpg drc9n/dont-be-that-guy-five-tips-in-surviving-online-competition Sat, 29 Jul 2017 16:00:02 -0400 Will Dowell

Competitive games have become exceedingly popular on the online front. May it be Counter-Strike: Global Offensive or StarCraft 2, people have been devoting hours of their time to mastering the intricacies of their preferred game. But for all the pros that pull off incredible ults and go on insane kill streaks, gaming communities have had an influx of newcomers struggling in the new, highly-competitive environment.

There are a few ways to make the transition into these highly competitive communities easier. From improving communication to understanding the competitive mindset, players can learn and improve in the face of hardcore competition. These five tips will help you survive online competition -- even in casual matches.

Get a Headset with a Good Microphone

One of the most important pieces of equipment needed for competitive shooters (or any competitive game, for that matter), a microphone is essential for communication and victory. One of the biggest challenges in team-based competition is to get all players to work together. Without a microphone, this becomes nearly impossible as your communication is severely limited. In addition, teammates likely won't take you seriously without a good headset and microphone. That may sound petty, but when immediate communication is essential for victory, the lack of a good mic makes you a hindrance to your team -- not an asset. 

Luckily, you don't need to break the bank to get a microphone. Headsets can be as cheap as $20 and can last you multiple years. If you really want to get into competitive gaming, a microphone is essential. Check out our list of gaming headset reviews and guides to get started. 

Learn the Terms

With that microphone, you'll have the tech to better communicate with your teammates, but you'll also need the vocabulary to facilitate cohesion. Learning the terms and phrases used in each game you're playing will allow you to understand your teammates and explain your thoughts clearly. This can be as simple as understanding the common terms seen in MOBAs to as complex as learning the specific strategies in StarCraft 2.

While you will be able to learn these terms through extensive playtime, checking out websites and YouTube videos can provide a quicker understanding. You don't need to study everything, you just need to know enough to communicate with your team.

Understand Your Mistakes

No one starts out perfect, and you will make plenty of mistakes as you try a new game. Allow yourself to fail and learn from those mistakes. Even if it seems overwhelming, remember you are learning how to play the game. Enjoy each match, even when you're struggling. It takes time to get better. Don't put too much pressure on yourself to win. There's always next game.

However, you do want to learn from your mistakes and to do so, you must be willing to be self-critical. An easy way to analyze your mistakes is to record your gameplay. While some games have the ability to re-watch matches, you should use third-party software (such as OBS or integrated Nvidia recording software) to record your games anyway. This way, you have more control in your recordings, allowing for deep analyzation of your performance. Remember to find solutions for your mistakes, as just watching your mistakes over and over again will drain your confidence.

Don't forget to listen to your teammates, either. While they will criticize you, they also can provide helpful advice that will improve your matches. You can go even a step further and ask your teammates for constructive criticism. This will take a lot humility, but it is important to get advice when you can. They may be harsh, but the feedback you'll get is essential improving your gameplay.

Master That Mute Button

But sometimes people are just jerks. They scream slurs and call you every name under the sun. When you encounter these people, mute them and report them immediately. You don't have to deal with that toxicity. Regardless of what others say, it is not part of the game and is not acceptable. These games are meant to be fun, and you don't have to listen to people actively trying to ruin the game.

This also means that you shouldn't be that jerk, either. While you may get angry at teammates or get frustrated at the game, that is no excuse for being an a**hole to other players. Don't belittle others because they're not as good as you and don't accept that belittlement when it happens to yourself. Mute, report, and block these players because everyone deserves a good time.

Don't be Afraid to Walk Away

Sometimes the game just becomes too much. People are excessively rude and mean, the game becomes frustrating, you're just getting tired of the same routine. Taking breaks is not only healthy, but essential in truly enjoying competitive games. Allow yourself to walk away and don't be afraid to stop playing altogether. If you're not having fun, play something else. Gaming is huge and full of opportunities; don't ignore that potential just because you're playing a game you're not enjoying.


Jumping into a competitive game is challenging. Like anything in life, the first few hours will be rough, but things do get better. If you're truly not having fun, find another game, there's plenty of competitive and non-competitive games to choose from. With the strength of online gaming, a new competition is just around the corner.

How to Tax in Kingdoms and Castles,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/r/s/z/rsz-kingdoms-44556.jpg y91y2/how-to-tax-in-kingdoms-and-castles Sat, 29 Jul 2017 11:39:06 -0400 ESpalding

Every city building sim has an element of economics brewed into it, and Kingdoms and Castles is no different. Even though we are building a medieval city with towering defensive walls and imposing castles, money for the upkeep of these monoliths and money to further future development is still needed. This is where Taxes play their part in Kingdoms and Castles.

Related: Kingdoms and Castles Achievements Guide

OK. So, you've built up your city as far as you can using the "free" buildings during the initial part of the game. These are your houses, bakeries, barns, windmills, etc. They all cost zero gold to build, but early on, your residents will start suggesting that you build things like Churches. These require gold to build and the primary way to get said gold it through taxing your citizens. To be able to tax in Kingdoms and Castles, you need to upgrade your castle.

How to Upgrade Your Castle in Kingdoms and Castles

Upgrading your castle doesn't necessarily mean building on your existing castle, although that does happen in due course. Instead, upgrading your castle means affixing add-ons onto your castle. As you place an upgrade in your city, your castle also gets bigger.

If you look at your building menu tabs at the bottom of the screen, you will see the Castle Tab. This tab holds all the buildings associated with constructing, upgrading, and maintaining your Castle Keep. There are options in there for buildings such as the Chamber of War, Ballista Towers, and a Great Hall, but to start taxing your citizens, you are going to need to build a Throne Room.

The Throne Room costs 10 Wood and 50 Stone to build.

How to Start Taxing Citizens in Kingdoms and Castles

For once, Kingdoms and Castles makes Taxes in a game very easy to set up and monitor. All you need to do is click on your Throne Room and change the rate at which you want to tax your citizens. To start off with, 1 gold will suffice -- that is until you reach a point where your population has really grown and you need to start gearing up for impending Viking invasions.

Still captured from Joshua Isaac's Let's Play on YouTube

You will, however, need to be careful as to how much you tax your citizens because each gold you impose will have a negative effect on how happy your citizens are. You'll need to balance out the amount of tax you take compared with what you are building for your citizenry. Essentially, they will need to see where their taxes are going to be OK with it.

Once you have your gold taxing under control, you will be able to afford to build bigger and better buildings for your city, including all kinds of city-wide defenses.

We hope that you find this mini guide on how to set up taxes in Kingdoms and Castles useful. Make sure to check out our other Kingdoms and Castles guides

Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels - Match Strategy Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/m/s/cmstrat-aacbe.png ih5ue/card-monsters-3-minute-duels-match-strategy-guide Sat, 29 Jul 2017 11:18:53 -0400 Craig Snyder

Collectible card games are a special type of game where you're (hopefully) left feeling like you get the win over your opponent due to having super game knowledge and experience… or, well, luck. Mechanics aren't needed for games like Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels, and being such means it's imperative that you're smarter than your opponent.

Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels has a few core mechanics that are a little different from similar games -- like Hearthstone --, and understanding them in their entirety is one of the things that's going to determine if you're a winner or loser in this game. Here are the main strategies that are going to help you win the most matches.

Understand Attack Priority and Movement

Playing through the tutorial, you should have quickly noticed that monsters change slots as ones placed before them die. This means that if all three slots on your board slots are filled, the monster in slot 1 dies and the monster in slot 2 shifts into slot 1. The monster in slot 3 shifts into slot 2.

Melee attackers only attack directly in front of them, while ranged attackers will prioritize targets, starting from the diagonal corner furthest away from them. Chaos attackers prioritize enemy monsters at random. Having a full understanding of your monsters' attack priorities and movements across the board will allow you to plan ahead for each turn, having your board in a state that may be greatly advantageous in the future.

For example, rather than using Sacrifice, it may be worth it to place a chaos attacker in slot 2 (where it can't attack) knowing that your monster in slot 1 will soon die. It may take damage after the turn in which you play it, but it'll be in play and ahead of the "turn curve" on the turn where slot 1 dies and the chaos attacker, therefore, shifts in and is able to attack.

For a game as simple and as easy to pick up as Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels, there's definitely some depth to the strategy in these two mechanics of the game.

Play Melee Characters First

This goes back to understanding board slots. Your first drop of the game needs to be a melee monster or you have to consider forfeiting your turn. Forfeiting your turn will give you extra mana on your next turn, but the tempo loss suffered may already be enough to shut you out of the game.

If you don't have a melee monster on your first turn of the game, you have the option of playing a ranged monster with the intention of replacing it with a melee monster as soon as possible. Otherwise, that monster is just going to die for free.

Think Turns Ahead

In Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels, not only do you have to play against the immediate threats on the current turn but you need to be looking one or two turns ahead and considering the attack and health totals of the board you're going to be against -- and in what slots they'll be placed.

For example, if you know your opponent's monster in slot 1 will die after your turn, look at their monster in slot 3. Knowing that this monster will then shift into slot 2, the attack power of the card that you have or will play in your slot 3 needs to be able to contest it (since your slot 3, if ranged, will prioritize attacks against their slot 2).

Use Items Efficiently

A trap that many players fall into is using as much mana as is available to them on their turn just to be "efficient" with their mana pool. However, if that means you're wasting an item card, then is that really being efficient?

For example, if your only play is to equip a +1 ranged attack item on a ranged monster that will kill the monster it's prioritizing even without the +1 ranged attack, is it really worth it? Will it end up dying the next turn? If so, using that item card was a complete waste of resources. However, it could be worthwhile if the target it'll prioritize next, after the first monster it's prioritizing is dead, has higher health.

You really only want to be using your items when they guarantee a kill at the end of your turn or if they're being placed on a monster with high health. Don't be afraid to pass a turn if your only play is equipping an item that you don't need. Your mana will roll over to your next turn where you may have additional options.


At this point, you're ready to head to the Arena and PvP against other players! Remember these tips and always keep in mind that RNG and luck are always factors in card games. The card draw mechanic forces it to be that way. Don't get too down on yourself if games don't go the way you expected, and practice, practice, practice! If you have any questions or comments, leave me a reply below and I'll get back to you!

Be sure to check out our other Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels guides:

Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels - Deck Building Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/m/d/cmdeck-bf74c.png sr9j9/card-monsters-3-minute-duels-deck-building-guide Sat, 29 Jul 2017 11:12:54 -0400 Craig Snyder

Once you've figured out the basics of a CCG, building your first homebrewed deck is one of the most satisfying and rewarding experiences. It shows that you have a real grasp for the game's mechanics and strategic side.

Even as one of the simpler mobile card games, Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels has some pretty interesting game mechanics that contribute to some very strategic and meticulous deck building. You're going to find yourself refining your decks over and over as you play this game, and each time you do that, it's going to feel more satisfying.

Let's talk about the basics of building the perfect winning deck in Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels.

Balance Your Attack Ranges

There are three monster slots on each side of the board in a Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels match. These slots are numbered, with 1 being center and most forward and 2 and 3 being on the left and right sides further back. Slot 1 is for melee and chaos attackers, while slots 2 and 3 are for ranged attackers.

Knowing this, it would make sense that a third of your monster cards in your deck be for melee monsters and the rest for ranged. However, that math isn't perfect, being that there's eight monster card slots, and that's okay because there's still magic attackers to take into consideration. Magic attackers can be flexed into any of the three slots on the board.

I've found that the optimal setup is to have a deck of three melee attackers, four ranged attackers, and one magic attacker. While that's not a perfect ratio, you have to consider the importance of having melees. When your board is empty, you have to place monster cards in order. With melee being slot 1, it's crucial that you have a melee card available for use. Having a ranged attacker in the melee slot renders them useless until they dies, whereas having a melee attacker in a ranged slot renders them useless until they rotates into slot 1 when the monsters before them die.

The easiest way to lose a match in Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels is by having monster cards in slots where they're unable to attack.

Prioritize "Fat" Monsters

In other card games similar to Card Monsters, when enemies attack your cards, they'll deal damage and then take damage according to your card's attack power. In this game, it doesn't work that way. If I have a 5/5 monster and I attack a 10/5 monster, I kill it and my 5/5 suffers no damage.

This makes it incredibly important to have resilient monster cards. A stat line like 8/4 will allow you to take down some of your opponent's most healthy monsters, but one of their cards with a lower mana value can trade into it and kill it off. A 4/1 will kill your 8/4 with no drawback.

That being said, you're going to want to have monsters with stat lines like 4/7, 3/6, and so on. These monsters will trade into valuable monsters of your opponent's while also being resilient enough to hold up against monsters with an attack at a higher mana value than the cost of yours.

Use No More than Three Card Colors

One of the most painful parts of having an extensive card collection is realizing that you can't just toss in your eight best monsters and expect it to work. Not only do you need a balance of attack ranges, but you have to match your card's colors as well.

In a 16-card deck of eight monsters and eight items, two card colors feels like the sweet spot once you've managed to collect enough cards. If your collection isn't yet beefy enough, then it's okay to go with three — but two (not including Silvers) is extremely consistent. This will ensure that the item cards you draw can be used on the monster cards you're holding in a huge majority of situations.

If you're including a large number of Silver cards in your deck — which I don't recommend — then you can stretch this to three card colors. Silver cards are extremely costly and should be avoided if you can manage it.

Match Your Items with Your Monsters

Vocem Fox is one of the first ranged attackers you'll get in Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels. A great item to use with Vocem Fox is Sight Bracers because they're also a Yellow and they provide +1 ranged attack and +1 armor. However, although they're a Yellow, Fighting Gloves would be bad to include because they give armor but +2 melee attack. Vocem Fox can't utilize melee attacks, so this item card is useless unless you have a Yellow melee attacker.

This creates a situation where you need to be strategic not only in the attack ranges and card colors you have, but also your strategy: it's optimal to try and dedicate a card color to a certain attack range. For example, if you dedicate the Yellows in your deck to being mostly ranged monsters, the Yellow items in your deck can all give ranged attack bonuses and will always be able to be put to use when drawn.

To avoid this problem entirely, which is something that you'll probably need to do until your collection grows, I recommend focusing mostly on item cards that provide armor. Armor can be used interchangeably by both melee and ranged attackers.

Buy Card Packs Slowly

In Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels, leveling up will allow you to unlock card packs with higher levels and provide you with increased chances of obtaining rarer, more powerful cards.

Many people suggest that you not even spend coins on card packs until Arena level 20 and above. However, I think a more balanced approach is to buy one or two sets of packs every time you level and slowly scale that up to maybe two or three sets of packs when you pass Arena level 20.

If you hold off on all of your coins and spend them on packs all at once, there's a pretty good chance that you're going to get a lot of duplicates. Getting duplicates is not what you want to be doing, but if you have to get them then, you want them to be higher level cards so that they can disenchant for a higher value. This is why it's really important to not buy loads of card packs right as you start the game.


One of the most fun parts of this game is experimenting with monster and item card combinations and finding a perfect balance between attack ranges, card colors, and item types. Doing it yourself makes it all that much more rewarding, and if you follow this guide then it won't be hard. If you have any questions or comments, leave me a reply below and I'll get back to you!

Be sure to check out our other Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels guides while you're at it to get that extra edge against your opponent:

Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels - Beginner's Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/a/r/cardmonsters-4ff72.png fqvqg/card-monsters-3-minute-duels-beginners-guide Sat, 29 Jul 2017 11:03:12 -0400 Craig Snyder

The massive success of Hearthstone has led us into a golden age of collectible card games. And like Hearthstone, many of them are taking a mobile-friendly approach.

Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels is a CCG for Android and iOS that simplifies a Hearthstone-like experience and, as the name entails, provides quick matches both against AI and users across the internet. Although Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels is one of the simpler CCGs out there, there's still some depth to it. If you're new to the game, here are some things you need to know right off the bat.

Complete Quests and Events

Quests don't stay around forever, so it's best to check on them frequently and complete them as often as you can. Doing so will keep a rotating door of quests available to you. Quests reward you with coins, crafting materials, and card packs.

Training missions are also worth completing. These battles against AI opponents may be boring, but the rewards make it well worth it. If you're able to complete these missions on your first attempt, you can earn a large sum of coins and a card pack.

Grind Card Packs

Like most CCGs, expanding your card collection is a slow grind. However, there are a lot of different ways you can do this in Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels.

The most natural way is by winning PvP matches and leveling up. You're guaranteed a pack at every new level, and winning a PvP match can often result in obtaining a card pack as a reward. As you progress, you'll eventually reach a new rank. Reaching a new rank guarantees that you'll get a card pack with at least one rare card inside.

Alternatively, be sure to visit Ariann the Fortune Teller often and tap the crystal ball. Doing so may earn you a card pack, coins, or crafting materials.

The last way you can earn packs is by buying them from the shop. Winning PvP matches and completing missions will earn you coins. Once you've earned 2480 coins, you'll have enough to buy a set of 10 card packs from the shop.

Match Card Colors

Although this is a part of the tutorial, it's worth going over.  When you're building your deck, you need to be sure that the items you're including are a part of the same color of the monsters in your deck. For example, chaos cards are purple, and only Purple monsters can use Purple items.

The exception to this rule is Silver cards. These cards can be used by any color monster, but they have much higher mana costs. It's up to you to determine if the flexibility of these cards is worth the increased cost.

Utilize Weapon Item Cards

As some of the strongest utility cards in Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels, it's important that you're familiar with how weapon item cards work. 

These cards are able to grant your monster additional attacks even if they don't match the attack type of the weapon item card. For example, you can have a melee attacker throwing out magic attacks.

Using weapon item cards on a monster will still require that you follow the rules of how rows work. If you have a ranged attacker and you equip them with a melee weapon item card, they won't be able to use the melee weapon item if they're in the back row. This creates a problem because moving them to the front row will then disable the use of their ranged attack.

As such, the best way to utilize weapon item cards is by using ones that grant magic attacks. Magic can be used from any row and therefore won't give you this problem.

Sacrifice Useless Cards

There will come times where you draw a card from your deck that offers you nothing in the current match. That's where Sacrifice is a valuable option. Sacrificing a card will remove it from your hand and leave it ineligible for the rest of the match, but it will refund you the mana cost corresponding to that card.

You can Sacrifice only once per turn, and the optimal strategy is to do this on your item cards. New item cards won't appear until you use them on your monster cards from the same color.

Crafting and Disenchanting

The crafting system in Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels has some depth to it and it may be hard to understand at first. Going into your collection, starting at level 5, you can upgrade your cards. Your cards have a level and upgrading them to raise that level make the cards more powerful. Different card rarities and types have different level limits:

  • Monsters (Common and Rare): Level 5
  • Monsters (Epic and Legendary): Level 4
  • Items (Common and Rare): Level 3
  • Items (Epic and Legendary): Level 2

When you reach Proficiency Level 3, you're also able to craft cards that you want and don't already have. You just select the Craft option under My Collection. Select the card you want to craft and you'll see the materials required. Naturally, better cards require more materials.

Similarly, you can disenchant cards that you already have and don't want in the same way. This also unlocks at Proficiency Level 3. Select the card from your collection and you'll see the Disenchant option. This will give you materials towards crafting new cards.


Once you've got the basics down, improving at Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels is all about knowing the strength of cards and building an optimal deck. If you have any questions or comments, leave me a reply below and I'll get back to you!

Be sure to check out our other Card Monsters: 3 Minute Duels guides:

Fable Fortune Shapeshifter Deck Building Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/2/0/1/20170728153750-29159.jpg tm7uw/fable-fortune-shapeshifter-deck-building-guide Sat, 29 Jul 2017 10:03:58 -0400 Ty Arthur

With six different classes to choose from and an ever-growing list of cards, putting together a balanced deck that can dominate in multiplayer matches can be a serious challenge for those just learning Fable Fortune's ins and outs.

One of the strongest classes available that brings focuses on direct damage and quick control, the Shapeshifter is currently the dominant class choice in Fable Fortune's Early Access. Below we explain how to make this class work for you and show a sample deck build for quick wins.

Just getting started with the game and haven't figured out the board layout and class focuses yet? Check out our Fable Fortune beginner's guide here instead.

Neutral Card Choices

The Shapeshifter class is fairly easy to create synergy, with a horde of neutral cards that all deal damage when they are first played.

For a starting deck where you haven't yet opened many packs, Hobbes are a good way to go, specifically Hobbe Bomber with Hobblet and Hobbe Ambusher for fast control of the board and quick strikes once the Guard enemy is down.

For another early, cheap card that damages when it lands on the board, you can't go wrong with either Potato Farmer or Redcap Lobber. For your Trophy card, pick The Boot as another straight damage option. If that's not an option, Pointy Stick is a good basic choice for improving any creature on the board.

When you start opening packs and crafting cards, you may want to switch from Hobbes to Bandits, specifically Lousy Crossbowman, Roodridge Butcher, Outlaw Chief, and Hidden Footpad if you don't mind a higher-gold cost deck.

 Cheap and easy to find, Hobbes offer excellent quick damage synergy

Shapeshifter Class Cards

The heart of any Shapeshifter deck in Fable Fortune should be Ambush and Snarling Surge, whether you are going for quick control, big creatures, or a direct damage deck. At only 3 gold, they are amazing for clearing out enemies or healing yourself while directly damaging the opponent.

The 6-gold Surge Of Fangs is a solid board-clearing option for when the opponent has too many small creatures for you to deal with at once. On the cheap-gold-cost side, Stunning Slash is incredibly useful for making large enemy creatures useless for a turn, although you can get better wins by going straight for damaging creatures instead.

From there, it's time to decide if you want a Balverine-focused deck or instead shift toward control. 

On the Balverine front, use Call Of The Balverine, Blooded Balverine, Predatory Balverine, and White Balverine for a solid selection of big creatures. Alternatively, you could instead opt for Diseased Balverine coupled with Guard to make the opponent hurt himself. For the control-focused deck, go with Howl Of Despair, Brown Bear, and White Hart instead, then build around those concepts with neutral cards.

 This is where judicious use of Guard works to your advantage

Shapeshifter Class Ability

In Fable Fortune, the Shapeshifter's basic Rend class ability is always useful, letting you ping any creature or opponent for 1 damage any time you have 2 gold lying around at the end of a turn.

Keep this in mind before you cast anything from your hand because you can frequently ping enemies down, get in a quick attack with a wounded existing creature or a Rush creature from your hand, and then still use damaging spells for full board control in a single turn.

Going the Evil route is an awesome choice since Draining Rend gives you healing in addition to pinging, but if you aren't low on health, going Good can be even better, as Focused Rend doubles the damage straight to your opponent from 1 to 2.

 Shapeshifter class abilities

Sample Shapeshifter Deck

This sample deck requires having opened at least a few card packs, and it has a median-focused gold cost curve with a balance of direct damage, board control, and medium-to-strong creatures.

There are plenty of ways to modify this basic deck, allowing you to go in different directions. When you finally get newer or more powerful cards, replace Stinger with Voice Of Skorm for more board control options, or go with Hobbes instead of Bandits. For more of a Balverine-focused deck, swap out Henchmen with White Balverine.

  • Ambush x2
  • Blooded Balverine x2
  • Potato Farmer x2
  • Bowerstone Guard x2
  • Stinger x2
  • Call Of The Balverine x2
  • Cursed Warrior x2
  • Friendly Crone x2
  • Snarling Lunge x2
  • Elite Grenadier x2
  • Bowerstone Sheriff x2
  • Screamer
  • Predatory Balverine x2
  • Outlaw Chief x2
  • Surge Of Fangs x2
  • Henchman

 Board control with Surge of Fangs

What did you think of our sample deck, and what Shapeshifter strategies have you found to work best while battling other players? Let us know in the comments section below! And be sure to check out our other Fable Fortune guides while you're at it! 

Fable Fortune Beginner's Strategy Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-a5673.jpg cfljz/fable-fortune-beginners-strategy-guide Sat, 29 Jul 2017 09:51:03 -0400 Ty Arthur

Much like Elder Scrolls Legends before it, Fable Fortune takes an existing RPG franchise and gives it the Hearthstone CCG treatment.

In this current phase of Early Access, there are no tutorial missions that teach you specifically how the gameplay mechanics work or explain the board layout. You basically just have to play some practice missions and learn it all yourself -- or you could read our complete Fable Fortune beginner's guide below!

Fable Fortune Gameplay Basics

Although the board looks a little daunting at first, here's the thing to keep in mind -- if you've played Magic: The Gathering or any rounds of Hearthtone, you essentially already know how to play.

Deck And Card Layout

The top left gold number indicates the number of gold a card costs, while the next two numbers are the creature's strength (the damage it deals when attacking or defending) and the creature's health (the damage it can take before dying). Unlike in Magic, you can't go above max health for your player in Fable Fortune, but you can pump health well above max for individual creatures on the board.

Beyond those basics, you just need to learn how the jargon has shifted in this particular CCG iteration:

  • Gold serves the role of mana, starting each match with 3 gold and gaining 1 every round until the match ends
  • Bound means Summoning Sickness, with creatures unable to attack during the round in which they are summoned
  • Rush means a creature can attack the round it is summoned
  • Big Entrance means something happens when the card is played
  • Last Laugh means something happens when the card dies
  • Stun prevents a creature from attacking next turn
  • Safeguard means something happens if the creature gains the Guard attribute
  • Guard means enemy creatures must attack this creature first, and if the Guarded creature remains, enemies can't attack you or other creatures

However, there are four segments on the player side of the board that will be unfamiliar: the quest goal banner at the far left (see full info below), the gold chest indicating your number of gold (rather than mana), the shield Guard icon second from the right, and your class ability to the far right.

Any creature on the board can be given the Guard ability for the cost of 1 gold using the shield icon. Giving creatures Guard is frequently part of a quest, and many cards produce different effects when they are placed in Guard. Learning when and how to use Guard is critical to matches.

In most cases, you want Guard active on your healthiest creature so your opponent can't hit you directly, but using Guard in connection with skills is equally important. For instance, if you have a creature with a Last Laugh ability that summons other creatures or that causes the base creature to automatically reanimate, that can be a better option for Guard than a creature with higher health.

 The Fable Fortune Board

Deck Building in Fable Fortune

Fable Fortune revolves around 30-card decks, with a pool of neutral cards that anyone can use, while the remainder of your cards must be chosen from your class card pool.

As with Hearthstone, always think about the gold cost distribution of your deck. Focus first on putting in plenty of 0 - 3 gold cost cards to keep yourself competitive at all stages, but with a handful of 6 - 8 cost for bringing out the big bruisers in the late game.

From there, fill in class-specific mid-cost cards that work toward your overall strategy. As with most CCGs of this nature, the key here is to focus on synergy, both with your other cards and with your class ability. A deck that builds on a particular strength with lots of cards revolving around one ability will typically do better than a deck crammed full of high-cost cards with good stats.

If you aren't familiar or comfortable with a particular class yet, building a deck with synergy focused on neutral Hobbe or Bandit cards is always a quick and simple option.

 Building an Alchemist deck

Quests And Morality

There are two major changes to the formula with Fable Fortune: quests and morality. Before each match, you get to choose from a random assortment of quest paths. Completing particular quests will give you a bonus during the match, like getting a free card to play.

Quests involve objectives like summoning four creatures with a cost of 4 or lower, summoning four creatures with Last Laugh, putting four creatures into Guard mode, spending a certain amount of gold over the course of the match, and so on. The quest banner on the far left side of your board shows how close you are to completing the objective.

Obviously, tailor your quest options to your deck build. If you don't use cards with Last Laugh, picking that quest isn't particularly helpful.

 Choosing a quest path to get the Brandish card reward

Pulling from the Fable universe staples, partway through the match time will come to choose between going good or evil, which powers up and changes your class ability.

For instance, the Gravedigger's base ability is to summon a 1/1 creature with Rush that dies at the end of the turn. That's helpful in the early game, but not so much later on. If you choose Evil however, the ability transforms into a 2/1 Rush creature instead, while the path of Good gives you two separate 1/1 Rush creatures.

Remember how I mentioned card synergy above? Morality adds another level to your synergy options. Cards like the late-game Treasure Hunter will transform into two different versions depending on whether you choose Good or Evil, while Bloodstone Blackguard gives a bonus to creature strength if you choose Good or creature health if you choose Evil.

 Different transformation options for Treasure Hunter

Classes in Fable Fortune

Much like the hero Classes of Hearthstone, every deck starts with one of six different Fable heroes focused on different abilities and strategies. Each has a different 2 gold cost ability, as well as specific strengths and weaknesses that will change how you play.

Alchemist Class

Base ability: Concoct (Add a random Vial to your hand with features like increasing health or strength to a creature)

This class is fun to play and has cool combos, but it also has some critical flaws. There aren't as many board-clearing options and both the class ability and its many spells are dependent on you keeping your creatures constantly alive. If you lose board control, it's very difficult to regain it and achieve victory in the late game.

 Alchemist Class

Gravedigger Class

Base Ability: Exhume (summon a 1/1 creature with Rush that dies at the end of the turn)

This class utilizes hordes of Last Laugh cards that bring out more undead when your creatures die. There are two major paths to take here: focusing on board control by constantly summoning dead creatures and transforming stronger ones, or instead building your deck around cascading Hollowmen that frequently conjure more companions or trigger effects when they die. This is one of the top-tier classes, so if you are having trouble, trying Gravedigger is a good way to go.

 Gravedigger Class

Knight Class

Base Ability: Enrollment (summon a 1/1 peasant under your control)

Essentially the equivalent of the Plains deck from Magic, the Knight class focuses on summoning lots of small peasants and then triggering effects based on how many peasants are in play.

Like the Alchemist, there are limited board-clearing options here, with All Peasant And Correct your main option, turning all enemies and allies into 1/1 creatures. While you can get big, beefy creatures with a combo of Blacksmith + a horde of peasants, the problem is that your opponent will frequently whittle down your peasant horde before you get off a good combo.

 Knight Class

Merchant Class

Base Ability: Haggle (add a gold piece to your hand)

The Merchant class is your classic control deck, focused on Silencing enemies or even stealing them off the other side of the board and putting enemy cards into your hand. Many of the Merchant cards can be pumped up if you spend extra gold, or instead offer the player extra gold to use in a variety of situations.

 Merchant Class

Prophet Class

Base Ability: Restore (heal a creature of 2 health)

An all-around excellent pick for the beginner, the Prophet class is frequently better at board control than the Merchant, letting you lower enemy strength and remove their ability to Guard. All of your creatures will constantly have high health, and many of them get bonus strength when healed as well. Go forth and spread the good word with your armies!

 Prophet Class

Shapeshifter Class

Base Ability: Rend (deal 1 damage to an enemy creature)

If there's a clear best class, its almost certainly the Shapeshifter, who can easily dole out loads of damage with cards like Ambush, Stunning Slash, Snarling Lunge, and Surge of Fangs. Even tiny cards like Feral Squirrel can become powerhouses as you damage the enemy or cast buffing cards. The Stun ability of a huge range of cards also gives decent board control options.


Those are all the basics you need to know to get started in Fable Fortune! Stay tuned for full guides on deck building for each class, and be sure to let us know any tips you've learned for winning matches!

Yonder: The Cloud Catcher Chronicles Guide to Farming,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/y/o/n/yonder-04929.png b0oou/yonder-the-cloud-catcher-chronicles-guide-to-farming Fri, 28 Jul 2017 10:37:09 -0400 Craig Snyder

Yonder: The Cloud Catcher Chronicles is one of the most beautiful and environmental games I've played in the past few years. Being such, it makes total sense that farming would be a big part of the game. As you adventure through Gemea, you're going to quickly realize the benefits owning a farm will provide you along the way.

That being said, there's definitely some setup required before you just jump into maintaining your first farm. Let's talk about everything you need to know to operate a successful farming empire in Yonder: The Cloud Catcher Chronicles!

General Tips and Preparation

Yonder: The Cloud Catcher Chronicles features an open world that lets you wander off and do as you please, but it's worth it to stick to the main questline for the first few hours that you play. Doing so will lead you in a direct path to getting your first farm.

Along the way, you can pick up crafting recipes by reaching the point in the main questline where you have to repair the Cloud Catcher. Doing so is going to introduce you to some of the Guild Masters, like Agatha (the carpenter).

Creating farms requires a lot of resources, so it's essential that you stock up on rocks, fodder, and wood. They're all over the world, so the sooner you begin collecting and saving these means the easier your farming experience will be.

Once you've got your first farm and a sufficient amount of supplies, it's time to learn how you can improve your farm. There is a farm rating system with three categories: Cleanliness, Value Produced, and Animal Care. Let's go into how you can maximize the rating for each of these.

How to Increase the Cleanliness Rating

To put it bluntly, the farm animals of Yonder: The Cloud Catcher Chronicles poop a lot. Not being around to clean that up is going to result in the Cleanliness of your farm plummeting. However, who really wants to be burdened with cleaning up poop? That's why we're going to hire a farmhand to do it for us!

Citizens all around the outskirts of towns in Yonder: The Cloud Catcher Chronicles can be hired as farm hands. To convince them to work for you as a farmhand, you need to offer them food until they're charmed to 100%. The food you feed them does offer different charm percentages. For example, Groffle Milk will raise the meter by 10%. However, uncooked fish may only raise it by 1%.

You can only have one farmhand, and there are a ton of them available out in the world. The common strategy seems to be to make Groffle Milk into a hot drink as it gives a massive percentage towards most farmhands' meter.

After you get a farmhand to 100%, they'll begin working your farm and ensuring that it remains at max Cleanliness.

How to Increase the Value Produced Rating

Value Produced is a misunderstood rating in the farming system. It's difficult to raise this rating when you farm with livestock because the return on investment is extremely low.

This statistic is not important because farms will operate at any Value Produced rating, but if you are interested in raising it, then you need to create Garden Plots and fill them with Seeds. After a few days, it'll reach it's highest level.

How to Increase the Animal Care Rating

You'll have a variety of animals on your farm and each of them will live in pens and facilities. To raise your Animal Care rating, you'll need to interact with your animals by selecting the Care option.

To effectively maximize your Animal Care rating, have a Water Trough and Fodder Trough installed for every two animals you have on your farm. Pay attention to this ratio as you maintain your farm. Using the Care option when interacting with your animals will raise your Animal Care rating by 1–2%, but it can only be done a certain number of times. Keeping your animals stocked with food and water will take care of the rest.

Scaling Up

The more farms you have, the more you can produce. The more you produce, the more you can trade. The more you can trade, the more items and buildings you can possess and build.

Just about every region in Yonder: The Cloud Catcher Chronicles has a farm that you can build, and it's in your best interest to do so. Start out small, though, and once you've learned to maintain high ratings on your first farm, you'll know the workload required to have two or three of them.

Questing in regions where you have a farm comes with an added bonus because it'll raise that region's Happiness. At 75%, you get increased farm production rate. So, as you can imagine, having three farms offers you three regions that you can optimally quest in and have a huge farm production rate. Farming and questing go very well together.


Follow the steps in this guide and you'll be well on your way to having productive farms that'll supply you with everything you could ever need in your journey through Gemea. If you have any questions or comments, feel free to drop me a line in the comments section below!

Also, be sure to check out our Yonder: The Cloud Catcher Chronicles review.

Fortnite Guide To Understanding The Collection Book,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/4/2/5/42597a797f66b0c.jpg u85la/fortnite-guide-to-understanding-the-collection-book Fri, 28 Jul 2017 10:25:39 -0400 Ty Arthur

A spectacular mash-up of resource gathering, base-building, and third-person shooting, Fortnite is filled to the brim with a staggering number of elements to manage: Heroes, Survivors, Schematics, Expeditions, Skills, Research, Gadgets, and an odd option called the Collection.

Not available straight from the beginning of the game, the Collection book has some players scratching their heads about its functionality and why it's worth playing around with at all.

Below we cover everything you need to know to access the Collection -- and how to earn some nifty rewards along the way.

Just getting started? Be sure to check out our other Fortnite guides:

 Fortnite Collection Book

Accessing The Fortnite Collection Book

Before you can even pull up the Collection book screen, you need to have earned at least 10 skill points (if you go straight for the Recycling And Collection Book skill and don't take any detours).

This starting skill is available in the Tier 1 Skill Tree in the horizontal blue segment, just after the first Tech upgrade. You can't automatically put anything in the Collection straight away, though, even after picking up that first skill to unlock the book.

More Collection retiring skills are required to let you recycle better cards of any given type. For instance, the Recycling And Retirement II skill lets you retire up to rare quality Schematics, Survivors, Defenders, and Heroes.

This one is also in Tier 1 and is found just to the right of the Unlock Survivor Squad: Scouting Party entry. To get here (without any detours) will require a minimum of 15 Skill Points.

 Unlocking Recycling And Retirement II

Using The Fortnite Collection Book

Now that you've got the Collection book unlocked, what exactly does it do? It's basically a scrap book of cards you've found through loot chests and reward llamas... but you have to give up those cards to add them to a book page.

That's right -- retiring an item to the Collection is permanent. You actually lose that card from you armory entirely and can no longer use that Hero, Schematic, Survivor, etc. If you give up a Trap, you won't be able to build that Trap in a quest or on your Storm Shield base.

It's usually a good idea to wait until you get a second instance of any particular card through a loot llama, but if you find you never use a particular Hero or Trap, then go ahead and retire it to the Collection because there are significant rewards for filling up pages of the book.

Retiring Heroes (over any other type of card) levels up your Collection the fastest, but more rare cards of any type will offer faster leveling than less rare cards, as does retiring cards that are higher level.

In fact, you may notice that if you click Inspect Collection Item, the Level Up and View Evolution commands remain in place for retired cards just like with any other card. You can continue to level up cards after you retire them, and this does give you a boost to your Collection experience.

 Getting rewards for leveling the Collection

Collection Book Rewards

Every time the Collection book hits a new level, you receive rewards just like you had completed a quest. Leveling up the Collection frequently gives rare materials you need for evolving cards, like Drops of Rain, Lightning in a Bottle, or Training Manuals. You can also earn Skill Points, which makes leveling the Collection a very lucrative option.

Unlike the randomized loot chests and reward llamas, the Collection book level rewards appear to be the same for everyone at each level (although since the game is in Early Access, these may change over time). The current reward load out is as follows:

Level Reward
Level 2 500 Hero Experience
Level 3 Random Green Schematic
Level 4 500 Survivor Experience
Level 5 6 Drops of Rain
Level 6 500 Vbucks
Level 7 7 Drops of Rain
Level 8  Green Constructor and Survivor
 Level 9   1 Skill Point
 Level 10 500 Schematic Experience
Level 11 8 Drops of Rain
Level 12 Choice of Green Melee or Green Shotgun
Level 13 Gold Llama 
Level 14 1000 Hero Experience
Level 15 3 Training Manuals
Level 16 Blue Ranged Weapon
Level 17  9 Drops of Rain
Level 18  2 Skill Points
Level 19  1000 Survivor Experience
Level 20 10 Drops of Rain, 5 Lightning in a Bottle
Level 21 Experience Candy Pack
Level 22  3 Training Manuals
Level 23  Blue Ninja or Outlander
Level 24  Green and Blue Survivors
Level 25  Purple Survivor
Level 26  500 Vbucks
Level 27  10 Drops of Rain
Level 28  Blue Trap
Level 29  5 Lightning in a Bottle
Level 30  1000 Schem Experience
Level 31  Trap Pack
Level 32  Blue Survivors
Level 33  2 Skill Points
Level 34  12  Drops of Rain, 5 Lightning in a Bottle
Level 35  1200 Hero Experience
Level 36  8 Training Manuals
Level 37  1200 Survivor Experience
Level 38  Blue Hero and Survivors
Level 39  1200 Schematic Experience
Level 40  Blue Survivor
Level 41  Weapon Pack
Level 42  3 Eyes
Level 43  8 Training Manuals
Level 44  1500 Hero Experience
Level 45  Purple Survivor
Level 46  2 Skill Points
Level 47  14 Drops Of Rain, 5 Lightning in a Bottle, 1 Eyes
Level 48  1500 Hero Experience
Level 49  Purple and Blue Survivors
Level 50  1500 Schematic Experience
Level 51  Choice of Blue Hero
Level 52  5 Lightning in a Bottle, 2 Eyes
Level 53  4 of each Training Manual
Level 54  Trap Pack
Level 55  2000 Hero Experience
Level 56  2 Skill Points
Level 57  Random Blue Weapon
Level 58  2000 Survivor Experience
Level 59  2000 Schematic Experience
Level 60  5 Lightning in a Bottle, 1 Eyes
Level 61  Trap Pack
Level 62  Green Schematic, 2 Green Traps
Level 63  4 Training Manuals
Level 64  Experience Candy Pack
Level 65  Purple and Blue Survivors
Level 66  3 Skill Points
Level 67  16 Drops of Rain, 5 Lightning in a Bottle, 2 Eyes
Level 68  2000 Hero Experience
Level 69  3 Skill Points
Level 70  18 Drops Of Rain, 5 Lightning in a Bottle, 3 Eyes
Level 71  Legendary Weapon NPack
Level 72  2000 Survivor Experience
Level 73  Purple and Blue Survivors
Level 74  10 Training Manuals
Level 75  20 Drops of Rain, 10 Lightning in a Bottle, 4 Eyes
Level 76  2000 Schematic Experience
Level 77  3 Skill Points
Level 78  3000 Hero Experience
Level 79  Purple and Green Survivors
Level 80  3000 Survivor Experience
Level 81  Epic Trap Pack
Level 82  2 Purple Survivors, 1 Purple Hero
Level 83  10 Lightning in a Bottle, 4 Eyes
Level 84  3 Skill Points
Level 85  3000 Schematic Experience
Level 86  1 Purple Survivor, 2 Blue Survivors
Level 87  Choice of Purple Hero
Level 88  22 Drops of Rain, 10 Lightning in a Bottle, 5 Eyes
Level 89  3000 Hero Experience
Level 90  3000 Survivor Experience
Level 91  500 Vbucks
Level 92  3000 Schematic Experience
Level 93  Rare Schematic
Level 94  4 of each Manual
Level 95  Experience Candy Pack
Level 96  Green Defender
Level 97  Purple and Blue Survivors
Level 98  3 Skill Points
Level 99  4000 Hero Experience
Level 100  Random Epic Schematic

What's the highest level and rarity of card you've had the courage to retire yet, and did you get any different rewards for leveling the Collection book? Let us know in the comments section below!

3 Essential Tips for Dishonored 2's Non-Lethal Playthrough,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/i/s/dishonored2-23b63.jpg wyime/3-essential-tips-for-dishonored-2s-non-lethal-playthrough Thu, 27 Jul 2017 12:42:58 -0400 Will Dowell

Dishonored 2 successfully creates a "play-it-your-way" dynamic that lets you sneak or stab your way to victory. You can become a whirlwind of chaos and destruction or hide in the shadows, giving your enemies a fate worse than death. With a plethora of powers, both combat and stealth are engaging options.

But even with these powers, a non-lethal playthrough is still quite the undertaking. Enemies are careful and combat often leads to death. With the odds stacked against you, you'll need to use all the tricks in the book. Luckily, these 3 tips will give you the skills needed to handle Dishonored 2's low-chaos run.

Explore, Explore, Explore

The majority of Dishonored 2 levels take place in open environments full of mischief and items. With many vantage points and quiet corridors, finding alternative routes is essential when avoiding combat. Since many of the levels feature verticality, be prepared to run across rooftops and lampposts of each area. The wide environments will turn stealth into sometimes obtuse navigation puzzles.

Alternative routes aren't the only thing exploration gives the non-lethal player. The majority of the non-lethal solutions for your assassination targets require you to fully explore and search the world for clues. Your main source for upgrades, Runes, is also scattered throughout the levels. While most are hidden in quiet areas, some require backtracking and further exploration to acquire.

To make the most out of your journey, use the Heart to find important items throughout each level. On your way to these locations, listen to side conversations and read scattered documents. While some may only flesh out the world, others provide much-needed clues for survival.

This exploration doesn't just include the overall level: most rooms and streets have nice vantage points you can use to infiltrate your targets' locations. May it be chandeliers or bookshelves, navigating room-to-room becomes not only possible, but satisfying. As long as you explore, you will be able to handle the challenges with a non-lethal playthrough.

Master Blink and Far Reach

To fully explore the world, you will need to master the movement abilities given to both Corvo and Emily. Easily the most used power in a non-lethal playthrough, Blink and Far Reach allow you to navigate around the clusters of enemies.

The importance of these abilities should make them a top priority for any Rune upgrades. Remember to focus on improving the range of these powers, as navigating across open environments becomes infinitely easier with the ability to teleport.

While Blink and Far Reach are your greatest tools for a non-lethal playthrough, they can also throw you into the nearest enemy crowd. So be careful when teleporting to far-away areas and be especially careful when navigating vertical shafts. Far Reach, in particular, can be a challenge with its added momentum -- so pick your targets carefully.

In addition to momentum challenges, Far Reach also requires you to move out of site. It is not a teleport ability and enemies can see you as you fly through the air. Be aware of enemy locations and plan your movement accordingly.

Even with these challenges, your movement abilities will life savers as you explore each mission and neutralize your targets.

Clockwork Soldiers are Free Game

While you can't kill anyone in your non-lethal run, you can destroy those pesky clockwork soldiers. To do this quietly, use stun mines and spring razors, to ambush patrolling clockwork soldiers. Remember that it takes two stun mines or spring razors to fully destroy one. Upgrading the number of charges on stun mines will help you save ammo as you take them on.

You can also rewire the soldiers and have them fight for you. This is exceptionally helpful in The Clockwork Mansion, but can work against you if they kill human guards.

For a slightly louder strategy, grenades are extremely useful in dismantling the enemy. Focus on destroying the head and back armor to make them vulnerable. Then either drop-assassinate them or shoot their whale oil canister. Speaking of whale oil, throwing whale oil tanks will obliterate a clockwork soldier as well.

Remember that they can see behind them as well as in front of them. Use verticality and cover while engaging these deadly foes. As long as your careful, you will get the job done eventually.


Non-lethal playthroughs in Dishonored 2 are both challenging and rewarding. Manipulating guards into creating the perfect opportunity is both satisfying and exhilarating. Hopefully, Death of Outsider is this much fun with stealth. Being quiet never felt so exciting.

Be sure to check out GameSkinny's other Dishonored 2 guides

How the Crash Bandicoot N. Sane Trilogy Differs from The Original Games,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/i/s/q/isqrzaz-3adff.png cfkcr/how-the-crash-bandicoot-n-sane-trilogy-differs-from-the-original-games Thu, 27 Jul 2017 12:01:40 -0400 Zantallion

Crash Bandicoot N. Sane Trilogy is a smash hit, and for good reason. The remastered trilogy keeps wholly intact all three original Crash games, while bringing their visuals and sounds into the modern era.

For many, these games are their childhood, and now they look as good as they deserved to look all those years ago. But as close as N. Sane Trilogy stays to the source material, 100% is a very hard mark to hit. There's a few instances where the Trilogy deviates -- and we're going to count the (biggest) ways.

Playable Coco

The biggest difference between the original and the remaster is the addition of Coco as a fully playable character. In the original games, Coco was only playable in a few specific vehicle-based stages in Warped, while Crash himself tackled most of the usual platforming stages.

In N. Sane Trilogy, however, once you beat the first boss of Crash 1, you can choose to play as Coco instead of the usual mad marsupial. Coco functions exactly the same as Crash, with only minor hitbox alterations -- so it's mostly just a cosmetic difference, but it's nice to see her get promoted from second banana to main hero for a change.

Speed Boosts

Crash Bandicoot 2: Cortex Strikes Back gets a bit of a speed-up in the remake by way of the Speed Shoes. Crash fans may recognize these, as they're a renamed version of Crash 3's Crash Dash.

Upon beating the final boss in the remake's version of Cortex Strikes Back, you'll get the ability to make Crash sprint -- something he couldn't do in the original game. This means that any stage in the game can be returned to for a hot-stepping second attempt, which no doubt has speedrunners excited. 

And speaking of speedrunners...

Time Trials

Every speedrunner's best friend. Time trials have been added to the first and second games, and the third game's times have been altered to accommodate for the more mechanical changes of the game. Don't worry -- this doesn't mean you can't get 100% in the first two games without doing Time Trials. Instead, finishing all the Time Trials with a Gold score or better will get you there.

Physics Changes

Not everything is additions though. As mentioned earlier, there are some under the hood changes to Crash that are likely the reason why many are finding these games much more difficult than they remember.

Most importantly, the rate at which Crash falls has been sped up, and he has a tendency to slip off thin platforms now that he didn't before. This makes already difficult stages like the infamous "The High Road" level even harder than it already was in the original game.

The developers have actually commented on and confirmed this issue, but for now don't seem too inclined to fix or alter it. You'll just have to play that much more carefully on stages like The High Road and the new DLC stage, Stormy Ascent.

That's just a few of the changes that 20 years of gaming evolution have brought everyone's favorite bonkers Bandicoot. If you'd like to see another article with more of the changes, let us know in the comments. And good luck on The High Road. You'll need it.

If you want some extra help navigating the revamped Crash games, check out our collection of Crash Bandicoot N. Sane Trilogy guides for all the tips you'll need:

Dragon Ball FighterZ Character Roster,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/a/x/maxresdefault-ba032.jpg gese0/dragon-ball-fighterz-character-roster Thu, 27 Jul 2017 11:17:26 -0400 heatherew24

The highly anticipated Dragon Ball FighterZ set for release in 2018, and it has players abuzz with excitement and curiosity about the roster of characters that it's going to include when it launches for Xbox One, PlayStation 4, and PC. 

Since the game's title has that glorious big Z in it, we know for sure that it will be related to the world of the Dragon Ball Z anime that fans know and love. This new DB fighter will feature stunning 3D graphics, and the traditional 3v3 style of combat. 

Full List of Characters in Dragon Ball FighterZ

According to the beta info we have so far, there are currently 9 characters confirmed for the roster in this new game:

  • Buu (Majin Buu)
  • Frieza (100%, Golden)
  • Gohan (SSJ2)
  • Goku (Normal, SSJ, SSJ3)
  • Krillin
  • Perfect Cell
  • Piccolo
  • Trunks (SSJ Future)
  • Vegeta (Normal, SSJ)

Though this is all we know for now, it's likely that more characters will get added in the future and through DLC. We'll update this list as more characters are revealed. 

What other fighters would you like to see come to the roster for Dragon Ball FighterZ? Let us know down in the comments!

FFXIV: How to Get Nagxian Silk and What It's For,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/f/f/1/ff14-stormblood-d12a0.png dduij/ffxiv-how-to-get-nagxian-silk-and-what-its-for Thu, 27 Jul 2017 10:53:18 -0400 Klinestife

In Final Fantasy 14 , there's a ton of top-tier stuff to craft once you hit Level 70 and reach the end game. But crafting requires resources -- and the right resources can sometimes be hard to come by. Whether it's Nagxian Silk or Doman Weave, the best materials for crafting often require a fair bit of hunting.

If you're a Weaver, you're going to find yourself needing both. But you'll find that Nagxian Silk is particularly elusive. Where obtaining Doman Weave is more of a grind than a challenge, Nagxian Silk can be dangerous to acquire. But this material used to craft Ao Dai and Quan -- two end-game pieces of gear that can only be created by a Level 70 Weaver.

How can you pick it up? We'll give you the rundown in this short guide. 

How to Get Nagxian Silk in FF14

Obtaining this material will require you to go treasure hunting. You need to open any treasure chests you find using a gazelleskin treasure map. Every time you open one of these chests, there's a chance that a portal to the Lost Canals of Uznair instance, which drops a number of crafting materials (including Nagxian Silk) as rewards for clearing chambers. 

It's highly recommended that you have a full party with you when you enter the Lost Canals. This area counts as a dungeon and is nearly impossible to solo. Also keep in mind that party members who are downed will not return to starting area and must be revived with items or skills.

When you're inside the Lost Canals, you'll want to open the Treasure Chests found in each chamber. Opening these chest will trigger the release of enemies that you have to defeat. But once your group has taken care of the threat, the person who used the treasure map can open the chest to get a reward and a vault key. 

The vault key will be used to open one of two doors. One door will lead to the next chamber (of which there are 7 in total), and the other door will only get your party kicked out of the instance. So to reach all 7 chambers in the Lost Canals, you'll need to make the right choice 6 times in a row. 

You'll find Nagxian Silk in one of the many treasure chests scattered around the Lost Canals. It's a pain to get and a risky venture to take over and over again, but this material is very important if you're serious about Weaving. So you'll just have to gring the Lost Canals over and over again until you get the reward you're looking for.

Once you have it, you can work on crafting the Ao Dai and the Quan!

ffxiv ao dai
Ao Dai


That wraps up this guide to obtaining Nagxian Silk in FF14! Good luck picking the right doors as you make your way through the dungeon. And be sure to check out the rest of our FF14 guides for more tips to help you in your Eorzean adventures!

Fortnite Base Building Layout Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-c7579.jpg tmzxl/fortnite-base-building-layout-guide Wed, 26 Jul 2017 17:47:36 -0400 Ty Arthur

Base building, zombies, card drops, and buckets of bullets? What more could a gamer want in a multiplayer experience?

Epic's Fortnite has finally hit Early Access, and is now ready to be wrecked by hordes of gamers jumping in and crafting absurdly elaborate bases to defend. Not sure how to get started with an effective base layout? We're here to help!

Below, we'll walk you through putting together a defensive base both for your storm shield and any given multiplayer quest. Need help with other aspects of Fortnite? Be sure to check out our collection of Fortnite guides:

Persistent Home Base Storm Shield

Your home base retains its defenses and structures between missions, so you can build it up to truly epic proportions. While the home base storm shield map has plenty of wood, stone, and metal to harvest, it lacks all the other resources.

Unlike the quest maps, there aren't houses full of objects to loot for finding ammo, so always prepare on the ammo and trap material fronts before starting these missions or accessing the home base on the map.

This is especially critical because -- unless you happen to have a group of friends online waiting to help you -- these missions are frequently undertaken solo.

Unlike the other quests, Husks are very likely going to get past you and reach your base in these missions, so trap placement and base layout is important here right from the beginning.

Husks make a beeline straight for the storm shield in the middle of the map, so start with walls and floors immediately surrounding the shield, then add a second layer of either full or low walls to slow Husks down while you run around the map.

Your floor and wall traps should be placed on the two tiles closest to the storm shield, either in between the two layers of walls or on the outer side, which is where the Husks will run after breaking through your defensive line.

 Adding a second layer of defensive walls

As you get more resources for building more elaborate defenses, focus on funneling enemies into specific areas -- or at the very least slowing them down at a specific place so you can mop up large numbers of Husks quickly with your preferred weapon.

You can accomplish this with a combination of full walls with stairs and low walls that act as hallways. You want to be able to see over them for a clear line of fire, while still stopping or slowing the Husks as they approach. Low walls can be built in hedge maze style farther out from the storm shield in the area where the Husks spawn. While working through the low walls, they can be sniped from above or cleaved with melee attacks before they even get close to the base.

 Setting up low walls and traps on the eastern appraoch

Over several returns to this map, you will find that from each of the directions that the Husks approach, there tend to be specific segments where they mass first on the way across the field to your base. Set a low wall at that position with a wall trap to handle enemies before you need to shoot at them. A single floor panel on either side with a floor trap is a nice added touch for extra protection.

Eventually you unlock the ability to place Defender tiles and build up your Defender crew with new AI allies. Defenders don't have great accuracy and are more of a last resort at the beginning, however. One solid tactic is to build around your storm shield in a pyramid shape, setting Defender panels on the four outer edges of the pyramid next to stair segments located one tile up from the ground.

This building pattern will have your Defenders close enough to the shield that they can pick off anyone who gets past you and makes it to the inner base. Don't forget that Defenders don't arm themselves -- you have to give them a gun, and they use your ammo, so single shot weapons are more efficient for Defenders than automatic firearms.

As the waves get bigger and you need to move from one side of the map to the other much faster, spend some resources to build bridges connecting the hills on each side. This not only gives you high ground line of sight for sniping, it makes it much quicker to get from west to east to south without having to run through your maze of low walls.

Quest Maps

Quest maps outside your home base storm shield aren't persistent, so anything you build won't be there the next time around.

First and foremost, don't bother building any traps at all during the first few hours of the game. Depending on your team's skill level, the Husks will simply never reach your traps at all on the first 15-20 missions, so building them is a waste.

Traps require materials that are more rare than the standard wood, stone, and metal -- and once you place a trap, it is gone from your inventory with no way to recover it (besides using materials to craft a new one). Save those traps for when you need them later in the game.

Many quests have a bonus Badge available if you don't over build and keep your structure count under a specific amount -- so keep an eye on that amount that goes up in the menu on the right side of the screen.

Instead of traps, focus on base layout with walls, floors, and stairs. Doors and windows are easy to make for line of sight and allowing your team unrestricted movement by just removing individual panels out of a wall. Make sure you give yourself access to anything you need to reach during a mission, and don't lock yourself in by forgetting a door!

Like with the home base, it can be helpful to have two or three layers of low walls set a few tiles apart to block the enemy at more than one point. That way, if you and the crew are busy on one side and Husks break through the first layer of low walls, they'll still have to hit a second and third before reaching their destination.

You can also remove panels diagonally to put a wall next to an open staircase so you don't have an open spot for Husks to get through or a full wall blocking your view of the staircase.

 Building a partial wall next to a staircase

Remember to think in three dimensions while constructing a base -- you can build floors above you to create upwards mobility. Crows nests, bridges, and overhangs with low floors to kill from above are all valid base sections to build. In some cases, you may need to build up to complete objectives, like locating shards to destroy in group activities that are floating in the air or located on rooftops.

Several enemies can hurl flaming objects through the air and hit your base without getting close, so ceilings become important if the quest has you defending a specific object through the waves.

In fact, building two separate floors with their own ceilings doesn't ever hurt, just make sure to set stairs somewhere in the configuration so you can reach different areas quickly. Stairs can also have panels changed just like walls, letting you build curling staircases that double back on themselves to go up multiple floors at once.

 Building a multi floor staircase

While building top floors, keep in mind locations for snipers to come out and take aim in any direction where the purple haze is found on the map. If one player is sniping while one is focused on melee and the other two have standard ranged weapons, in most cases Husks will go down quickly in each wave.

Finally, don't forget about ceiling traps that hang down! They require you to build overhangs from the floor above so you can set a ceiling trap right next to the Atlas (or whatever object you are defending). Ceiling traps can also be useful if you are building tunnels with walls on all four sides to funnel Husks in a specific direction towards a kill zone.


Those are all the best Fortnite base building layout strategies we've discovered so far? Got any base layout tips for us to share? Let us know in the comments below!

How to Get Water and Cloth in Last Day on Earth: Survival,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/8/7/18765931-487045561633271-2190056926525296850-cffbe.jpg nbz5k/how-to-get-water-and-cloth-in-last-day-on-earth-survival Wed, 26 Jul 2017 17:34:30 -0400 ActionJ4ck

Like many survival games, you won't last long in Last Day on Earth: Survival without water or cloth. Unfortunately, reliably obtaining these items is not always east right from the start, and players may find themselves dying of thirst before they even know how to prevent it.

Luckily, GameSkinny is here to ensure that today will not be your last day on earth. In this short guide, we'll tell you how to get cloth and how to get water so that you can keep roaming the punishing wilds of this mobile survival game.

How to Get Cloth in Last Day on Earth: Survival

Cloth is an essential item for crafting many of LDoE:S's most important objects -- like the Shower, Bandages, or the SWAT gear. There are currently two methods of obtaining cloth, the second of which requires you to be level 18.

Method 1: Loot It

There's some good news and some bad news about finding cloth early on in Last Day on Earth: Survival, and they are both the same: until you're level 18, cloth only comes from random drops.

Specifically, you can find cloth by looting zombie corpses and AI players. This means that you can find yourself entirely without it or up to your ears in it, depending on your luck.

Either way, your best bet on farming for cloth is usually to head out to the Pine Bushes and just start killing and looting every zombie you can find. As long as you're not terribly unlucky, you should have what you need relatively soon.

Method 2: Craft It 

Requires Level 18.

Once you've reached level 18, you will have access to the Sewing Table blueprint, which will allow you to turn Plant Fiber into Pieces of Cloth and Pieces of Cloth into Thick Fabric.

The Sewing Table will cost:

  • 20x Pine Plank
  • 15x Iron Bar
  • 5x Rubber Parts

This may be a steep price at the time, but it is well worth it -- as it'll grant you access to higher tier clothing later. 

How to Get Water in Last Day on Earth: Survival

Like our Last Day on Earth beginner's guide says, you won't survive for three days in the game without any water. That means you need to work on finding water immediately and be sure that you have a ready supply of it. Luckily, there are three ways to acquire water in Last Day on Earth: Survival

Method 1: Check Your Inventory

A disappointingly high number of players don't realize that they are gifted with three free bottles of water at the start of the game. Check your inventory and use them as needed. As long as you don't dawdle too much, they should be more than enough to keep you alive until you can obtain more water using the other two methods below.

Method 2: Loot It

There are several places that players have reported looting water bottles from. These include Alfa Bunker, plane crashes, and enemy player bases. This method, however, can be quite unreliable, and is really best reserved for emergencies or for adding to your pre-existing supply.

Method 3: Craft a Rain Catcher

This is by far the most reliable method for obtaining water in Last Day on Earth: Survival, and should be done as soon as possible.

Once you reach level 6, you will have access to the Rain Catcher blueprint, which will allow you to build the Rain Catcher for a measly:

  • 2x Scrap Metal
  • 3x Piece of Cloth
  • 10x Pine Log

Once built, you can place an Empty Bottle inside. After 10 minutes, the Empty Bottle will fill up and you will have a full Bottle of Water. It does not even have to be raining for this to work, making it the easiest method of getting water.

Now that you've got an abundance of cloth and water, you should have a lot less to worry about as you fight to stay alive in this zombie-eat-dog world. Now you can focus on fighting off the zombie hordes or upgrading your base with oak and steel.

But if you want a bit more help then feel free to check out some more of our Last Day on Earth guides.

Guild Wars 2 Guide: How to Complete the Hexfoundry JP,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/h/e/a/header-409bd.jpg p9c34/guild-wars-2-guide-how-to-complete-the-hexfoundry-jp Wed, 26 Jul 2017 15:49:46 -0400 stratataisen

The Hexfoundry Unhinged jumping puzzle in Guild Wars 2 is located in Sparkfly Fen just southeast of the Darkweather Waypoint. You’ll want to head towards the point of interest, Hexfoundry G-14, then go past it. Bypass the Inquest in the lab and jump over the glowing gate in the back via the boxes near it. You’re now officially in the Hexfoundry jumping puzzle.

Note the terminal to the left; you’ll see a lot of this around the puzzle.

The goal is to get past the three glowing barriers that seal off a room located on the left side of the puzzle -- this is where the puzzle’s chest is and where you get credit for the achievement. To do this, you have to activate three switches that are hidden throughout the jumping puzzle.

  • Note: The switches will stay off for quite some time, so you may want to check and see if the chest room is already open. If it is, you can skip straight to the chest.

As with most jumping puzzles nowadays, gliding makes this easier.

Caution: There are Veteran level mobs throughout the puzzle, mainly risen creatures, most you can bypass and ignore. There is a Champion Risen Sea Turtle in the water deep in the water.

Where to Find the Switches for Hexfoundry JP in GW2

First Switch

From the entrance, fall into the water. Swim to the other end of the pool and look for a section of shore that is lit up with a hexagon-pattern. Exit here and follow the path up. You’ll pass a Veteran Risen Quaggan and another terminal. Then you can jump up onto the large slab that above your head near the end of the path -- you’re pretty much making a U-turn, but on a higher level.

guild wars 2 hexfoundry jump puzzle switch 1

Move south along this slab, and you should see the first switch. You want to get on top of it by jumping on the bit of broken wall before it, then right on top. It should be possible to disable it from here. If not, you can drop down and switch it off that way. Then you can get back up by turning around and going up the slope again.

Second Switch

From the top of the first switch, jump off the south side -- the right if you’re facing the chest room. Continue south, and you’ll come to a point where you’ll have to jump around the corner of a cube-like slab sticking out of the wall. This is a whole lot easier than it looks.

guild wars 2 hexfoundry jump puzzle switch 2

Once you do, run up the slope and turn around, so you’re facing three glitched platforms. The switch is on the other side of these. Take your time, and you should be able to cross these quickly.

  • Note: If you have gliding unlocked, you can bypass the glitched platforms and glide across.
Third Switch

This switch is far more hidden than the first two. Face the chest room from the slab that the second switch is on, then jump down and follow the path past both the chest room and terminal. Once you reach the end, jump on the glowing, floating platforms. Jump from platform to platform towards the two glitching switches.

You’re going to head between these two, and down towards a third glitched switch. Be careful -- there is a drop just before the third. If you fall there, you will find a basic chest, but you’ll have to start over to get back to the third.

Once you’re at the third glitched switch, face the terminal that is in the same area. There’s a small ramp left of the terminal -- take that and you’ll see a series of ramps up. You’ll run into a Veteran Flesh Golem -- ignore it or kill it. Turn around, and you’ll see the last switch.

guild wars 2 hexfoundry jump puzzle switch 3

Where to Find Chests for the Hexfoundry JP in GW2

Basic Chest

Since you’re already here, you might as well get the basic chest -- more loot, yay! Jump down from the third switch back to where the glitched switch and terminal was. Now jump down the crevice you jumped over before. You’ll land on top of the basic chest.

To get out from here, head towards the glowing pillar then look for the corridor of lasers. These do a decent amount of damage, so having skills equipped that can cleanse fire are helpful.

Grand Chest

Once you're past the laser death trap, just swim back to the slabs that will take you back to the Chest room. A Veteran Golem should spawn -- one did not spawn when I did this on two of my characters earlier, but I don’t know for certain whether they took this out or not, so be careful.


That wraps up our guide to completing the Hexfoundry Unhinged jumping puzzle! Congrats on you loot and achievement! For more help with the game, check out the rest of our Guild Wars 2 guides. Happy jumping!

FFXIV Guide: How to Survive Omega Deltascape (Alte Roite) on Savage Difficulty,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/a/l/t/alte-roite-27c51.jpg i55i1/ffxiv-guide-how-to-survive-omega-deltascape-alte-roite-on-savage-difficulty Wed, 26 Jul 2017 12:49:20 -0400 LuckyJorael

Final Fantasy XIV: Stormblood continues to up the ante for players with a new difficulty for the Omega: Deltascape raid. Savage difficulty introduces some truly, well, savage DPS checks, healing power checks, and timed AoE damage phases that will kill careless players.

To help you survive, we’ve compiled a list of changes between the normal raid and Savage difficulty, as well as some guidance on what to do to avoid becoming ash in the raid arena when facing Alte Roite. 

How to Survive the Alte Roite Boss Fight on Savage Difficulty in FFXIV

There are a number of changes in Savage difficulty -- specifically to the scope and intensity of Alte Riote's attacks -- that will make this boss fight much more treacherous than it was before. 

You'll need to pay attention to these changes and alter your team's strategy accordingly if you want to survive. Here are the highlights that you need to be aware of before you engage in this fight:

  • The Platform no longer has barrier. So falling off is now a real danger -- especially when Alte Roite hits players with a knockback effect. You need to carefully position yourself for knockback attacks and when ice appears.
  • Twin Bolt hits like a truck compared to normal mode. Your two tanks need to stand right on top of one another when Alte Roite casts Twin Bolt. 
  • Clamp is slightly different. It's no longer telegraphed compared to normal mode, and is now an AoE cone. But thankfully it has a short cast time. Your main tank should move away from the front of Alte Roite when he starts to cast Clamp.
  • Roar is more dangerous. Alte Roite, being the jerk it is, intermittently casts Roar, which deals a significant amount of AoE damage. Healers need to be on top of their AoE heals to prevent wipes from Roar.
  • You should group up on group arrows. Any time a group member is targeted by the group arrow, group up on them.
  • Healers need to stay on their toes with Charibdys. Have I mentioned that Alte Roite is a huge jerk? Because it casts Charibdys, which reduces the health of all raid members to 1%. Then it follows this up with either Clamp, Roar, or Twin Bolt. Healers need to AoE heal quickly if Clamp or Roar is the follow-up ability, or concentrate on the tanks if Twin Bolt is the follow-up.

You should also keep in mind that this boss fires certain attacks based on a timer -- and will wipe your whole team if you take longer than 9 minutes and 45 seconds to end the fight. Below we'll cover these attacks and how to defend yourself.

Be Ready for Timed Attacks

Alte Roite performs a series of attacks based on a timer after you engage it. To help make sure that you survive the fight, we're going to break down when they happen, what they are, and how you can avoid dying during them.

0:30 - Alte Roite spawns a group of fireballs at the center of the platform, followed shortly after by a knockback effect.

  • How to Defend: Your team should first gather in the center area to avoid embarrassing deaths, then head to the center of the platform to avoid fireball explosion damage. Then, you'll need to head to the outer perimeter, in between fireballs, spreading out to avoid further explosions and spreading Levinbolt damage to other players.

1:30 - Alte Roite spawns fireballs on the outer perimeter, followed by fireballs in the center of the platform.

  • How to Defend: You'll need to head to the center until the outer fireballs explode, and then hoof it to the outer perimeter to avoid the second set of fireballs. Again, you need to spread out to avoid spreading Levinbolt damage to other players.

3:10 - Alte Roite spawns fireballs at the outer perimeter, leaving one spot open.

  • How to Defend: You'll need to group up facing the boss with the safe zone behind them, wait for the knockback, and then quickly head back into the center, again spreading out to avoid spreading Levinbolt damage.

3:45 - Alte Roite summons flames and jumps to an edge of the platform.

  • How to Defend: Both tanks should rush to one side of the boss, with the edge of the platform to one side of them, while the rest of the raid group should gathers on the side opposite the tanks. All players should avoid standing in front of the boss, as he will cast Clamp to try to knock them off the platform.

5:00 - Alte Roite repeats the 1:30 timer ability, but reversed. Fireballs spawn in the center, explode, and then more fireballs spawn at the outer perimeter and explode.

  • How to Defend: You should head to the outer perimeter, wait for the fireballs to explode, and then rush the center, spreading out to avoid Levinbolt spread.

5:40 - Alte Roite spawns a collection of fireballs in the center.

  • How to Defend: You will need to stand in between the fireballs there, as the boss hits everyone with a knockback. After the knockback, rush back to the center.

9:45 - Alte Roite enrages and will wipe the raid group.

  • How to Defend: There isn't much you can do about this attack, so you must kill this boss before the timer reaches this point. 


If you and your group have killed Alte Roite before he enrages, congratulations! You’ve passed the nasty DPS and heal checks and successfully avoided all of the tricky attacks Alte Roite can pull off. Once you kill Alte Roite, you’ll be rewarded with a token you can trade in for item level 340 gear. Now you can move on and enjoy all the other loot drops in Deltascape

Have some better advice for the Alte Roite fight? Want a guide for the next three bosses? Let us know in the comments! And be sure to check out the rest of our FFXIV: Stormblood guides for more tips to help you survive the dangers of Eorzea:

FFXIV: How to Get Doman Weave and What To Use It For,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/f/f/1/ff14-stormblood-0e785.png rsmis/ffxiv-how-to-get-doman-weave-and-what-to-use-it-for Wed, 26 Jul 2017 10:09:53 -0400 Klinestife

End-game crafting in Final Fantasy XIV: Stormblood can be a bit of a grind. But it's necessary if you want to make high-level gear that will serve you well as you play through all the late game content. 

Of course, you'll need a number of resources to craft in FFXIV, and the Doman Weave is one such material. Because it's required for end-game crafted items for Weavers and Leatherworkers, you won't be able to make Level 70 gear for either crafting class without it. 

But how do you acquire this crucial material? In this short guide, we'll give you the step-by-step breakdown of where to find Doman Weave and how to pick it up. 

How To Get Doman Weave in FFXIV

First things first, you'll need to own the Stormblood expansion for the game. Without it, you can't reach level 70 -- and thus can't access the only source for this item. 

If you have Stormblood, play until you get to Rhalgr's Reach. This is the main hub of the expansion, so you can't miss it -- just keep following the main quest line. 

Once you're there, find a vendor named Enna on the map (X:13.9, Y:11.6). She has Doman Weave in her inventory that she'll sell to you for 20 Allagan Tomestones of Verity. Buy as many as you need to craft your level 70 items.

Where to Find Allagan Tomestones of Verity

Don't have any of the Tomestones you need to purchase items from Enna? Don't worry! You can acquire them from the following places:

  • Duty Roulette
  • Ala Mhigo dungeon
  • Kugane Castle dungeon
  • Temple of the Fist dungeon
  • Royal Menagerie trial
  • Pool of Tribute (Extreme) trial
  • Emanation (Extreme) trial
  • Omega: Deltascape raid
  • Gaganaskin or Gazelleskin Treasure Maps.


It's as simple as that! Grind up some Tomestones, find Enna, and buy your Doman Weave! The biggest hassle about all of this is acquiring the currency you need -- actually getting the Weave is a piece of cake. 

Need more tips for your adventures in Eorzea? Check out the rest of our FFXIV guides for everything you need to know:


Last Day on Earth: How to Upgrade Your Base With Oak Trees, Steel, and More,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/8/7/18765931-487045561633271-2190056926525296850-e69c2.jpg k5ajm/last-day-on-earth-how-to-upgrade-your-base-with-oak-trees-steel-and-more Wed, 26 Jul 2017 09:30:21 -0400 ActionJ4ck

As you approach level 40 in Last Day on Earth: Survival, you'll notice that a lot of craftable traps, building upgrades, and other items require oak wood and steel to make. Unfortunately, you'll have a hard time finding them.

As of beta version 1.5, oak and steel actually cannot be found in Last Day on Earth: Survival, despite them being required for things like the radio tower, trip wire trap, and home brewery. Luckily, however, the framework for finding and using them already exists, so you can be prepared to obtain them once they officially become available.

How to Get Oak Planks in Last Day on Earth: Survival

Last Day on Earth: Survival currently contains the Pine Bushes, Pine Grove, and Pine Woods, lootable locations possessing an abundance of pine logs. So naturally, the oak logs necessary for crafting higher level Oak Planks can be found in the Oak Bushes, Grove, and Woods locations that are already visible on the world map. The problem, however, is that these locations are not even accessible to players. Yet.

Because these locations lie across the river, players will need to get an ATV up and running in order to reach those areas. The blueprints for the ATV can be obtained easily--you need only be level 18 and have 2 Crafting Points -- but obtaining all the parts for assembling it may take a bit of time and luck. Better get started.

Just remember that like the chopper's gas tank, the ATV Transmission is currently not in the game and is the missing part that's currently stopping players from reaching the Oak Bushes, Grove, and Woods.

TL;DR: You'll likely obtain oak logs to make oak planks in the Oak Bushes, Grove, and Woods. But for right now, those areas are totally inaccessible because the ATV Transmission needed for completing the ATV isn't in the game yet.

How to Find Steel in Last Day on Earth: Survival

Finding steel in Last Day on Earth: Survival is a bit more speculative, since there obviously isn't any location called the Steel Woods. But players have theorized that steel bars will be obtained from smelting steel scrap, which would likely either be looted from crates, lockers, and AI players like regular scrap, or could appear within the Oak Bushes, Grove, and Woods -- as these locations seem to represent the next tier of lootable areas. 

TL;DR: Steel isn't in the game yet, but it'll probably be found in random loot or in the Oak Bushes, Grove, and Woods locations.

How to Use Oak and Steel in Last Day on Earth: Survival

Whenever these resources do become accessible in Last Day on Earth, oak and steel can be used for crafting the following blueprints. Though these blueprints have been present in the game for a while, not all of these objects have a fully understood use. 

  • Radio Tower: Once implemented, the Radio Tower will allow players to join guilds and engage in other online multiplayer features.
  • Gunsmith Bench: This will allow players to craft certain weapon parts.
  • Glock 17: Though already available through looting, the Glock 17 is a powerful gun for any survivor.
  • Clan Banner: This is another item used in currently not-yet-implemented clan activities.
  • Trip Wire Trap: This trap can be set up to defend against zombies and other survivors.
  • Bear Trap: The Bear Trap is another trap for intruders.
  • Home Brewery: The description claims that it can be used for making beer, which I suppose is important in its own way.
  • Trunk: This provides storage for up to 24 items.
  • Torture Device: The description for this blueprint claims it "helps to get even the most unsociable captive talking", whatever that means.

  • Fishing Rod: This tool should enable fishing, but it is unknown how exactly fishing will be implemented.
  • Metal Pipe: This can be used to build water and oil pipelines, neither of which are in the game at this time.
  • Military Backpack: This useful item will add 12 more inventory slots.

TL;DR: It looks like finding oak and steel will unlock the next layer of complexity to Last Day on Earth: Survival, which could explain why they are taking so much time to be added.


Now that you know what to expect for when oak and steel finally arrive in this mobile survival game, so you can stay one step ahead of the other survivors. In the meantime, you'd best get to work on that ATV, and also be sure to check out GameSkinny's other Last Day on Earth guides:

Beginner's Guide to Dunk Nation 3X3,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/u/n/dunknation1-600x381-6cd0a.png 1tw1i/beginners-guide-to-dunk-nation-3x3 Tue, 25 Jul 2017 17:37:12 -0400 Justin Michael

I've been on the go a lot recently, which means that I've been playing more and more mobile titles. With more than 200 games hitting the iTunes and Google Play stores on the daily, there are no shortages of games to try out. One of the games that I have been playing for a few days now is Dunk Nation 3X3 -- a competitive 3v3 basketball game. 

I'm not much of a sports fan outside of watching combat sports like K-1 and UFC but I was drawn in by the vibrant, almost comic book style graphics of this game. And, after hitting Silver IV, I decided that I could share some pointers and general tips with the awesome readers here at GameSkinny to help give them an edge over their opponents. 

Pay Attention to the Tutorial

When you first fire up Dunk Nation, you're going to get hit with a lot of boxes, tabs, and screens. The user interface can be pretty cluttered and confusing at first so take your time. 

The tutorial moves pretty quickly and you'll find yourself learning the basic game mechanics in minutes -- as well as getting flooded with rewards and clicking into several different screens. My best advice here is to take your time looking into the various tabs and screens offered by the main interface.

Game Modes & Progression

There are a number of different game modes to choose from in Dunk Nation -- from 1v1 to 3v3 PvP, story mode, and a practice mode to hone your skills. If you were having a bit of trouble with the tutorial, then I highly suggest practicing your skills for a few minutes in the practice mode or doing the first couple of story matches, as they are relatively easy. 

I find the story mode to be a bit on the boring side, so I generally play 3v3 matches and have been lucky to get some decent teammates. 

Once you start winning matches, you're going to start leveling up your character and your team -- so make sure you pay attention to upgrading your skills! Just note that your character's level cannot be higher than your team level, and your team level goes up as you play/win matches. 

Improving Your Player

The main way to improve your player is to upgrade their skills. This helps to round out your character and might activate special effects. Make sure you equip skills so that they gain experience from PvP matches.

Once you progress further in the game you can send your characters off to training camps to improve their attributes, as well as unlock talents.

Lastly, doing the rookie missions is a great way for you to get a quick boost in the early game. Going through the A.I. story mode missions, as well as doing the daily quests, is a consistent way to rack up the EXP and score some great rewards. This can only be done once, however, so don't expect to grind your way to the top.

General Tips & Positioning Tips

Some of these general tips might seem like common sense, but you'd be surprised how many people don't make use of them at the lower ranking.

Use Fake Shot: If you quickly tap the shoot button, you'll do a pump fake. I use this regularly -- and you'd be surprised how often it actually works on the defenders.

Pass the Ball Around: Don't hog the ball -- you don't have to make all the shots for your team. In fact, the bulk of my wins in Bronze was because there was a greedy ball hog on the other team. This is a team game, so use teamwork and pass to your teammates when they're open and ready to make a play.

Drive: Don't be afraid to break past those defenders and get that dunk. Find your spot and hit that sprint button to break through them. This also works well with the pump fake for that extra layer of frustration. 

There are 5 different positions that you can choose to play in Dunk Nation -- Center, Power Forward, Small Forward, Point Guard, and Shooting Guard. Each of these positions has an area of the game that they excel in, so there is a position for each playstyle.

Center: The Center is usually in the paint -- the 2-point area of the court. The Center excels at defending shots in the paint, as well as getting rebounds. This position is a great choice for the "team player" type.

Power Forward: My favorite position to play, the PF is the position for scoring dunks and making plays in the paint. PFs have good speed and can put up points on the inside.

Small Forward: The SF is your jack-of-all-trades position -- they don't really excel in any given area. This is a good starting position to play if you don't quite know what position, if any, you want to specialize in. 

Point Guard: The PG is your playmaker. He's fast and has great passing skills, allowing him to set up plays and get the ball where it needs to be on the court. 

Shooting Guard: The SG is your half-court sniper and the go-to player for crushing those 3-pointers. If you're trying to put up points from mid to 3-point range, then this is the position for you.


That wraps up our Dunk Nation beginner's guide! Hopefully, this helps you to get started off right on your road to ballin' out of control on your mobile device of choice. If you have any tips you'd like to add or any questions, drop a message in the comments below. Just make sure you keep checking back for more Dunk Nation guides here at GameSkinny.

How to Enable Creative Mode in Colony Survival,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/b/7/7/b77e6992b62f248f05e46cdb00be7b9d1bb6d962600x338-1c455.jpg fiydq/how-to-enable-creative-mode-in-colony-survival Tue, 25 Jul 2017 17:22:09 -0400 Michael Dellapi

Despite only being in Early Access, Colony Survival is already proving to be a quite popular first-person survival game. However, as many players have noted, the addition of some sort of Creative Mode would be a huge boon for the game's popularity.

Creative Modes allow users to fully flex their imaginative muscles -- yet there isn't a proper way to do so in Colony Survival. However, some players have found ways to mod the game to allow for more creative freedom.

Credit for this method goes to Steam user P5ykoOHD for introducing many players into editing the game's code to enable something akin to a Creative Mode. It is important to note that, as is the case with editing any in-game files, tinkering too much can potentially break the game entirely. However, this guide will go over one of the safest ways to implement Creative Mode correctly.

Using Mods to Enable Creative Mode in Colony Survival

Modding Colony Survival requires finding the game's files in your directory and editing some key .json files. This can be done using your computer's standard Notepad functionality. However, it is recommended to use an application like "Notepad++" or a similar tool to properly display the code.

The .json files we will be editing are:

  • Types.json
  • Player.json
  • Serverperclient.json
  • Server.json
  • Settings.json

Remember to make a backup of all files you attempt to change, just in case. 

Step 1: Edit Types.json

First, you'll want to open Types.json in your game files so that you can expand your inventory for all the resources your creative endeavors will require.

Editing this portion allows you to change the amount of stacks you have accessible in your inventory. P5ykoOHD provides a specific download link for editing all of the stacks in this section to 10,000 -- allowing for near limitless use of inventory space. 

Step 2: Edit Player.json

Now it's time to edit the Player.json file to give yourself near-limitless resources. The file location for this section is: 

D:\Steam\steamapps\common\Colony Survival\gamedata\savegames\[your world]\players

Look for the following section in this file's code:

"inventory" : [
"type" : "bla bla bla",
"amount" : 50
"stockpile" : [
"type" : "(see list below)",
"amount" : 50

The stockpile section is what you're going to be actually editing to get unlimited items. Copy and paste the following into the stockpile section to acquire near-infinite amounts of each resource you could possibly need:

"stockpile" : [
"type" : "grasstemperate",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "grasstundra",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "grasstaiga",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "grasssavanna",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "grassrainforest",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "straw",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "sand",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "snow",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "clay",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "dirt",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "adobe",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "logtemperate",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "planks",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "redplanks",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "blackplanks",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "coatedplanks",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "plasterblock",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "stonebricks",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "bricks",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "leavestemperate",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "leavestaiga",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "cherryblossom",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "torch",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "cherrysapling",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "sappling",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "flaxstage1",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "wheatstage1",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "berrybush",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "crate",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "workbench",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "mint",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "shop",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "grindstone",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "furnace",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "oven",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "bed",
"amount" : 999999
"type" : "bread",
"amount" : 300
"type" : "arrow",
"amount" : 300

If you've done it right, you'll have loads of stuff in this inventory screen.

Step 3: Edit Serverperclient.json

Find the following file location to edit the build distance and fall damage of the player character: 

D:\Steam\steamapps\common\Colony Survival\gamedata\settings

Once you're in the right directory file, follow these steps:

  1. Find the properties "BuildDistance," "AutoBuildCooldown," "FallDamageBaseDamage," and "FallDamagePerUnit."
  2. Edit the BuildDistance so that the value is right for you. (Between 20-30 is usually a good baseline to ensure you aren't building too far away or too close to the character.)
  3. Lower the AutoBuildCooldown so you can place blocks quickly
  4. Set fall damages to 0 for easier building 
Step 4: Edit Server.json

This file's location is the same as Serverperclient.json, but you will need to navigate to the "Player" section. It is located at the end of the file, and allows you to maximize the amount of health you have.

Change "Starting Health," "HealthRegenerateMax," and "HealthRegenerationSpeed" to 1000. 

Step 5: Edit Settings.json

The file location for this step is: 

D:\Steam\steamapps\common\ColonySurvival\gamedata\savegames\[your world]

Modifying this code lets you turn zombies on and off at your choosing. So of course, you'll want to find the zombie setting and set it to inactive. This is helpful when you don't want to bother with any of the survival aspects of Colony Survival.  


With all of these options implemented, you will be able to create your own makeshift Creative Mode in Colony Survival, allowing you to create structures as you please. Once again, it is important to backup any files you are looking to change in case you don't get it quite right and need to revert back to your original settings.

If you need a bit of extra help surviving while you get Creative Mode up and running, check out our other Colony Survival guides for even more tips!

Warframe Guide: Finding and Manufacturing Harrow Parts,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinny/b966c59ef24b28432eead30e617bf69c.jpg 8m8rk/warframe-guide-finding-and-manufacturing-harrow-parts Tue, 25 Jul 2017 12:22:39 -0400 Michael Dellapi

Harrow is the newest available frame in Warframe, and it brings together a diverse array of offensive and defensive capabilities. This allows Harrow to simultaneously protect your team and annihilate enemies that attempt to harm them.

You can check out the video above for a full list of Harrow's abilities. But how do you unlock all of the frame's components? This short guide will help you out! 

How to Get the Harrow Blueprint in Warframe

To find the blueprint for Harrow, you first need to complete the quest associated with this Warframe -- "Chains of Harrow". This quest is accessible from the Codex. It is important to note that before being notified of this quest, you must have first completed "The War Within" quest and the "Mot" survival node in the Void.

The Harrow blueprint lists the following requirements:

  • 1 Neuroptics
  • 1 Chassis
  • 1 System
  • 2,000 Kuva

The Neuroptics, Chassis, and System unique to Harrow have their own specific requirements and blueprints that you need to acquire, which we'll go over below.

Harrow Neuroptics

The Neuroptics blueprint is found in Rotation C of the "Kuva Fortress: Spy" mission. Enemies in this section are approximately levels 31 through 33. Upon acquiring the blueprint, you will need:

  • 15,000 Credits
  • 1,500 Rubedo
  • 4,000 Polymer Bundle
  • 2,000 Plastids
  • 5 Neural Sensors
Harrow Chassis

The Chassis for Harrow is acquired from killing enemies that have been Corrupted by Void Fissures. These enemies have a chance to drop a blueprint for the Chassis. The components listed in the blueprints include:

  • 15,000 Credits
  • 20,000 Alloy Plates
  • 800 Oxium
  • 5 Orokin Cells
Harrow Systems

The Systems blueprint for Harrow can be awarded in Rotation C of Defection. 

  •  15,000 Credits
  • 2,500 Circuits
  • 1,000 Cryotics
  • 25,000 Ferrites
  • 15 Control Modules

After acquiring all of these components, you will have everything you need to build the Harrow Warframe and start taking it into fights.

It may seem like a lot of effort for a single frame -- but based on the abilities alone, it looks like putting in the time will be well worth it. Most of the components are found organically by playing through missions regardless, so you may find yourself collecting the necessary parts without even realizing it. 

That's all for this guide! Let us know in the comments how effective your new Harrow Warframe is in your games. And be sure to check out the rest of our Warframe guides for more tips. 

Unturned: How to Get The Secrets of Neuschwanstein,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/unturned-75883.jpg fm9zd/unturned-how-to-get-the-secrets-of-neuschwanstein Tue, 25 Jul 2017 11:42:48 -0400 LuckyJorael

Unturned, the open-world, free-to-play zombie apocalypse sandbox designed by Nelson Sexton, has a secret lurking in Neuschwanstein Castle on the Germany map. To get the achievement linked to this easter egg, you’ll need to scour the map for teleporter coils, find a secret lab, and defeat the hardest, rarest zombie boss in the game.

Luckily for you, we’ve got a guide to help you do all that. We'll go over how to get where you need to be and what to do once you're there so you can uncover this Unturned easter egg.

How to Get to Neuschwanstein in Unturned

Castle Neuschwanstein is actually not on the Germany map in Unturned. There’s no way to travel to it on foot. Instead, scattered around the map are three Teleporter Coils, tucked in hidden locations. You'll need to collect these so you can activate a Teleporter hidden in Berlin. 

The map of Germany in Unturned, with red circles for Coil locations and a green circle for the Teleporter location.

The first Coil is beneath Berlin. You can get to it through either the sewers or the river. The coil is in a natural cave that connects to the Berlin sewers. If you’re headed to the cave from the sewers, take the right branch of the cave and look for the coil on the ground to the right.

The second Coil is in the wreckage of the Space Shuttle in Cologne. In amongst the wreckage, in the middle of the road, is an intact tube. Inside is the coil. As always, watch out for zombies -- they appear to be rather thick around the crash site.

The third Coil is in the northeast corner of the map, just north of the road to the Ostee Compound. The Coil is located in a red cargo container that has fallen off the train north of the road. Simply open up the container and locate the Coil in the back.

Building The Teleporter

Once you have all three coils, head back to Berlin’s sewers. In the eastern side of the city, you’ll find the laboratory. Place the three coils in the green slots on the wall, and activate the teleporter to the right.

You’ll find yourself in Neuschwanstein Castle! But be careful, as you haven’t even done the hardest part of the easter egg yet.

Getting the Secrets of Neuschwanstein Achievement in Unturned

The Kaiser Zombie is a brand-new boss in the game, and he has a completely ridiculous amount of health. In addition to his health pool, the Kaiser Zombie can spit fire, shoot lightning, cause earthquakes, spit acid, and throw boulders. You might want to gear up with the best items you can before taking him on.

Kill the Kaiser Zombie, though, and you’ll get the Secrets of Neuschwanstein achievement. Look around the castle before you leave, and you’ll be able to pick up the Zweihander -- an epic-level melee weapon. Congratulations!

Know of any other cool easter eggs in Unturned? Leave a comment telling us how to get to them. And check out the rest of our Unturned guides for more help with the game!

How to Upgrade and Play Tyto the Swift in Gigantic,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/g/i/g/gigantic-tyto-c8130.jpg f5vif/how-to-upgrade-and-play-tyto-the-swift-in-gigantic Tue, 25 Jul 2017 11:16:31 -0400 ESpalding

Gigantic has been on many gamers' radar for quite some time, and was finally released this week. This new MOBA has a whole host of heroes for players to learn and master -- and Tyto the Swift is one of them.

Tyto is classed as an assassin and one of the most favored melee characters in the game. So if you're a melee-heavy player who likes to hit hard and fast, he just might be the champion for you. And if you follow this guide, you'll have this deadly assassin mastered in no time.

Tyto's Role in Gigantic

As I've already mentioned, Tyto the Swift is classed as an assassin. Assassins are designed to be able to deal out lots of burst damage in a short amount of time, but this also means that they are pretty vulnerable if they get caught because they have little defensive capability.

Assassins like Tyto rely on their high mobility to be able to dash into combat, deal some blows and then get out of melee as soon as possible. However, as soon as someone catches them, they struggle to mitigate damage well enough to survive. But in the hands of a discerning player, Tyto can be one of the best competitive heroes in Gigantic.

Upgrading Abilities for Tyto in Gigantic

The first time you get to level up an ability, you get to choose from two Tier 1 upgrades. With further skill points, you can level that ability up to the Tier 2 -- but you need to bear in mind that each ability has its own Tier 2 improvement as well.

Here's a breakdown of how these abilities branch out at each Tier, and which abilities you should be picking up depending on the play situation that you're in.

Default Attack: Talon

Talon is Tyto's default attack (left mouse button). Even though it quite an effective attack in itself, its real bonus lies in its ability to affect Tyto's dodge. It is great as an opening attack because it disorientates any opponents it hits.

The upgrade paths for this ability are as follows:

Tier 1 (Option 1): Kith and Keen

Builds crit chance and Focus faster.

This upgrade is ideal for those situations when you want to stay engaged for longer. If you find yourself in sustained engagements where you're auto-attacking more often, this is what you'll want to pick up. 

Kith and Keen splits into the following Tier 2 upgrades:

  • Talon and Fang: Gain a higher crit chance and crit bonus after Fang has landed an attack.
    • This upgrade is the way to go if you want to deal more consistent damage throughout longer team fights. The higher crit chance will make your default attack more deadly so that you can left-click your way through an enemy's defenses.
  • Synchronicity: Performs a powerful lunge attack as soon as Fang has attacked.
    • If you want a little more burst damage and some extra mobility, this is the ability to pick up. It'll give you a bit more poke potential and let you more easily lock down a target once Fang has gotten a few hits in.
Tier 1 (Option 2): Hidden Talon

Works with dodge to increase the distance of your lunge attack, which automatically crits and applies bleeding damage.

This upgrade is brilliant for when you want to yo-yo your way in and out of the action quickly, doing some hard-hitting burst damage whenever you dive in. If you've got frontliners or other DPS characters who can stay in a fight longer or keep your enemies occupied so you don't have to, pick this one up.

Hidden Talon splits into the following Tier 2 upgrades:

  • Evade Defenses: Works when you dodge at the same time as attacking with Talon. If you hit your opponent in the back or the side, your attack will deal more damage.
    • This will likely be a go-to Tyto upgrade if you want to do more burst damage and avoid taking any hits. It will also be essential in situations where you need to act as a flanker and take out the enemy's back line.
  • Encirclement Tactics: Works with dodge at the same time as attacking. If your attack is successful, it will reduce the cooldown of Blade Dance by 2 secs.
    • This upgrade is the way to go in situations where you need to be able to escape a sticky situation. Because Blade Dance can halt attackers and get you out of a melee mess, you'll want to reduce its cooldown as much as possible in games where you find yourself getting collapsed on by larger close-combat characters.

Secondary Attack: Swoop

Swoop is quite a powerful secondary attack (right mouse button). It causes Tyto to lunge forward to drive his sword deep into his opponent.

The upgrade paths for this ability are as follows:

Tier 1 (Option 1): Cut Down

Inflicts 50% more damage on opponents below 50% health

This is a fantastic finishing upgrade that you should pick up if you're playing like a true assassin -- sneaking around the enemy's territory and securing targets who were naive enough to think they could outrun you. Cut Down (and its upgrades) are made for the assassin who is actively hunting down targets all over the map. 

Cut Down splits into the following Tier 2 upgrades:

  • Predatory Instincts: Piles on the pain from Cut Down with a damage bonus increase of 100% on targets below 25% health. If Swoop kills an opponent, this upgrade will also reset the ability's cooldown.
    • This upgrade is perfect when you're actively hunting down targets all over the map, racking up kills and helping your teammates secure low-health targets. And if you manage to secure targets consistently, the instant CDR will let you go into the next fight with your attacks at the ready.
  • Rake: Puts a huge bleed debuff on opponents that are already bleeding.
    • This upgrade will only be useful to you if you opt to take the bleed damage upgrades for Blade Dance. If that's the case, you'll definitely want to pick up Rake so that you can make enemies bleed out before they make it to safety, and severely weaken their defenses so you can consistently deal hard-hitting damage.
Tier 1 (Option 2): Swoop de Loop

Swoop can leap further and gives a 5 secs speed boost -- but you can't attack when you land.

This upgrade (and its path) are ideal for matches where you need to have as much mobility as possible. If you're consistently getting collapsed on or you can't lock down a target without being swarmed by crowd-controlling characters, going this route will help you get out of harm's way more quickly.

Swoop de Loop splits into the following Tier 2 upgrades:

  • Free as a Bird: Breaks you free of any immobilizing effect or disruption as well as cleanse all debuffs on you.
    • This is basically a "get out of jail free" card. This is the upgrade for you if you want to play aggressively and get into the thick of the action without risking your life to do so. It's also a good defensive pick if you find yourself facing an enemy team with enormous amounts of CC. 
  • Spin Cycle: Resets the cooldown for Blade Dance.
    • If you'd rather be the one dishing out some crowd control while you Swoop around the map, this is the upgrade to go for. A shorter cooldown for Blade Dance means more opportunities to immobilize enemies in order to escape a bad fight or turn the tides of an engagement.

Q Ability: Blade Dance

The Blade Dance ability (Q) basically stops an enemy in their tracks. Tyto spins his sword around in all directions, hitting any opponents in its vicinity. This ability allows you to move more quickly -- but be careful, because the longer you use it, the long the cooldown on it.

The upgrade paths for this ability are as follows:

Tier 1 (Option 1): Bleed Dance

Inflicts bleed damage on hit, which is stackable by 10.

The Bleed Dance upgrade path is useful when you want to weaken your enemies as quickly as possible during sustained engagements. This can be helpful in a number of situations -- whether you want to have bleed damage to lock down escaping enemies and synergize with the first Swoop path above, or drain the life out of tankier targets so your team can bring them down.

Bleed Dance splits into the following Tier 2 upgrades:

  • Deadly Dance: Enhances the effect that bleeds have on an opponent. Once the stacks reach 10, your Talon attack gets 25% damage boost for 3 secs.
    • If you're patient enough to build all 10 stacks of this ability, this can be a devastating finisher move. Even the bleed alone is good for wearing down enemies during a fight. 
  • Cyclone: Increases the area of effect of your Blade Dance by 50%.
    • This upgrade will widen the area of affect for your crowd control, which will make it easier for you to control and immobilize the enemy when you need to escape or engage a fight. This will also help you stack your bleeds or land other chain abilities while your enemies are indisposed.
Tier 1 (Option 2): Windborne

Increases your movement speed while attacking with Blade Dance.

If you need more mobility in order to kite around the map and get some good poke in on the enemy team, Windborne will be the way to go. This path can be especially helpful when you need to spend a lot of time on the enemy's back line, taking out squishy ranged targets or locking down escaping targets.

Windborne splits into the following Tier 2 upgrades:

  • Hard Target: When doing your Blade Dance, this upgrade repels any projectiles that are heading your way.
    • Hard Target is great to pick up when you know that there are a lot of casters on the opposing side who will cause problems for you. Deflecting their projectiles will allow you to get in close and do what you do best -- shred.
  • Windswept: The cooldown for Blade Dance is set to 6s and increases each time an enemy is hit.
    • If you find yourself needing Blade Dance so often that getting other upgrades just won't make up for the more frequent CC, then this is the upgrade you want to get -- especially if you find yourself getting collapsed on or chased down fairly often. 

E Ability: Fang

Fang is actually Tyto's little companion. He sits on Tyto's shoulder during combat, but this ability (E) causes Fang to attack an enemy for you. Fang's attack causes armor-ignoring damage and bleeds the target for 5 seconds.

The upgrade paths for this ability are as follows:

Tier 1 (Option 1): Pounce

Allows Fang to deal an extra 150 armor-ignoring damage on hit.

This is a great bit of burst damage if you want to hit as hard as you can in a short amount of time. Getting in this initial powerful hit will allow you to follow up more effectively with bleed damage or the Fang-dependent Kith and Keen path of upgrades for your default Talon attack.

Pounce splits into the following Tier 2 upgrades:

  • Gnawing Out: Makes Fang crack an opponent's armor, reducing it by 3 secs.
    • This is a great upgrade when you're facing heavily armored targets. Reducing their armor will let you fire off a few burst damage or bleed abilities to bring them down more efficiently. This is a great way to get frontliners down low enough that you can proc the low-health bonuses your Cut Down ability or do fatal burst damage through Hidden Talon. 
  • Ankle Biter: Slows down any target that Fang is attacking for 3 secs.
    • This is a great pickup for matches where you need to rove the map and lock down escaping targets. If you need less penetration and more mobility to keep your opponents from making it out alive, this is the upgrade you want to have.
Tier 1 (Option 2): Unity

Brings Tyto to Fang's location and causes Fang to stop attacking.

If you want maximum mobility and nearly global map presence, this is the upgrade you'll want to pick up. Unity will let you quickly get anywhere on a map -- so whether you need to quickly get to a team fight or catch up with an escaping enemy to lock them down, this upgrade will help you out.

Unity splits into the following Tier 2 upgrades:

  • Celerity: Increases your haste by 33% for 3 secs once you have teleported.
    • This upgrade is beneficial if you need to keep laying on the burst damage while keeping up with your target. It's also good if you're playing more stealthily and want to have the enemy distracted before you jump into the fight yourself. Either way, no one is going to be getting away from you with this upgrade.
  • Disruption: Causes Fang's opponent to be dazed when you teleport in.
    • This is obviously a great upgrade for crowd control. If you want to take full control over the enemy's movements during a fight, you can use this to hold them still while you either further immobilize and stack bleeds with Blade Dance, get burst damage via Hidden Talon or Swoop, or slowly wear them down with crit damage.

F Ability: Blur

Blur is another of Tyto's more useful attacks (F). It's best used against a group of enemies, as the rushing motion gives all enemies in the group a bleed effect. It is a very strategic ability, as it will mean that opponents will be less likely to bunch up -- making it easier for the rest of your team to pick them off one by one.

The upgrade paths for this ability are as follows:

Tier 1 (Option 1): Easy Strider

Allows you to move 10% faster and reduces the rate at which Stamina drains by 25%

This is a great mobility upgrade that will let you sprint all over the map -- getting out of harm's way or hunting down targets who almost made it out alive.

Easy Strider splits into the following Tier 2 upgrades:

  • Skirmishing: Gives you faster stamina regen while you are in combat, and also makes health regen start 2 secs sooner when you leave combat.
    • This upgrade is perfect if find yourself serving as DPS in a more sustained combat situation -- because you need all the stamina you can get for your biggest abilities. This is also good to use if you find yourself roving the map and burning a lot of abilities in order to lock down the backline or retreating targets.
  • Pure Escapism: Lose a debuff when you dodge (only usable every 20 secs).
    • This option is fantastic if you know that you are up against a lot of opponents who dish out debuffs. You can dodge your way out of a nasty fight, shake off a debuff, then retaliate with some burst damage or some bleed (+debuffs) of your own to turn the tides of the engagement.
Tier 1 (Option 2): Angular Momentum

Gives a 15% boost to basic damage if you attack from behind or after dodging.

This would be a fantastic ability to pick up if you wanted to play Tyto as a stealthy character and use the element of surprise to your advantage on unsuspecting opponents. This has a lot of good synergy with Tyto's other mobility and CC-oriented abilities as well.

Angular Momentum splits into the following Tier 2 upgrades:

  • Precision: Increases the rate at which you build crit chance.
    • If you want to flank and crit-hit your way through a sustained engagement or increase your chances of shredding enemies from behind, then this is the upgrade for you.
  • Battle Ready: 10% more front damage reduction, with an additional 5 points added during combat. 
    • This is very much a survivability upgrade. If you find yourself getting squished a little too often, or having to face the enemy head-on rather than sneaking about and chasing them down, then you'll want to pick this upgrade up. You'll be able to play a little more defensively and wait out the enemy for the perfect opportunity to strike. 

All in all, Tyto the Swift is suited to players who like fast moving characters in their MOBA games. He might take some getting used to, as you need to always be thinking about how you can get out of combat as well as how to deal damage without taking too much yourself.

Make good use of Fang with his armor-ignoring abilities inflict the most damage you can before clearing off and finding your next victim. And don't worry too much about shoving yourself in the middle of team fights -- there will always be other characters on your team who can stay in the thick of it while you pick them off at the sides!

So, there you have it! We hope this guide to how Tyto the Swift in Gigantic works and the useful tips we've given works for you.  But if you try it out and learn that Tyto the Swift isn't really your style, then make sure you check out the rest of our Gigantic guides for more tips for other characters!

Horizon Zero Dawn Guide: How to Survive in Ultra Hard Mode,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/h/z/d/hzdtitle-6248d.jpg x8x4p/horizon-zero-dawn-guide-how-to-survive-in-ultra-hard-mode Mon, 24 Jul 2017 16:12:43 -0400 Wizard of Warsaw

Horizon Zero Dawn was an instant hit after its release in February. And with DLC expected to come out later this year, Guerrilla Games decided to give the fans a little something to hold them over. A recent update added in New Game+ and Ultra Hard Mode giving players an opportunity to gear up for the upcoming content.  

Both of these additions are only available after you've beaten the game once -- and while New Game+ might just be for fun, the added difficulty in Ultra Hard Mode is not for the faint of heart. But if you think you're up for it, here's a guide packed with tips to help get you through the trials of the hardest difficulty in Horizon Zero Dawn

How to Beat Ultra Hard Mode in Horizon Zero Dawn

Don’t Start From the Beginning 

This is one of the most important things I can tell you. Only the truest of masochists would start an entirely new game on Ultra Hard Mode. (I did, and I regret not packaging the salt that was produced throughout the experience.) 

The first thing you'll want to do will be to play through the game once on a lower difficulty. What difficulty you choose is up to you, but there's no reward for playing a harder difficulty, so I recommend normal to start.  

Get The NG+ Weapons

After beating it your first time through, start New Game+ and play through it again, preferably on a low difficulty again. This is where you'll really want to take your time. The goal here is to get as stacked as possible for your Ultra Hard Mode run. 

New Game+ adds in some new weapons (like the Adept Sharpshot bow below), which can be found on merchants in Meridian and through the Hunting Trails for the Lodge. You'll want to look out for those, since they give you an additional modification slot. They're pretty hardcore -- requiring both some serious shards and the upper tier machine parts (things like Thunderjaw hearts and the like).

Once you're max level and you've got all the weapons and armor that you think you'll need, then it's time to move on to the challenge. 

If you've done as recommended, you'll be starting the game pretty well off. Despite your preparation, you will still probably get the crap kicked out of you a few times -- so be prepared for that. Ultra-Hard mode changes a ton of little things that all add up to making everything way more stressful. 

Pay Much Closer Attention to Health and Damage 

The changes to enemy health and damage aren't exactly inspired or original but they are tried and true for increasing difficulty. Enemies will have considerably more health and they will hit you a lot harder with buffed damage.

Unless you're running some hardcore tank armor, you can expect to be one shot a few times. So it'll be in your best interest not to take too many chances in fights -- utilize shock wire, blast wire, tear arrows, and other tactics to blow off as much of their offensive/defensive parts as possible so they have a significantly lower chance of knocking you out. Going all "leroy jenkins" on these mechanical beasts isn't going to do you any favors. 

Also remember that you won't be able to see how much health an enemy has left, so you have no way of knowing how close you are to the end of a fight. This makes it doubly important to pay attention to your strategy, target an enemies weak points as much as possible, and make sure you have the resources on hand to sustain yourself in a longer combat situation. 

Be Prepared for Item Shortages & Fewer Resources

If you took the path recommended above, you should mostly have the weapons and armor that you need to give yourself a chance in this challenging difficulty level. But once you're in Ultra-Hard mode, you'll find that items are really only for the top 1%, with later stage weapons being worth thousands of shards. Farming this much money on Ultra Hard difficulty is almost impossible because of how immensely dangerous every machine is -- so you'll want to try and stock up on as many resources as you can before you enter this new difficulty at all. 

Because resources are more scarce (and more expensive), healing becomes a bit of a problem as well. Stocking up on medicinal plants becomes more of a hassle, since they provide less health than plants in lower difficulties and become harder to find. When enemies aren't absolutely demolishing you, you'll be spamming your healing items -- so keeping a full pouch is almost impossible.

With that in mind, you'll want to try and spend time scrounging up as many resources (especially healing plants) that you can possibly find out in the wilds. Just don't disturb any of the techno-beasts and wind up in a fight you're not prepared for.  

Don't Rely Heavily on Stealth

If you're the sort of Horizon Zero Dawn player who preferred to hide in the bushes and tear off dino parts, you're in for a nasty surprise if you pick up Ultra Hard mode. Stealth at this difficulty level is a major pain. Machines are way more capable when it comes to detecting you. So if you do use stealth, be aware that your enemies may very well see you even if you're wearing maxed-out stealth armor and are crouching in a bush.

Stealth kills will also be more difficult, since all enemies have significantly more health. But you can still override machines and let them duke it out while you hide on the sidelines. Just be careful if you decide to provide assistance during machine duels -- any damage an overriden machine takes from you will force it into being hostile again. (Seriously...any damage at all.

Be as Accurate as Possible

Accuracy is a really important skill to have before stepping into Ultra Hard mode. I thought I was a pretty good shot before stepping into it, and the first group of Watchers that I went up against quickly knocked me down a peg.

I was never able to verify this, but I will swear until my dying days that this mode makes the hit boxes on enemy weak points smaller. I have never seen so many arrows seemingly strike a Watchers eye just to have a small armor piece pop off the side of its head.  

So as you play, you'll want to keep in mind that pinpoint accuracy is essential. Take time to plan out and hone in your shots so that you don't incur a bunch of aggro for a shot that barely does any damage or tears any armor. 


Ultra-Hard mode is not a forgiving experience, so make sure to enter the ordeal fully prepared. And if you need a little refresher on how to play the rest of the game, check out our other Horizon Zero Dawn guides for more information:

A Guide For Blue, Green, and Red Science Packs Production in Factorio,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/c/i/science-automation-0afbd.jpg 7e8ob/a-guide-for-blue-green-and-red-science-packs-production-in-factorio Mon, 24 Jul 2017 15:23:32 -0400 ESpalding

While you get to make a lot of things in Factorio, one of the most important items you will need are Science Packs. These packs for them basis of the tech tree research progression in-game. The most common science packs that you will find yourself using are Blue, Green, and Red (Red being the easiest to produce).

We briefly touched upon science packs in our beginner's guide to Factorio, but this guide is going to give you the low down on what goes into each pack and what level of research you are going to need to make everything.

How to Produce Blue Science Packs in Factorio

Out of the three types of science we are going to look at in this guide, Blue Science is the most demanding. Also referred to as science pack 3, this is the third tier of research and is used to advance existing technologies.

From the outset, you will need Advanced Circuits, Electric Mining Drill, and an Engine Unit. You will also need to research Advanced Electronics.

Blue Science recipe

All of the main components for Blue Science pack will require you to use Assembly Machine 2, as the recipes consist of 3 or more materials. So let's break down those components to see how complex Blue science packs are.

Advanced Circuit

About halfway through the game, you will find yourself in need of a lot of high-end technology -- and Advanced Circuits are used in almost all of them! They are a very crucial part of the end game, and as such, they do require quite a bit to make.

Advanced Circuit recipe

While the recipe itself seems relatively easy, it does require Plastic Bars. These can only be crafted if you have done a bit more research:

Electric Mining Drill

We are already quite familiar with the Electric Mining Drill. They are one of the first things you upgrade once you have started to generate electricity.

Electric Mining Drill recipe

Engine Unit

The Engine Units in-game are mainly used to create vehicles -- so it makes sense that the higher tier technologies require them, as you will start to move things around the map and create trucks and cars etc.

They require the Engine technology to have been researched, but only need pretty basic materials to make. Once you have the tech and the materials, these Engine Units will open up a whole new aspect of the game.

Engine Unit recipe

Green Science Pack Production

Before you are able to produce Blue Science packs, you are going to have to make Green Science packs. Green Science (or science pack 2) make up the bulk of the earlier stages of tech tree progression. You need to prepare to make LOTS of them!

Green Science recipe

Looking at them, you'd be forgiven for thinking that because they only require two pretty standard components, they are easy and quick to make -- but unfortunately you would be wrong. Green Science packs need basic Inserters and Transport Belt pieces.

Let's break these down...


Inserter recipe

Inserters require specific technology to make them, and are one of the earliest items you can craft. As you can see, they are made of basic components -- but because they're composed of 3 items, for automated production, they can only be made in an Assembly Machine 2 (which you get when you unlocked the Automation 2 technology).

  • Note: For efficiency purposes, it is recommended that you aim to get this technology as soon as you can.
Transport Belt

Transport Belt recipe

Again, Transport Belts only require basic components and can be created straight away. Since they only require two components to make them, they can be made via an Assembly Machine 1 -- which you get from researching Automation.

Red Science Pack Production

The easiest has been left until last! They require only two components, and one of them comes straight out of a furnace. Red Science needs Copper Plate and Iron Gear Wheels. The wheels can be made straight from iron plates.

Red Science recipe

Automated production of Red and Green Science is relatively straightforward. The majority of components can be crafted as soon as you have researched Automation. You just have to wait until you have researched the next level of it to be able to make inserters in an assembly machine. Blue, on the other hand, will take considerably longer to sort out.

There are plenty of blueprints and information on how to create an effective automated production of all the science packs -- but before diving in and copying another's design, we highly recommend that you go and try to design one yourself so that you know how it works. Also, every map is different, so yours might end up having the raw materials in totally a different place!

Once you have nailed your science pack production, you can then begin to look at Labs and progressing up the tech research tree! 

Time to get researching in the Lab

There you go! We hope that this guide to the blue, green, and red science packs in Factorio will give you a much-needed boost in the right direction. Make sure you check out our other Factorio guides for more help keeping your factories running smoothly:

Marvel Contest of Champions Beginner's Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/n/contest-champions-header-with-text-289f5.png r3952/marvel-contest-of-champions-beginners-guide Mon, 24 Jul 2017 13:10:42 -0400 Joseph Rowe

Whether you've just downloaded the game or you're a veteran that just needs a few refreshers, this Marvel: Contest of Champions beginner's guide will ensure you kick enemy butt as much as possible.

This is a mobile fighting game where you tap, swipe, and hold on the left and right sides of the screens to perform different attacks and movements. It seems a bit complicated at first, but if you put some time in and follow this Contest of Champions beginner's guide, you'll be sending your enemies crying to Stan Lee in no time.


First things first in Contest of Champions: you have to know how to play. 

The right side of your screen is for offense. If you tap it, you perform a light attack. If you swipe it, you perform a medium attack. If you hold it, you perform a heavy attack. Light attacks are the fastest but weakest and heavy ones are the slowest but most powerful. Light and medium attacks can be blocked, but heavy attacks break blocks.

The left side of your screen is for defense. If you hold the left side, you will block. If you swipe the left side, you will dash backwards (known as a dodge in game) and create space between you and your opponent. If you swipe right from a distance, you will charge with a medium attack.


Get Defensive in Fights 

Just like dealing with jerks online, blocking is your friend. Get used to it. Your damage persists between fights on your quests, so do your best to minimize the damage you take. Blocking won't completely nullify your opponent's damage, but it will reduce it.

At the start of the match, unless you know your attack animation is going to be faster than your opponent's, you will want to block. Most AI opponents will immediately try to attack you.

I like to block my opponent's attacks until I see an opening, then I try to get a 5-hit combo in before blocking again or dashing back. Dashing back is good in situations where you need to get space from your opponent if they're constantly rushing you down or about to heavy attack, but you never want to get yourself cornered. No one puts summoner in a corner if this Contest of Champions beginner's guide has anything to say about it.

You can unlock dexterity and parrying in your mastery tree by buying enough stoney cores. This will completely change your playstyle, as you will want to use evades (given by dexterity) and parries as much as possible to minimize your damage and stun your opponent to leave them open for combos and special moves.

To evade, get dexterity and simply time your dodging correctly. To parry, you have to tap block at just the right moment. Check the video below from YouTube channel Dork Lessons for the perfect timing.

Taking the Offensive

The best offense is a good defense -- and now that you've got that out of the way from the previous part of this Contest of Champions beginner's guide, it's time to teach you how to properly attack.

Like most other fighting games, you will do more damage if you land combos. Combos are just strings of uninterrupted attacks. In most fighting games, a combo is reset after your enemy is no longer affected by your last attack -- but in Contest of Champions, your combo goes on until you get hit without blocking. This means you can combo for the entire match!

The easiest and most consistent combo I found is 5-hits. You simply tap light attack three times then swipe medium attack twice. This will do a decent amount of damage. After getting a combo in, you'll want to block, as the AI is likely to retaliate.

If the AI is blocking your attack, you'll want to either heavy attack them or just block until they open themselves up again for another combo. You can also do a 2-hit medium attack combo by swiping right twice and a 4-hit light attack combo by tapping four times.

Since this is just a beginner's guide, these tips are written for lower level AI. As you progress, you'll want to make sure to master parrying and evasion to be able to handle harder opponents.

Contest of Champions Beginner's Guide Offense Section Image

Understanding Champion Classes

Each character in Contest of Champions has a specific class that more or less ties into one of the super hero sub-types in the Marvel comics universe. There are cosmic, tech, mutant, skill, science, and mystic champions -- and each has its own classes it's weak to and strong against. The wheel below is a visual guide created by Reddit user Volcano_T-Rex, but for the purposes of this beginner's guide we'll break it all down in case you want more information.

Contest of Champions Beginner's Guide Weakness Wheel from Volcano_T-Rex


Cosmic champions are those whose comics deal with Marvel's more sci-fi inspired stories. This class has characters like Ronan and Captain Marvel. Cosmic champions are strong against tech champions, but weak against mystic champions.


Mutant champions are, well, mutants. They are the next step in the evolution of man. This class includes characters like Wolverine and Deadpool. Mutants are strong against skill champions, but weak against tech champions


Mystic champions are those who rely on magic for their source of power. This class counts Dormammu and Magik among its ranks. They are strong against cosmic champions, but weak against science champions.


Science champions are those who use their intelligence to fight or were altered by science somehow. This class has characters like Spider-Man and She-Hulk. Science is strong against mystic champions, but weak against skill champions.


Skill champions are those who rely on their skills instead of on super powers. These champions include Black Panther and Daredevil. Skill champs are strong against science champions, but weak against mutants.


Tech champions are the kinds of characters that use their technology to do their fighting like Iron Man and Star-Lord. They're strong against mutant champions, but weak against cosmic champions.

Upgrading Your Champion

This is the part of the Contest of Champions beginner's guide where we put away our fists and break out our chemistry sets to isolate some sweet ISO-8

Every champion you get can be upgraded in some way, whether they're a 1-star or 5-star. It is important to make sure you do this so you can progress in your quests, arenas, and alliance by making your characters stronger. Plus, stronger characters win fights faster -- so you'll earn currency and other rewards at a better rate.

The video below is from YouTube user mvince able, and features him leveling and ranking up 4-star champions.

Leveling Up Champions

To be able to rank your characters up, first you must level them. You level them by spending ISO-8, a type of currency you collect by playing the game or opening crystals. The amount of ISO-8 you get with each crystal or quest varies, but they come in specific increments, like 75 and 125. You can even get class-specific ISO-8 to help you level characters faster!

Leveling up your characters costs gold. Since there is a resource cost and 1-star heroes are only really relevant at the start of the game, you should do your best to wait until you get your first 2-stars to pour currency into leveling up.

Ranking Up Champions

In order to rank your champion, they have to be max level. Once you've maxed them out, you can spend catalysts to rank your characters up.

Much like there are 1-star and 5-star champions, there are tier 1 and tier 5 catalysts. The tiers don't correspond to the stars exactly, but a 2-star champion won't require tier 5 catalyst, whereas a 5-star champion will.

You unlock catalysts by playing special events. Each day in the event quests section, there will be a set of quests you can complete to unlock catalysts. You will earn basic catalysts by completing daily quests in the proving grounds event, and class-specific catalysts in the cosmic conflict daily quest.

Currently, the schedule for these class-specific catalysts is as follows: 

  • Monday: Mutant catalysts
  • Tuesday: Skill catalysts
  • Wednesday: Science catalysts
  • Thursday: Mystical catalysts 
  • Friday: Cosmic catalysts
  • Saturday: Tech catalysts
  • Sunday: Different catalysts depending on difficulty


You unlock the mastery tree at level 5. This is the most customizable part of the game, as there are loads of different viable mastery builds.

When you're starting out, it's important to go to the utility tree and focus on unlocking dexterity and parry. After that, it's flexible in the early stages. I am a fan of playing rush down characters in fighting games like Street Fighter and Guilty Gear so I've focused on my offense tree.

If you don't mind spending the gold on reassigning points, you can even experiment by recovering your points and trying out new builds. I'll be writing an in-depth mastery guide sometime in the next few days and linking it to this Contest of Champions beginner's guide so stay tuned!

Contest of Champions Beginner's Guide Mastery Section

Building a Team

What's a piece of media from Marvel without team-ups? The same thing as a Contest of Champions beginner's guide without touching on team building: incomplete.

As you progress through the game, you'll unlock more characters. When you use these characters to build your team, you will want to keep a few things in mind. It's important to have class variation in your teams. You want to make sure that you have your bases covered in terms of strengths and weaknesses. As tempting as it is to be like a Pokemon gym trainer and make a team of all scientists or all skill characters, you'll have a harder time that way.

It's also important to consider synergy bonuses when creating your team. You probably won't have enough heroes at this point to make a team with synergy, but you should always check when selecting your champions. Synergy bonuses will vary depending on the specific characters, but they can give you boosts in areas like health, stun chance, critical hit rate, etc.

Contest of Champions Beginner's Guide Synergy Image

Story Quests

No Contest of Champions beginner's guide would complete without discussing story quests. There are currently 5 acts, with Act 5 still pending release (currently at 2 chapters). Save for the most recent act, all acts are comprised of four chapters. Each chapter has six quests. You unlock each chapter, act, etc. by completing the previous one.

Throughout the quests, you have a chance to unlock various items on your path. Completing the chapters and acts will yield rewards like 3-star and 4-star champion crystals, 5-star champion crystal shards, premium hero crystals, ISO-8, and more.

You can look at the rewards ahead of time for completing any act up until 4. If you do this, you can see each act's completion rewards, chapter rewards, and exploration rewards. If you go back through the quests you've previously completed and make sure to take every path available, you will 100% the exploration for the act and earn some pretty amazing rewards, like a 4-star hero crystal in Act 4. 


Now, let's talk about this game's version of guilds/clans: alliances. In Contest of Champions, alliances are totally worth it -- because you can get all sorts of great rewards for joining and participating in them.

When you first join an alliance, you get 25 credits and a premium crystal for free! That premium crystal is a huge boost to you in the beginning, so it's definitely worth joining one as soon as you can.

You also earn a currency called loyalty by going to the help tab of the alliance section and assisting your teammates! They can do the same for you when you're out of quest energy -- helping to restore some of it or to lower the cooldown of one of your heroes in versus mode.

Loyalty can be spent on alliance crystals. These crystals contain various boosts, and most importantly, a 3-star Unstoppable Colossus. Getting this hero will definitely add some more tankiness to your team, so it's definitely worth trying for.

Alliance Events

Alliance events last anywhere from one day to a whole week. Each event has different requirements in order to earn points, but if you earn enough points to reach a milestone, you will earn rewards. Every time you reach a new milestone, you get better rewards. 

Alliance Quests

Alliance quests are unlocked at level 17. You can earn alliance quest crystals which award catalysts, alpha crystal fragments, and alliance potions.

Alliance Wars 

Alliance wars are unlocked at 17, too, and are similar to their quest counterparts -- except you will be going against enemies placed by an opposing alliance of players and placing your own defensive characters for them to fight instead of facing down the AI.

Rewards for this mode are champion crystal shards, war victor crystals, loyalty, and gold. If you win your war, you will get the war victor crystal which contains various kinds of currency, boosts, and signature stones.

The video above, courtesy of YouTube channel JEGA KOJEG, shows what the offensive phase of an alliance war looks like. I'll be creating a guide for alliance wars, as well, so stay tuned for that because I'll link to it here!


Before I wrap up this Contest of Champions beginner's guide, I'll discuss my favorite part of the game: the arena. Here, you can play against the teams of other players. It's the closest you'll get to playing against another human in this game, outside of alliance wars.

In the versus section, you have the option of doing a 1v1 quick battle or entering one of the 3v3 or 5v5 arenas. Completing quick battles will get you versus crystals which will give you gold, energy refills, or battle chips. Similar to the Unstoppable Colossus, you can unlock a 3-star or 4-star Punisher champion in one of these crystals.

Battle chips can also be unlocked from completing arenas. This type of currency is used to unlock higher level arenas. It can also be used to purchase arena crystals. These kinds of crystals will yield better quality or higher amounts of gold, ISO-8, units, and potions. You can also get the Punisher champion here as well.

Each arena has its own difficulty, its own type of reward (crystals, catalysts, or champions) and is balanced for character stars. If you're just a beginner, which we assume so if you're reading this guide, you'll want to start with the first arena quest from the bunch until you get the hang of it.

Contest of Champions Beginner's Guide Arena/Versus Image

The picture above shows what it looks like as you prepare for an arena match. You have the choice of fighting 3 teams with a difficulty assessment next to their names. After picking an opponent's team, you can rearrange your characters in any order you want -- so be sure to prioritize your champion's class's strengths against your opponent's weaknesses.

For every win you earn in a specific arena, you'll get a multiplier. This will amplify the points you get for every win, which allows you to reach milestones faster. However, with every multiplier bonus, your enemies will become more difficult. You can spend credits, though, to choose a new match-up if you're afraid of losing a multiplier.


That's the end of this Marvel Contest of Champions beginner's guide. If you have any tips of your own to add or think I might have overlooked something, let me know in the comments! And stay tuned for more Contest of Champions guides to get ahead in this game.

Valiant Force Training and Fusion Systems Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/a/p/capture6-2725f.JPG w3rmr/valiant-force-training-and-fusion-systems-guide Mon, 24 Jul 2017 10:30:20 -0400 ActionJ4ck

Training -- also called Card Fusion -- is vital for optimizing your heroes in Valiant Force. Because the training system is required for job advancement and key stat boosts, you will find yourself severely outmatched as the game goes on if you don't learn how to take full advantage of it. Luckily, we're here to help guide you through the process.

To unlock the ability to fuse your cards, all you have to do is achieve player level 7 (note that your player level is not the same as your heroes' levels). This can be done in a day or two as long as you remember to claim your daily quest rewards, as these grant a large amount of player XP. 

How to Train/Fuse Cards in Valiant Force

Now that you've reached player level 7, you can fuse cards by going to hero screen of the character you want to upgrade and selecting Train in the Job Level section on the right (see image above). Do that, and you'll be taken to a screen like the one below, where you'll be asked to select some of your other units to fuse into the center one.

Notice how different units contribute a different percentage to the main hero's training. The higher the unit's current number of stars, the more it will contribute. Feel free to use any units that only have the potential for 1-3 stars, as they are just fodder for your 4 and 5-star heroes. Even units with a maximum of 4-star potential will serve as fodder eventually, but in the early game you can still squeeze a lot of use out of them.

Once you've chosen which units you want to fuse into your center hero, simply pay the gold and watch the training bar increase. Don't forget that all units used for fusion will be lost forever, so double-check to make sure that you're not using anyone important.

Keep feeding units, and eventually your hero will achieve 100% Training, granting them instant stat bonuses. But it doesn't stop there. You just maxed out the hero's Job Training, but it still hasn't increased their Job Level. So why not? Odds are your hero hasn't reached their maximum Hero Level yet, which is 20. If you look at the image below, you'll notice there's both the Hero Level on the left side and the Job Level on right side.

Once your hero has maxed out both his/her Hero Level (20) and their Job Training (100%), you'll finally be able to upgrade them to the next Job Level by tapping the green Upgrade button on the right. 

Once you do that, you'll receive some sizable stat increases, a heightened max level for the hero's skill, and a +1 next to the unit's job name to denote their current Job Level. Their Training will return to 0% and their Hero Level will be brought back down to 1 so that you can experience the fun of raising them back up all over again. If you plan on advancing your hero into a more advanced job, then you'll have to get them to their current job +2


How to Get More Fodder For Fusion in Valiant Force

You'll probably burn through your supply of 1-3 star heroes quickly, but luckily acquiring more fusion fodder doesn't require too much effort on your part. Here are few methods:

  • Pay Gold: You can spend 45,000 gold to summon a pack of 10 1-3 star units, which will usually be enough to fully train a 3-star hero and most of a 4-star hero. Though you shouldn't overdo it at first, gold will become much less of an issue as the game goes on.
  • Farm: Maps 22-3, 23-3, and 24-3 are ideal for farming low-potential heroes thanks to their low energy cost to run and decent hero drop rates. 
  • Quests: Daily quests throw a surprising number of hero tickets at you, and doing them also grants you XP, gold, and items, so there's really no downside to doing them.
  • Be patient: you can get a free 1-3 star summon every day. While this method is admittedly slow, it also doesn't take up any play time or resources. It adds up, trust me.

Now that you understand how fusion and training work in Valiant Force, you are well on your way to assembling the ultimate fighting team. But if you want even more help, then you can check out some of our other Valiant Force guides here on GameSkinny.

Fortnite Guide: Map Exploration and Resource Gathering,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov-48a1a.jpg i3o4t/fortnite-guide-map-exploration-and-resource-gathering Mon, 24 Jul 2017 10:14:36 -0400 Ty Arthur

Before you can battle a wave of zombie monsters in a Fortnite match, your group of Heroes will first have to explore a randomized map with varying objectives and loads of potential loot.

While your first inclination may be to run straight to the objective and get started fighting undead, always resist this urge! If you want the best card drops and the most efficient base defenses, your group needs to properly search for secrets across the map and spend time gathering resources.

Below we cover everything you need to know during the map exploration phase. Need help with other aspects of Fortnite? Be sure to check out our Fortnite guides:

Getting Higher Level Loot in Fortnite

Take your time and fully explore the map to find everything before completing the starting objective that initiates the zombie horde. Everyone on the team will get much better loot this way and be more prepared taking this route rather than rushing straight towards the objective and starting the battle.

For every Badge you earn and bonus objective your team completes, the level of your loot box at the end of the quest will increase. When you hit loot box level 4 or above, the real goods start to be unloaded; you'll soon be flooded with awesome schematics and rare Heroes. Make sure to always strive for these objectives:

  • Exploration Badge for revealing 100% of the map (hit M to see what hasn't been revealed yet by the team)
  • Combat Badge for head shots and dealing more damage than other players
  • Time Bonus for completing the map in under 2 days (I've never had this bonus not appear and have been matched with some incredibly slow players, so honestly, I have no idea how the "day" counter is supposed to work or how long a "day" is at this point in Beta)
  • Time Bonus objective for finding an object and starting the base building process within a predetermined amount of time (such as 5 or 8 minutes)
  • Don't Overbuild Bonus for not building past a certain number of objects determined by the map (such as 30 or 60)

 Getting a nice Loot Chest

Gathering Resources and Crafting Materials in Fortnite

To build base objects like floors and stairs in Fortnite, you need wood, brick, and metal resources, and where to find those three are fairly obvious. Trees, benches, and walls are good places to harvest wood; anything made of rock or stone gives up brick; and any large metal objects or piles of ore offer metal.

You'll pretty much always have more of the three basic building materials than you need. What's more scarce are materials for crafting traps, weapons, and ammo.

Before harvesting an object with your Pick Axe, check to see if it can be searched first -- items that are obviously containers (chest, fridges, bookcases, sleeping bags, cabinets, ovens) are frequently searchable. Holding E to search provides random items and crafting materials. After searching, then go ahead and bash the object apart for building materials.

Objects harvested with the pick axe can also provide crafting material even without being searched. Some objects are more prone than others to have the rare items or crafting materials you need. For instance, take out televisions whenever you find them. Lawn gnomes are usually empty, but have a small chance to offer up crafting materials.

The Outlander class ability Keen Eyes reveals containers with valuable objects, but over time exploring maps, it becomes apparent which objects spawn more often and which are less frequent -- harvest the latter first. 

 Harvesting Ore 

Survivors And Surprises

While exploring in Fortnite, be on the lookout for radar dishes and other random objects on any given map that can give your team a boost. Typically, these require powering up with 3 pieces of BluGlo, and when properly powered, they give everyone on your team a damage boost.

Random Survivors are also found on every map, usually on top of vehicles or in small wood shanties. Aid these Survivors -- either by fending off a small wave of zombies or just immediately talking to them -- to get bonus rewards for the whole team. Don't talk to Survivors when they are on the edge of a cliff, however. Your reward will fall off the map into the digital aether, never to be seen again!

Whenever a map quest has you searching for BluGlo, be prepared for a mini-game titled Whack-A-Troll that currently appears to launch at random with no rhyme or reason. When the game starts, switch to your Pick Axe and whack at the troll when it pops out of dimensional holes in the ground. If everyone on the team whacks the troll enough, random bonus prizes will appear.

Finally, always be on the lookout for treasure chests! They look just like the loot chests awarded after a quest and are often hiding in the nooks and crannies of house attics, the corners of the top floors of other buildings, and sometimes in basements of abandoned science facilities.

Mineshafts and hidden residential house basements are other frequent chest locations, and sometimes these are found by getting creative and making your own entrances. When you enter a house, point down and smash out the floor to see if there's a hidden basement section.

Chests hook you up with free bullets and several random crafting components, so make sure to seek them out.

 Finding an attic chest

Now you know all the basics for how to spend the searching and exploration phase of any Fortnite quest! We hope to see you online soon, and be sure to leave a comment with any other map secrets you've discovered so far!

Best Diablo 3 Monk Builds for Season 11,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/b/e/s/best-monk-builds-season-cd8af.png 56p0r/best-diablo-3-monk-builds-for-season-11 Mon, 24 Jul 2017 10:12:40 -0400 Joseph Rowe

Looking to play a monk in Season 11? Want to know which builds will help you clear greater rifts the fastest but don't want to have to sort through a bunch of them? Look no further than our guide on the best Diablo 3 monk builds this season! 

The ranking of these builds is based on Rhykker's tier list for season 11. As balance changes are made and more is learned about the Necromancer, the builds might go up or down a few pegs on the tier list -- but ultimately, they'll be the best monk builds this season (in the opinion of one of the community's most respected players).

Raiment Duo-Gen Monk Build

The Raiment Duo-Gen build is the best monk build this season. It places in A-tier and comes in at the fifth best build for all classes this season, according to Rhykker. It is great for solo play and is up there for group DPS.

Keep in mind, though, that this is a fragile build -- so you will need to be mobile to avoid dying and immobile to get the bonuses from your neck/ring set. 

In order to complete this build, you will need the following:

  • Head: Mask of the Searing Sky with a Flawless Royal Amethyst
  • Shoulders: Mantle of the Upside-Down Sinners
  • Neck: The Traveler's Pledge with Bane of the Trapped
  • Torso: Heart of the Crashing Wave with Flawless Royal Diamond x3 
  • Waist: The Witching Hour
  • Hands: Fists of Thunder
  • Wrists: Spirit Guards
  • Legs: Scales of the Dancing Serpent with Flawless Royal Diamond x2
  • Feet: Eight-Demon Boots
  • Left Finger: The Compass Rose with Bane of the Stricken
  • Right Finger: Convention of Elements with Simplicity's Strength 
  • Main-Hand: Shenlong's Fist of Legend with Flawless Royal Emerald
  • Off-Hand: Shenlong's Fist of Legend with Flawless Royal Emerald

You will want the following items in your Kanai's Cube:

  • Flying Dragon
  • Depth Diggers
  • Unity

DKTheos of DiabloFan recommends the following Paragon priorities for Raiment Duo-Gen builds:

  • Dexterity>Max Spirit>Movement Speed>Vitality
  • Crit Hit Damage>Crit Hit Chance>Attack Speed>Cooldown Reduction
  • Resist All>Armor>Life Regen>Life
  • Area Damage>Life on Hit>Resource Cost Reduction>Gold Find

This is the monk build that Rhykker suggests for Raiment Duo-Gen, but if you don't have all the necessary pieces, DKTheos swaps out the shoulders with Lefebvre's Soliloquy, the amulet with a Hellfire Amulet, the waist with String of Ears or Goldwrap, and recommends both Unity and Stone of Jordan over Convention of Elements. 

Inna EP Monk Build

This is Rhykker's second highest ranking monk build for this season. He places it in the B-tier -- but it is ranked 6, so it's fairly close to the Raiment Duo-Gen monk build. It utilizes the Inna set and Exploding Palm with the Impending Doom rune. Inna's will give you some sweet buffs to both your Mystic Allies and your Mantras, allowing you to use all of them simultaneously. Your allies will be doubled because of the boots! So many allies! You'll have more allies than the current political administration.

In order to successfully pull this build off, you will have to equip:

  • Head: Inna's Radiance with Flawless Royal Diamond
  • Shoulders: Lefebvre's Soliloquy
  • Neck: The Traveler's Pledge with Bane of the Trapped
  • Torso: Inna's Vast Expanse with Flawless Royal Diamond x3
  • Waist: Inna's Favor
  • Hands: Inna's Hold
  • Wrists: Gungdo Gear
  • Legs: Inna's Temperance with Flawless Royal Diamond x2
  • Feet: The Crudest Boots
  • Left Finger: The Compass Rose with Pain Enhancer
  • Right Finger: Convention of Elements with Bane of the Stricken
  • Main-Hand: Inna's Reach with Flawless Royal Emerald

Your Kanai's Cube should be like this:

  • The Fist of Az'Turrasq
  • Bindings of the Lesser Gods 
  • Unity

YouTube's Quin69 recommends the following Paragon priorites for an Inna's EP build:

  • Movement Speed>Dexterity>Max Spirit>Vitality
  • Cooldown Reduction>Crit Hit Damage>Crit Hit Chance>Attack Speed
  • Resist All>Armor>Life>Life Regen
  • Area Damage*>Resource Cost Reduction>Life on Hit>Gold Find

Note: Some players, like Reddit's How2Post in this thread for a returning player on the Monk subreddit, recommend removing area damage Paragon points if you're playing support in a group.

Inna's is high in demand for group play in the top of the leaderboards in general -- and as of the writing of this monk build guide, one of the top 4-man team monk players on the leaderboards uses a similar Inna's build with a few variations. S/he uses Leoric's Crown instead of Inna's Radiance, a Hellfire Amulet, an Occulus Ring with Esoteric Alteration and an Obsidian Ring of the Zodiac with Gem of the Efficacious Toxin, Illusory Boots, and dual wields the Slanderer and Little Rogue. 

LTK LoN Monk Build

This is one of the two Lashing Tail Kick monk builds in this guide and it is tied with its counterpart for 10 in D-tier on Rhykker's Diablo 3 tier list. Most players who use this build use it for soloing. It's a solid pushing build, so if you're looking to farm greater rifts without a group, this is a good option for you this season.

This monk build does some serious fire damage with Cindercoat and Magefist's bonuses matching LTK's Vulture Claw Kick rune. Not only that, but the LTK itself is amplified significantly by Scarbringer, Gyana Na Kashu, and Rivera Dancers. If you have ancient versions of these items, your ring set will give you 100% damage and give you a nice bit of damage reduction as well. 

To complete this bad boy of a build, you will need:

  • Head: Gyana Na Kashu with Flawless Royal Topaz
  • Shoulders: Lefebvre's Soliloquy
  • Neck: Hellfire Amulet with Bane of the Trapped
  • Torso: Cindercoat with Flawless Royal Diamond x3
  • Waist: The Witching Hour
  • Hands: Magefist
  • Wrists: Strongarm Bracers
  • Legs: Skelon's Deceit with Flawless Royal Diamond x2
  • Feet: Rivera Dancers
  • Left Finger: Litany of the Undaunted with Bane of the Stricken
  • Right Finger: The Wailing Host with Gogok of Swiftness
  • Main-Hand: Scarbringer with Flawless Royal Emerald
  • Off-Hand: Crystal Fist with Flawless Royal Emerald

Make your Kanai's Cube do that wild thing it does with these sons of guns:

  • Flying Dragon
  • The Laws of Seph
  • Obsidian Ring of the Zodiac

Your Paragon points should be arranged in this order for this monk build, as per IcyVeins' suggestions:

  • Movement Speed>Dexterity>Max Spirit>Vitality
  • Cooldown Reduction>Crit Hit Damage>Crit Hit Chance>Attack Speed
  • Resist All>Armor>Life>Life Regen
  • Resource Cost Reduction>Area Damage>Life on Hit>Gold Find

Sunwuko LTK

If the LoN LTK monk build wasn't your flavor, check out this variation. Rhykker places this in D-Tier, and it's tied with the LoN LTK and a few other builds for the tenth best this season.

You'll find some survivability in this monk build in the bonuses allotted by the Sunwuko set. Your Sweeping Wind will halve the damage you take while spawning decoys to take damage for you -- and on top of that, it synergizes wonderfully with your Scarbringer, Rivera Dancers, and Gyana Na Kashu to ensure that your LTKs do insane amounts of damage. You'll also keep your spirit up by utilizing your Blinding Flash with the effect of the Laws of Seph from your Cube.

This monk build requires:

  • Head: Gyana Na Kashu with Flawless Royal Diamond
  • Shoulders: Sunwuko's Balance
  • Neck: Sunwuko's Shines with Bane of the Trapped
  • Torso: Sunwuko's Soul with Flawless Royal Diamond x3
  • Waist: The Witching Hour
  • Hands: Sunwuko's Paws
  • Wrists: Spirit Guards
  • Legs: Sunwuko's Leggings with Flawless Royal Diamond x3
  • Feet: Rivera Dancers
  • Left Finger: Convention of Elements with Bane of the Stricken
  • Right Finger: Obsidian Ring of the Zodiac with Gogok of Swiftness
  • Main-Hand: Scarbringer with Flawless Royal Emerald
  • Off-Hand: Crystal Fist with Flawless Royal Emerald

Set your Kanai's Cube up like so:

  • Flying Dragon
  • The Laws of Seph
  • Ring of Royal Grandeur

For this monk build, your Paragon priorities are, according to DiabloFan's IveGottenSoLucky:

  • Movement Speed>Max Spirit>Dexterity>Vitality
  • Cooldown Reduction>Crit Hit Chance>Crit Hit Damage>Attack Speed
  • Resist All>Life>Armor>Life Regen
  • Area Damage>Resource Cost Reduction>Life on Hit>Gold Find

Inna/Uliana Monk Build

Lastly for this season, Rhykker places this monk build in his F-tier builds that don't have a numerical ranking. Like the builds in D-tier, it's still one of the best builds in the game -- but if you're looking for pure GR clearing potential, you will want to use Raiment's or the other Inna's build.

Rhykker recommends this mostly if you're a Seven Sided Strike fan or are still building up your full Inna's set for the build above. Seven Sided Strike is amplified by the 4-set bonus you get from the three Uliana's pieces, plus Ring of Royal Grandeur as well as Lion's Claw's additional seven strikes. Uliana's also gives you a nice extra Exploding Palm every third spirit gen attack. Your Exploding Palm will do even more damage thanks to the full 6-set bonuses you get from the 4-armor pieces and Two-Handed Inna's weapon plus Ring of Royal Grandeur. 

This monk build needs the following pieces:

  • Head: Inna's Radiance with Flawless Royal Diamond
  • Shoulders: Uliana's Strength
  • Neck: The Traveler's Pledge with Bane of the Trapped
  • Torso: Inna's Vast Expanse with Flawless Royal Diamond x3
  • Waist: Inna's Favor
  • Hands: Uliana's Fury
  • Wrists: Spirit Guards
  • Legs: Inna's Temperance with Flawless Royal Diamond x2
  • Feet: Uliana's Destiny
  • Left Finger: Convention of Elements with Esoteric Alteration
  • Right Finger: The Compass Rose with Bane of the Stricken
  • Main-Hand: Inna's Reach with Flawless Royal Emerald

Your Kanai's Cube should have the following items:

  • Lion's Claw
  • The Crudest Boots
  • Ring of Royal Grandeur

According to DiabloFan poster IveGottenSoLucky, the stat priorities for a similar Inna's/Uliana's build are:

  • Movement Speed>Max Spirit>Vitality>Dexterity
  • Cooldown Reduction>Attack Speed>Crit Hit Chance>Crit Hit Damage
  • Resist All>Life>Armor>Life Regen
  • Resource Cost Reduction>Life on Hit>Gold Find>Area Damage


What build will you be running this season? Let us know in the comments! And be sure to check out the rest of our Diablo 3 guides for Rise of the Necromancer to get the most out of this season:

Fortnite Complete Guide to Classes,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/l/a/classes-1aa2f.jpg b2fl1/fortnite-complete-guide-to-classes Mon, 24 Jul 2017 09:55:34 -0400 Ty Arthur

Although a significant portion of Fortnite revolves around base building and putting together squads of defensive Survivors, the heart of of the game is all about mowing down waves of zombies with your Hero!

Several different classes of Hero are available to try out (so long as you unlock them through card drops), with different focuses on ranged combat, tanky melee fighters, or even improving the effectiveness of your traps and fortifications.

Note: Because Fortnite is currently in Early Access Beta and will remain so until 2018, the info below is very much subject to change at any time as tweaks are made! Some of the skill names and effects have already been changed from previous editions before Founder level backers were brought onto Closed Beta.

Fortnite Class Differences

Many different characters can be unlocked through random card drops within the same class, and each has a different skill loadout beyond the class' base skills. For instance, two characters can be the Soldier class, but one might be a Rescue Trooper and another could be a Survivalist. Some rare and legendary characters will have access to additional skills from other sub-classes.

You can also find different star versions of the same character (1-star to 4-star) with upgraded stats and extra starting skills. For another level of complexity, each character can be leveled independently (unlocking more skills down the list for each class), and when you reach a certain experience threshold, each character can then be evolved using certain items and skills.

For instance, the basic Rescue Trooper Ramirez, a Soldier-class character, can be evolved when reaching 1,500 EXP if you have 10 Pure Drops of Rain (found randomly through Llamas and completing quests) and a Training Manual. Evolution grants additional boosts to your character and your team beyond your normal skills.

Any class can use any gun or melee weapon in the game, so long as you've found the weapon randomly through a card drop or discovered the schematic through card drops and crafted it during a quest.

So what's the difference between the classes? Some classes will deal more or less damage with certain weapons or have slightly different run and sprint speeds (which can make a difference in map exploration when there's a bonus objective involving time) -- and they all have vastly different skills.

Below we've outlined all the class and sub-class skills currently available at this stage of the Fortnite Beta.

 A balanced team of Outlander, Soldier, Constructor, and Ninja

Soldier Class

Base Skills
  • Advanced Tactics: Health and Ranged Weapon Damage increased 10%
  • Frag Grenade: Throws a short-range explosive (damage and energy based on level and evolution). The Soldier carries up to three grenades and can regenerate 1 used grenade every 25 seconds
  • Shockwave: Knocks back enemies within 1 tile and deals damage to any affected enemy
  • Debilitating Shots: Dealing ranged damage adds Vulnerability to that enemy, increasing damage taken from all sources for a short time, even from other team members
  • Survivalist: Killing with ranged damage heals the soldier a small amount
  • Assault Damage: Slight increase applied to all assault weapon damage
  • Quick Clip: Reduce reload speed during combat
  • Goin' Commando: Fires mini-gun style weapon at rapid speed for huge damage
Rescue Trooper Subclass 
  • Steamy Aim: Reduces recoil of any melee weapon
  • Ammo Recovery: Gain small chance to automatically recover 1 ammo when damaging any enemy with assault weapon
Survivalist Subclass 
  • No Time To Bleed: Doubles amount healed by the Survivalist ability
  • Clean Living: Increases base health of the Soldier
Centurion Subclass
Support Specialist Subclass 
Special Forces Subclass
Warlord Subclass
Commando Subclass
Urban Assault Subclass
Shock Trooper Subclass

 Rare 1-Star Survivalist Jonesy

Constructor Class

Base Skills
  • Creative Engineering: Increases build speed and lowers build costs
  • Bull Rush: Charges forward while dealing damage and knocking enemies back
  • Plasma Pulse: Deploys device that launches explosive pulses every half second for 10 seconds
  • Kinetic Overload: Deals plasma damage and critical hits with hardware melee weapons will cause knock back
  • BASE: Sets down a BASE object that affects all building pieces within 3 tiles, granting them damage resistance and dealing retaliation damage to any enemy who strikes the object with a melee attack
Tank Subclass 
  • Shielded: Increases maximum shield health of the Constructor
  • Healthy: Increases maximum health of the Constructor
  • Actuated Attacks: Increases all blunt melee weapon damage
  • Hammer Criticals: Increases chance of critical hits with blunt melee weapons
BASE Subclass 
  • Automated Defenses: Increase BASE tile range affect by 1
  • Safety Protocols: Increases damage resistance of BASE connected tiles
  • Electrified Floors: Floor segments connected to BASE also deal electricity damage when enemies walk on them
  • Long Rush: Increases Bull Rush distance
  • Emergency Override: Immediately ends Bull Rush cool down if the Constructor's shield is reduced to 0
PowerBASE Subclass
MegaBASE Subclass
Controller Subclass
Plasma Sentinel Subclass
Plasma Shielder Subclass
Kinetic Guardian Subclass
Hotfixer Subclass
Electro-Pulse Subclass

 Rare 1-Star BASE Kyle

Ninja Class

Base Skills
  • Shinobi: Reduces fall damage
  • Throwing Stars: Hurls three damaging stars in quick succession; has a cool down before being used again
  • Mantis Leap: Can jump a second time while already jumping (note: this ability costs energy and cannot be chained together for infinite jumps)
  • Dragon Slash: Spring forward and deal damage to all enemies within a half tile along the line of attack
  • Smoke Bomb: Create a cloud of gas that slows enemies and deals damage for the duration of the cloud
  • Assassination: Dealing sword damage applies the Assassination ability, which further increases sword damage by 5%; this effect lasts 5 seconds and can stack up to 5 separate times for a total of 25% bonus damage
  • Long-Sassin: Increases duration of your Assassination from 5 seconds to 11 seconds per hit
Skirmisher Subclass 
  • Trained Throw: Reduces energy cost of Throwing Stars 
  • Cascade: Throw an additional star when using Throwing Stars
  • Rain of Death: Throw yet another star when using Throwing Stars
  • Wings of the Dragon: Increases the range of Dragon Slash
  • Return of the Dragon: Reduces energy cost of Dragon Slash 
  • Crescent Kick: Melee attack that causes stun
Fleetfoot Subclass 
  • Fleet: Increases the Ninja's base movement speed for faster walking
  • Soft Landing: Further reduces all fall damage from Shinobi skill by a higher percentage
  • Three Mantis Style: Significantly reduces the energy cost of Mantis Leap
Assassin Subclass 
  • Easy Sword: Reduces sword combo attack energy cost by 60%
  • Easier Sword: Reduces sword combo attack energy cost by 80%
  • Praying Mantis: Increase the jump height when using Mantis Leap for a second jump
Brawler Subclass
Stonefoot Subclass
Poisoner Subclass
Dragon Subclass
Dim Mak Subclass
Shuriken Master Subclass
Swordmaster Subclass

 Rare 1-Star Assassin Sarah

Outlander Class

Base Skills
  • Focus Acquisition: Increases chance to find double loot
  • In The Zone: After 5 successive hits with the pick axe, the pick axe will deal bonus damage
  • Loot Llama: Deploy a llamma anyone on the team can whack for easy resources
  • Anti-Material Charge: Charges forward and deals damage to structures or enemies, stunning them along the way
  • Phase Shift: Teleport quickly in the direction you are moving
  • Phased Out: Reduces cool down time on Phase Shift
Shock Specialist Subclass 
  • Shock Tower: Places tower that launches stunning chain lightning at any enemy who approaches
  • Capacitor: Increases duration of Shock Tower placement
  • Supercapacitor: Further increases duration of Shock Tower
  • Up The Voltage: Increases damage of Shock Tower
  • Forked Lightning: Shock Tower launches additional bolts to attack multiple enemies
Pathfinder Subclass 
  • TEDDY: Deploys a TEDDY unit to blast enemies who approach within 4 tiles
  • Passing Zone: Increases run speed while In The Zone is active
  • Keen Eyes: Reveals nearby containers with valuable loot while In The Zone is active
  • Keener Eyes: Increases Keen Eyes distance by 1 tile
  • Work, Work: Increases harvesting speed when hitting objects with the pick axe
Enforcer Subclass
Recon Scout Subclass
Vanguard Subclass
Striker Subclass
Trailblaster Subclass
Trailblazer Subclass
Ranger Subclass
Phase Scout Subclass

  Rare 1-Star Shock Specialist A.C.

Those are all the class and subclass combos we've discovered so far in Fortnite. Have you found any others in your random loot drops? Let us know in the comments section and we'll get them added to this guide!

Just getting started with the game and need more help understanding the ins and outs? Be sure to check out our beginner's guide here to learning the basics of this complicated multiplayer title's three main phases. And make sure to check out all of our other Fortnite guides here

Where to Find Pale Ore in Hollow Knight,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/1/8/b/18b4392892046f7529cfa833790baf1d1f020e4be63f8d78a9c045ee403a-a0986.jpg d56j2/where-to-find-pale-ore-in-hollow-knight Mon, 24 Jul 2017 09:33:28 -0400 Michael Dellapi

Pale Ore is one of the most coveted items in Hollow Knight because although it's hard to acquire, its rewards are unbelievably enticing. By visiting the Nailsmith, the player will be able to upgrade their Nail for each piece of Pale Ore (plus a bit of Geo) that they have. This means that the player character's Nail will be more powerful, delivering more damage via melee strikes to enemies throughout the game. 

In total, there are six pieces of Pale Ore to be found scattered throughout Hollow Knight. This guide will show where to find in each location. 

How and Where to Find Pale Ore in Hollow Knight

Hallownest's Crown

To find the Pale Ore found in Hallownest's Crown, you'll need the Monarch Wings (this is the only location on this list that requires additional tools to find Pale Ore). Technically, the item can still be accessed with some clever platforming, but the entire process is made much quicker by having the Monarch Wings in the first place. 

Navigate to the top of Crystal Peak and walk all the way to the left. There, you will see a statue of The Radiance with a glowing item found at the base. By inspecting this glow, you will acquire a Pale Ore.

Ancient Basin

This location for Pale Ore can be found starting at the main entrance of the Ancient Basin coming from Deepnest. It is located to the left of the tram station and to obtain it, you must defeat two Lesser Mawlek's. After fighting them, continue moving left and you will find an inspectable item that will grant you another Pale Ore. 


Speaking of Deepnest, this piece of Pale Ore can only be found by defeating the secret boss "Nosk." To the left of the Hot Spring in Deepnest is a breakable wall leading you into a series of tunnels. Continue traveling down this path and make your way into Nosk's lair. We won't spoil too much about the fight with Nosk, but just know that defeating him will grant you a Pale Ore


The Grubfather is an NPC found in the northwest corner of Forgotten Crossroads. Grubs are found scattered throughout the game and returning them to the Grubfather earns you a number of different rewards depending on the number of grubs returned. If the player returns 31 Grubs, however, they recieve another Pale Ore

The Seer

The Seer is met upon reaching the Resting Grounds, whereupon the NPC gives you access to the Dream Nail, a special item that lets you explore the dreams of other NPCs. 

The item allows you to gather Essence from Ghosts, Dream Warriors, and Dream Bosses. If you return to the Seer with 300 Essence, the Seer will give you a Pale Ore

Colosseum of Fools

The Colosseum of Fools lets you fight in a series of trials of escalating difficulty. The trials include the Trial of the Warrior, the Trial of the Conqueror, and the Trial of the Fool. By completing the Trial of the Conqueror, you will earn a Pale Ore and 1800 Geo.  


After finding all of these pieces and returning them to the Nailsmith, you will have a fully upgraded Nail. This dramatically boosts the damage output of the weapon and should make taking out enemies much easier. Of course, there is much more to explore in Hollow Knight, so your journey does not necessarily end after finding all of the Pale Ore. Be sure to read some of the other Hollow Knight guides from Gameskinny! Here are a few to get you started: 

Valiant Force Job Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/a/p/capture-59b1a.JPG 05chn/valiant-force-job-guide Sun, 23 Jul 2017 20:53:15 -0400 ActionJ4ck

With over 30 potential jobs for your heroes in Valiant Force, it can be a bit paralyzing to decide which job to advance your heroes into. After going through all that effort maximize your hero's level and training level, it'd be a shame to make a poor choice about their next job. Fortunately, GameSkinny is here to give you the rundown on each of Valiant Force's 36 jobs, as well as some quick tips on job advancement, so you can spend less time deliberating and more time playing.

How to Advance Jobs In Valiant Force

As you can see in the image above, each class has 6 different jobs--not counting the starting default one--beneath it in a branching tree. To upgrade a hero from their current job, they'll need to reach their max level and their max training level, as well as acquire a specific number of their current job's respective job Item. Don't worry about memorizing how to obtain each item; the job level section of each hero's info screen will help you with this. 

Advice for Advancing Jobs

Here a few more important things to keep in mind about job advancement in Valiant Force:

  • Not all heroes will have all of a class's jobs available to them, and some are not even eligible for job advancement at all. 
  • A 5-star hero can have up to a 5-star job, a 4-star hero can have up to a 4-star job, and so on.
  • Different heroes will receive different skills and auras from a job, so what job is best for one is not always what's best for another.
  • That being said, there is no real bad job. It's usually best to fill the needs of your own squad instead of going with the conventionally "better" path. For example, Kiera's MAG buffing aura as an Invoker would be pretty worthless to a melee-heavy squad, but would greatly benefit one with lots of Mystics. It all depends on your individual needs.
  • You can preview a hero's skills/auras with a specific job by going to the unit's info page, tapping the desired job in the job Tree section, and then tapping the little book icon in the job Level section. This way you'll never have to choose blindly.
  • Once you set down a path of job advancement, you cannot go backwards. So choose wisely and pick your 4-star job based on what 5-star job you want.

Now that you understand the basics, let's go over all the jobs currently in Valiant Force. We'll start with those beneath Champion class, and then continue with the Guardian, Healer, Mystic, Ranger, and Shadow classes in that order. Remember that you can use your browser's find tool if you're looking for a specific class/job.


Default Job: Warrior


Think of the Lancers as the junior Dragoons. They usually possess a very similar leaping ability that puts them next to opponents and deals damage to adjacent foes. Their auras, however, are fairly mixed in terms of their effects, so choose whichever hero-class combination sounds more appealing to you.


The Gladiators boast a high DEF stat relative to the other Champion classes. This, combined with their abilities' stun and debuff effects and auras that raise their allies' ATK or give their attacks a self-healing effect, makes Gladiators a more team-focused rol